M"~ 
 
 DR. GUNN'S 
 
 [First; DOMESTIC PHYSICIAN;" 
 
 "HOME BOOK OF HEALTH." 
 
 WAS COMPLETELY COPYRIGHTED ORIGINALLY ON THE SAME DAY WITH THE 
 
 44 Anatomy, Physiology and Laws of -Health;" 
 
 By J. H. JORDAN, M. D. 
 
 Physician to the Cincinnati Cholera Hospital in 1849. 
 
 ■ 
 
 9F W*«H\ *J^ 
 
 HIE TWO WERE PUBLISHED TOGETHER, AND WITHIN TWO MONTHS 
 
 FOLLOWING THE COPYRIGHT ON 
 
 " "ADDITIONAL DISEASES," 
 
 BY THE LATTER AUTHOR, WAS ISSUED. ROTH HAVE FORMED A PART 
 
 OF THE 
 
 "HOME BOOK OF HEALTH" 
 
 CONTINUOUSLY, AND UNDER THE RENEWED COPYRIGHT ARE TO RE- 
 MAIN A PORTION OF THE FREQUENTLY IMPROVED 
 
 "GUNN'S NEWEST FAMILY PHYSICIAN." 
 
 CHICAGO 
 
 WILLIAM H. MOORE & 
 
 188: 
 
Copyright 1885, by Wm. II. Moore. — Chicago, Wm. H. Moore & Co. 
 
 Dr. Gunn's work was first issued as " Gunn's New Domestic 
 Physician, or Home Book of Health," having the copyright duly com- 
 pleted July 30th, 1857, the title was originated and written by the person 
 whose name is given at the head of this page, the same date was also 
 copyrighted complete, and published at Cincinnati, in the same volume, 
 in 1857, an appendix, under the title, 
 
 "ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, 
 
 AND THE 
 
 LAWS OF HKALTH. 
 
 By J. H. JORDAN, M. D. 
 
 PHYSICIAN TO THE CINCINNATI CHOLERA HOSPITAL IN 1849." 
 
 From its publication, originally, until the present time, this has 
 formed a part of the volume which has become so popular and widely 
 known as Gunn's Family Physician and Home Book of Health, and. com- 
 plying with the copyright statute governing the case, it has been re-entered 
 by its author for renewal of copyright. 
 
 Copyright 1885, by Johnson H. Jordan, M. D: 
 
 In connection with the above, there was published in 1857 a Supple- 
 ment to what Dr. Gunn had written for the same volume, the same being 
 entered for copyright Sept. 25th, 1857, with the title 
 
 "Additional Diseases 
 described and treated. 
 
 By J. H. JORDAN, M. D. 
 
 PHYSICIAN TO THE CINCINNATI CHOLERA HOSPITAL IN 1849" 
 
 This filled very nearly one hundred of the octavo pages, not count- 
 ing the index matter, and covered some seventy to eighty important 
 items, continuously published in the volume until now, when it has be- 
 come necessary for the author to renew the copyright — May, 1885. 
 
 Copyright 1885, by Johnson IT. Jordan, M. I). 
 
"ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, 
 
 AND THE 
 
 LAWS OF HKALTH 
 
 By J. H. JORDAN, M. D. 
 
 PHYSICIAN TO THE CINCINNATI CHOLERA HOSPITAL IN 1849." 
 
ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY. 
 
 PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 
 
 Anatomy comprehends a knowledge simply of the structure of the 
 human body and of its various organs. It takes up and examines 
 the different parts of the body separately, as you would examine the 
 various parts of a complicated machine, and acquaints us with the 
 situation, form, and character of each, in the general economy. 
 
 Physiology shows us the functions and uses of the different parts 
 and organs of the system ; it examines the machine while in motion, 
 and explains the various processes by which it is sustained, replen- 
 ished, and made to grow, live, and act — as Digestion, Nuti'ition. 
 Circulation of the. Blood, and all those phenomena which go to con- 
 stitute Life and Health. In short, Physiology is the Science of Life. 
 
 There are few studies more interesting than Physiology, and none 
 more necessary for all classes. A knowledge of the Laws of Life and 
 Health is of vastly more importance to a young man or young woman 
 than all the French, Music, and Drawing accomplishments taught at 
 the most popular JBoarding Schools, or all the Latin, Greek, and 
 Hebrew to be learned at Yale College or Oxford University. Of 
 what value are all the more fashionable accomplishments without 
 health? I say nothing against these things: The attainment of 
 knowledge is commendable in any one, and the embellishments of 
 polite literature and a refined education are always desirable, when 
 they can be had without too great a sacrifice. But they should not 
 
6 PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 
 
 be allowed to engross the whole mind to the exclusion of knowledge 
 which has so much more important a bearing on the happiness of 
 our race ; for I need hardly say that without health there can be no 
 real happiness. 
 
 It is well to be able to read French, and to paint, and draw, and 
 play on the piano; but it is better to know how to preserve one's 
 health, and when lost, how to regain it, and then how to keep it. It 
 is well to be versed in ancient lore, and to be able to read Homer's 
 Iliad and Csesar's Commentaries in their original languages ; but it is 
 far better to know ourselves, to understand the laws of our physical 
 being, and the relation we bear to things around us. In the present 
 state of civilized society, with its Fashions, Luxuries, Yices, and 
 its various styles of Cookery — all more or less filled with the 
 seeds of Disease and Death ; and surrounded as we are on every 
 hand with Temptation in its thousand luring forms — it is next to 
 impossible to pass through life and enjoy anything like a reasonable 
 share of health, without a thorough knowledge of the Laws of Life, 
 and of the penalties which Cod has annexed to their violation. 
 Until recently no department of knowledge has been more neglected 
 than this. But at length a new era has begun to dawn upon our 
 country. Books on Anatomy, Physiology and Hygiene have been 
 prepared for families and schools, and commendable efforts are being 
 made to supply the masses with this most necessary information. 
 The public mind is becoming awakened to the importance of the 
 subject, and well it may ; for it is a fact so palpable that all can begin 
 to see it, that mortality and disease are rapidly on the increase, each 
 generation becoming more effeminate, sickly, and short-lived than 
 the one which preceded it. It is an alarming fact that the average 
 duration of human life at the present day in this and other highly 
 civilized countries is nearly or quite one-fourth less than it was one 
 or two centuries ago. Why is this? There must be some cause for 
 this degeneracy. Is it not high time that we begin to seek out this 
 cause, and the means for its removal? It is sometimes said that the 
 people of each generation grow wiser and shorter-lived than their 
 predecessors, as though the latter was the necessary result of the 
 other. We grow wiser in some things, I admit — wiser and more 
 ready in devising means and ways and facilities for producing disease 
 
PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 7 
 
 and death. In these things we are apt and progressive. But we do 
 not make adequate progress in that knowledge which is the only true 
 remedy against these evils. While the causes of disease, to be found 
 in our habits, luxuries, and manner of living, are rapidly on the 
 increase, the means of preserving life and health have been almost 
 entirely overlooked. Hence the alarming degeneracy of the species, 
 and the increase of mortality and disease. The only hope of redemp- 
 tion for our race is in a widespread, practical knowledge of ourselves 
 as organized beings — a thorough acquaintance with the philosophy 
 of existence, the laws of health, and the causes which tend to disease 
 and premature death. Let Physiology and Hygiene be taught in all 
 our schools ; let every family be provided with practical works on 
 these subjects, and both young and old study them well, and endeavor 
 to live in accordance with the truths they teach — and then there will 
 be some prospect of arresting the downward tendency of the race, 
 and hope of a return to that state of health enjoyed when our 
 grand-mothers were little girls, which we can read about, but of 
 which their grand-children know but little. 
 
 A knowledge of Anatomy, except to the operative Surgeon, is not 
 so important : yet an acquaintance with its outlines at least, is neces- 
 sarily connected with the study of Physiology, and can not be dis- 
 pensed with. Hence I shall proceed first to give a brief but conciso 
 view of the Anatomy of the human system. After which the Physi- 
 ology of the principal processes and functions of animal life will be 
 given in detail, accompanied with practical observations on Hygiene, 
 or the Laws of Health. 
 
8 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 ANATOMY 
 
 Organs and Divisions of the Body. 
 
 The human organism is divided into Bones, Muscles, Arteries, Veins. 
 Nerves, and Viscera, or Internal Organs. 
 
 The body, in its description, is divided into the head, trunk, and 
 upper and lower extremities. The trunk is also divided into chest and 
 abdomen. 
 
 The Osseous or Bony System. 
 
 The bones are the hardest and most solid parts, and are designed 
 as a frame-work or foundation for the attachment and support of the 
 softer parts, to give form and symmetry to the body, and for the 
 purposes of motion and locomotion. When connected together in 
 their natural order, they form what is called the skeleton. 
 
 The round bones are generally tubular, and the hollow is filled 
 with a medullary substance called marrow, except at the ends or 
 joints, where, instead of being hollow, the}- are usually enlarged, 
 forming a kind of head, which consists of a sort of net-work structure, 
 somewhat resembling honey-comb. The flat bones, as those of the 
 skull and the scapula or shoulder blades, consist of two thin tables, or 
 plates, united by the same kind of net-work structure. 
 
 Like all other parts of the body (except the nails and hair), the 
 bones are supplied with blood-vessels, and nerves; and in their 
 healthy state contain but little or no sensibilit}^. But when m a state 
 of inflammation they are extremely sensitive and painful. The 
 bones are covered with a very firm, thin and closely attached mem- 
 brane called the periosteum. Where this membrane covers the skull 
 or cranium it is called pericranium. 
 
 The number of bones in the human body, including the teeth, is 
 two hundred and forty, proper; though sometimes there are found in 
 the thumbs and great toes what are called the sesamoid bones, increas- 
 ing the number to two hundred and forty-eight. The head (including 
 the thirty-two teeth) contains sixty-three bones; the trunk fifty-three; 
 the upper extremities, or arms, sixty-four; and the lower extremities 
 sixty. 
 
 These bones are composed of both earthy and animal matter. The 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 9 
 
 earthy portion, which is mainly the carbonate and phosphate of lime, 
 gives them their solidity and strength; while the animal portion, 
 which is mostly gelatin, gives to them vitality, and prevents them 
 from being too brittle. If you will calcine a bone — in other words, 
 burn it in a clear fire for ten or fifteen minutes, it will become white 
 and brittle, the gelatin or animal portion having been destroyed, 
 leaving the lime and chalk, or earthy portion. Again, to show the 
 animal without the earthy matter, place a small bone for a few days 
 in dilute muriatic acid, say one part acid and five or six parts water, 
 and the acid will have removed the earthy matter, by its affinity for 
 the lime, leaving the bone unchanged in shape, yet so soft that it 
 may be bent in any direction. In children, while the bones are soft, 
 these two substances are nearly equal; but in adults there is a- much 
 larger proportion of the earthy than of the animal matter in the 
 bones. In the disease called rickets, or curvature of the spine, the 
 earthy part of the bones has been more or less absorbed, leaving 
 them soft and flexible. 
 
 The bones, like all other parts of the body, are formed from the 
 blood, being at first only cartilage, and, while in this state, supplied 
 only with the lymph or white portion of the blood. By and by they are 
 supplied with red blood, when the formation of true bone, or ossifica- 
 tion commences, by the deposit of phosphate and carbonate of lime. 
 This process begins at certain points, called the points of ossif cation — 
 generally in the center or middle of the bones, and gradually extends 
 to the surface and ends. When ossification is complete there is still 
 a gradual and constant change going on in the bones. They increase 
 in size, the proportion of the animal matter decreasing and the earthy 
 increasing, as the person advances in years, till in extreme old age 
 the earthy substance so preponderates that the bones are extremely 
 brittle and easily broken. 
 
 Such bones as form joints, as those of the arms and legs, have a 
 reciprocal correspondence in their shapes at the points of union, the 
 one usually being convex or round, and the other concave or socket- 
 shaped, so that they nicely fit together. They are also at these points 
 spongy and porous, which renders them more elastic than if compact 
 and hard, and are also covered with a cushion of cartilage, which 
 acts like India-rubber springs, in preventing or diminishing severe 
 jars and concussions. There is around and about every joint what is 
 called the synovial membrane, which secretes a fluid called synovia or 
 joint-water. This is for the purpose of oiling or lubricating the 
 joints and surfaces of the bones and tendons, so that they may move 
 smoothly upon each other, and avoid the friction consequent upon 
 their action. 
 
10 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 Names of the Principal Bones. 
 
 The bones of the head are divided into those of the Skull, Ear, and 
 Face. The skull is not one continuous bone, but is composed of eight 
 distinct parts united by ragged edges somewhat like saw-teeth, called 
 sutures. These bones are also composed of two thin plates or tablets, 
 united by a spongy, porous portion of bone. The outside plate is 
 tough and fibrous; the inside one hard and glassy, and hence called 
 the vitreous plate. The skull contains the Brain, and we here see the 
 wisdom displayed in guarding that important and sensitive organ. 
 The outside plate being tough and yielding, and the spongy portion 
 between the two, serve to diminish the vibrations and shocks in 
 cases of falls and blows. The skull being composed of several bones 
 is also calculated to prevent fractures from extending as far as they 
 otherwise would, if it was one continuous bone. In all this we see 
 the hand of Intelligence and Wisdom. And there is probably no 
 science in the world, or collection of facts, which contains so much 
 and so conclusive evidence of the Wisdom and Design of a Great 
 First Cause, as that of the anatomy of the human body. 
 
 Bones op the Head. — See Skeleton. 
 
 1. Frontal bone — which constitutes the front part of the head, or the forehead. 
 
 2. Parietal, or side hones — one on each side, extending from near the ear to the 
 top of the head. 
 
 3. Nasal bones, or bones of the Lose. 
 
 4. Occipital bone (Fig. 2) — which is at the back and lower part of the head. 
 
 5. Temporal, or Temple bone — below the Parietal, one on each side, to which the 
 ear is attached. 
 
 Besides these there are what are called the Sphenoid and the Ethmoid bones, which 
 are at the base of the skull, and back of the nose, and can not be shown in the plate. 
 The Sphenoid forms the floor of the skull, and has numerous holes or openings 
 through it, affording passages for the nerves and blood vessels. 
 
 6. Malar, or cheek-bone — one on each side. 
 
 7. Superior and Inferior Maxillary bones — or bones of the upper and lower Jaws. 
 Besides the bones I have named, there are several smaller ones in the head and 
 
 face, as the small bones of the ear, and others not necessai*y to mention. 
 
 Bones of the Trunk. 
 
 The Spinal Column : The vertebrae or bones of the spinal column, or back-bone, 
 are twenty-four in number, and are divided into three parts. The first seven of them, 
 which form the bones of the neck (9) are called the Cervical vertebrae. The next 
 twelve (x.) which constitute the back-bone proper, are called the Dorsal vertebrae. 
 The ribs are attached to these. The remaining five (14) constituting the loins or 
 small of the back, are called the Lumbar vertebrae. 
 
Pig. 1. ' 
 
 Front view of the Human Skeleton. 8 
 
Pig. 2. 
 
 4- Back View of the Human Skeleton. 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 13 
 
 Each vertebra is a separate bone, joined by cartilage, and is of a peculiar shape; 
 yet is so very similar to the vertebrae of the common animals, with which it is presumed 
 every person is so familiar that it needs no description. There is a hole through 
 each one, which, when they are joined together, in the column, constitute a canal or 
 tube, for containing the spinal marrow or cord. 
 
 12. The Sternum, or Breast bone. In the child this bone consists of eight pieces., 
 which become united, so as to consist of but three pieces in the adult. 
 
 13. The Ribs. They are attached to the spinal column behind, and the first or 
 upper seven, called the true ribs, to the sternum in front. The lower five, called the 
 false ribs are not attached to the sternum. They are usually attached in front to 
 the lower true ribs, by cartilage. 
 
 16. The Sacrum, or sacred bone, so called because it was offered in sacrifice by the 
 ancients. The lower end of this bone is called the coccyx, or os coccygis. It is a small, 
 separate bone, and terminates the spine. 
 
 15. Os Innominata, or nameless bone, the top of which forms the hip bone. This 
 part of the bone is called the ilium; the lower part the ischium ; and where the two 
 unite in front, the pubis. In the sides of these large bones (the os innominata) 
 near the lower part, is a deep socket, like a cup, called the acetabulum, in which the 
 head of the femur, or thigh bone is placed. These two large bones, with the sacrum 
 and coccyx, constitute what is called the Pelvis. 
 
 Bones of the Upper Extremities. 
 
 10. The Collar bone, called the Clavicle. It unites at one end with the sternum 
 or breast bone, and at the other with the head of the shoulder blade, and serves to 
 keep the shoulders apart and elevated. There are two of them, one on each side. 
 
 11. The Scapula or shoulder blade. It is a thin, flat bone, of a triangular shape 
 (see Fig. 2) placed on the outside of the ribs, back of and below the shoulder. It 
 has a large head, containing a cavity or socket called the glenoid cavity, which receives 
 the upper end of the humerus, and to which it is attached. 
 
 17. The Humerus, or bone of the upper arm. 
 
 18. The Radius, or bone of the fore arm which turns with the hand in its rotary 
 movements. This bone is situated on the outside of the arm — the thumb sides — and 
 articulates or joins with the bones of the wrist to form the wrist joint. 
 
 19. The Ulna — the inside bone of the arm, which articulates with the humerus at 
 the elbow, to form the elbow-joint. It is the bone by which the muscles bend the 
 fore arm. 
 
 20. The Carpus, or wrist — composed of eight little bones of peculiar shapes, 
 dffranged in two rows, and so firmly bound together as to permit of only a small 
 amount of movement. 
 
 21. The Metacarpus — or the five bones constituting the palm of the hand. The 
 first range of the bones of the fingers and thumb is attached to them. 
 
 22. The Phalanges, or bones of the fingers. The phalanges of the fingers have 
 three ranges of bones, or three joints, while the thumb has but two. 
 
 Bones of the Lower Extremities. 
 
 23. The thigh bone — called the Femur or os femoris. It is the largest bone in the 
 body, and supports the weight of the head, trunk, and upper extremities, and often 
 much additional weight. 
 
 24. The Patella, or knee-pan. It is a small bone connected with the tibia by a 
 
 
14 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 strong ligament, while the tendon of the extensor muscles of the leg is attached to 
 its upper edge. It rests on the fore part of the lower end of the femur, and acts like 
 a pulley in straitening the limb. 
 
 25. The Fibula, or smaller bone of the leg. It is much smaller than the tibia, and 
 13 firmly bound to it at each end. 
 
 26. The Tibia, or large bone of the leg — the " shin bone." It is of a triangular 
 shape, and enlarged at each end. 
 
 27. The heel bone, called the Calcis, and the Astragalus, upon which the tibia 
 vests. 
 
 28. The Tarsus, or bones of the instep. There are five of them, which, like the 
 bones of the wrist, are so firmly bound together as to allow of but little movement. 
 
 29. The Metatarsus, consisting of five bones also, corresponding to the metacarpus 
 of the hand. 
 
 30. The Phalanges, or bones of the toes. They consist of fourteen bones, the great 
 toe having two ranges, and all the others three. 
 
 The joints form an interesting part of the body. In their construction every 
 thing shows the display of wisdom, and the strictest regard to the security and the 
 facility of motion of the parts thus connected together. Joints are formed by the 
 aid of Cartilages, Synovial membrane, and Ligaments. 
 
 The Teeth. 
 
 The teeth are inserted into the upper and lower maxillary bones, in sockets or 
 openings, termed the alveola processes. The teeth differ from other bones in composi- 
 tion and growth ; and will not, like bones, unite again when broken. A tooth is 
 divided into two parts, the crown and the root. The crown is that portion which pro- 
 trudes from the jaw and gums, and is covered with a hard and highly-polished sub- 
 stance called the enamel. The root is the portion inserted in the jaw. This part of 
 the tooth consists of bony matter, and is supplied with nutrient vessels and nerves. 
 It is their nerves which cause them to ache. The first teeth that appear in the infant 
 are called milk-teeth, and are twenty in number. They usually disappear, or are 
 shed, about the seventh year or soon afterward. What are called the wisdom teeth — 
 xapientice dentes — do not appear till the person is twenty years of age. The four 
 front teeth (above and below), are called incisors; the next one on each side is 
 called the cuspid (eye-tooth) ; the next two on each side are the bicuspids; the next 
 two, the molars or grinders; and the last one, on each side, the wisdom tooth. The 
 incisors, cuspids, and bicuspids, have each but one root; the molars of the lower jaw 
 have two roots, while those of the upper jaw have three. 
 
 Cartilages. 
 These are smooth, white, elastic substances, sometimes called gristle, 
 which unite bones together, and cover the ends of those which move 
 upon each other, as in the joints. They resemble bone in appearance, 
 but arc much softer. There are thin layers of this substance between 
 the joints or vertebra of the spinal column about the sixteenth of an 
 inch in thickness, which facilitates the bending movements of the 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 15 
 
 back; and also forming a sort of cushion, they serve to diffuse and 
 diminish the shock in walking, running and jumping. Cartilage is 
 found in all the joints. It is also added to the end of bones to 
 increase their length, as in the front part of the ribs, which consists 
 entirely of cartilage. 
 
 Ligaments. 
 These are strong, white, fibrous cords, or bands, which connect 
 bones together at the joints, and hold them in their places. They are 
 of various breadths; and sometimes they are so interwoven as to 
 form a broad layer which entirely surrounds the joint like a bag. 
 In this case they are called capsular ligaments, and serve the purpose 
 also of preventing the escape of the synovial fluid, which is intended 
 to lubricate the parts. The shoulder joint is surrounded by one of 
 these capsular ligaments. Ligaments also serve to keep the Liver, 
 Spleen, and other internal organs, in their places. Like the bones, 
 they possess but little sensibility when in a healthy state; but when 
 attacked by inflammation they are extremely painful. 
 
 Membranes. 
 
 Membranes are thin expanded substances which line the cavities 
 of the body and envelop all the organs. They are of different kinds, 
 and vary in structure and appearance as much as they do in function. 
 
 Serous Membrane : This envelops the brain, lines the chest and 
 abdomen, and covers the lungs, stomach, intestines, and other organs 
 of the abdomen and chest. It has a smooth, shining appearance, and 
 is constantly moistened by a watery or serous exhalation, in conse- 
 quence of which it receives its name. It has different names however, 
 in different parts of the body, according to the cavity it lines. In the 
 chest it is called the pleura, and when inflamed the disease is called 
 the pleurisy. In the abdomen it is called the peritoneum, and that 
 which surrounds the brain is known as the dura mater, or strong mother. 
 In a state of health it is white, but when inflamed it becomes red, 
 the vessels being charged with blood ; it is also apt when inflamed to 
 form adhesions to the parts on each side of it, so that the lungs may 
 become glued to the ribs, or the intestines to the internal surface of 
 the abdomen, or to each other. Dropsies are caused by the exhala- 
 tions from this membrane, the water collecting in cavities and not 
 being carried off by the absorbents. 
 
 Mucous Membrane : This membrane lines the nose, mouth, throat, 
 air passages of the lungs, stomach, intestines, and other free passages 
 of the body. In the stomach and intestines it is thrown into folds, 
 which increase 'the extent of its surface and prevent the food from 
 
16 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 hurrying through the alimentary canal with too much rapidity. It 
 is soft, velvet-like in appearance, and is of a pale pink color when in 
 health, but red when inflamed. It secretes a peculiar fluid, of a 
 slimy nature, which is called mucus. Blood frequently exudes from 
 this membrane, constituting hemorrhage, which may take place from 
 the lungs, stomach, or any other part which it lines. A false mem- 
 brane sometimes forms upon its surface, which in croup is coughed 
 up from the windpipe, and in other diseases, as dysentery, is dis- 
 charged from the bowels. This membrane, though ever so much 
 inflamed, never forms adhesions. If it did, the intestines, windpipe, 
 throat, and other free passages might become closed up, when death 
 would be the inevitable consequence. 
 
 Cellular Membrane : This is a loose and very thin membranous 
 structure, which fills the space between the muscles, and between 
 them and other solid parts, connecting them together without inter- 
 fering with their functions. It may be seen everywhere between the 
 muscles and the skin, of a light, shining color, giving a smoothness 
 and softness to the surface of the body. It forms a great many little 
 cells, which are kept moist by a watery vapor exhaled from the 
 minute branches of the arteries ; and if it should be exhaled in 
 greater quantities than can be removed by the absorbents, it fills and 
 distends the cells, and constitutes cellular or general dropsy. 
 
 THE MUSCLES. 
 
 The Muscles constitute that portion of the body which we call flesh, 
 and are the proper name of what is known as lean meat. Instead of 
 being in one solid, continuous mass, as might be supposed, from 
 external appearance, the flesh of the body is found to be composed 
 of a vast number of separate pieces or strips, of various lengths and 
 shapes, but seldom more than half an inch in thickness, each envel- 
 oped in a thin, transparent membrane, and the whole arranged in 
 layers one above another, giving to the body bulk, form and sym- 
 metry. These are called muscles, and by their contraction and relaxa- 
 tion produce the various motions of which the body is capable. The 
 human body contains over five hundred — five, hundred and twenty- 
 seven it is said — of these muscles, the most of them being arranged 
 in pairs. 
 
 In structure a muscle is composed of small bundles of fibers, called 
 fasciculi, and each of these fibers is composed again of filaments or 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 17 
 
 threads. These bundles are nicely enveloped in Jhin cellular tissue 
 or membrane, and the whole put together to constitute a muscle. A 
 irreat many of the muscles terminate at one or both ends in what is 
 called tendon — sometimes constituting cords, as in the wrist and ankle 
 — which is a white, hard, firm, inelastic cellular substance, very 
 strong, and is for the purpose of attaching the ends of the muscles to 
 the bones. In some instances the tendon of a muscle spreads out or 
 expands in its attachment, and then it is called Fascia or Aponeurosis. 
 This fascia or expansion of tendon becomes quite thick in some places, 
 and serves as a protection to parts beneath, as in the palm of the 
 hand, and sole of the foot. 
 
 Upon the arms and legs the muscles are situated around the bones, 
 and serve to invest and defend them, while they also form to some 
 of the joints their principal protection. Upon the trunk they are 
 spread .out to enclose cavities, and form a defensive wall, which yields 
 to internal pressure and the expansion of the body. 
 
 Muscles may be arranged into several classes, as to their shapes, 
 and the arrangement of their fibers. Some are completely longitu- 
 dinal — that is, long and spindle-shaped, each extremity terminating 
 in a tendon; as the muscles of the arms and legs: In others the 
 fibers are disposed like the rays of a fan, converging to a tendonous 
 point, and constituting what is termed a radiate or broad muscle. 
 Again we find some with their fibers converging like the small feath- 
 ers upon a quill or pen, to one side of a tendon — or it may be to both 
 sides of it — running the whole length of the muscle. This style of 
 muscle is called penniform. 
 
 In the description of a muscle, its attachments are expressed by 
 the terms "origin"' and "insertion." The origin is the attachment 
 to the more fixed or immovable point, or that toivard which the 
 muscle draws some other part, in its legitimate action : While the 
 insertion is at the more movable point, or part to be acted upon. For 
 instance the principal muscles which move the arm are attached 
 at one end to the scapula or shoulder-blade — this is called their 
 origin; while the other end is attached to some portion of the humerus 
 or bones of the arm, and is called their insertion. The principal mus- 
 cles which produce the motions in the lower extremities have their 
 origin upon some portion of the large bones of the hip or pelvis, while 
 their insertion is upon the femur, or bones of the leg. The interstices 
 between the muscles, especially in young persons, are generally filled 
 with a substance called adipose matter, or fat, which gives to the 
 different parts of the body a round and plump appearance. 
 
 In conformity with the general divisions of the body, the muscles, 
 like the bones, may be arranged into four parts. 1st, Those of the 
 
18 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 Head and Neck. 2d, Those of the Trunk. 3d, Those of the Upper 
 Extremities. 4th, Those of the Lower Extremities. In their dis- 
 tribution they may be said to form two layers, a superficial, and a 
 deep-seatecl one. Though in some places there are more than this. 
 On the back, for instance, the muscles are arranged in six layers, one 
 above the other, in order to produce the various and complicated 
 movements of the back, neck, arms, chest, and abdomen. All the 
 various movements of the body, and of its different parts, are pro- 
 duced by the muscles, the bones serving, in most cases, as the levers 
 of motion. 
 
 Those muscles by which a limb is bent, are called flexors, and those 
 by which it is straitened, extensors. These two sets of muscles are 
 said to antagonize each other : that is, the flexors pull in one direction, 
 and the extensors in another, so that by their alternate contraction 
 and relaxation, two distinct and opposite motions are produced. 
 
 The muscles are also classified under the two heads of Voluntary 
 and Involuntary. The first are such as are under the control of the 
 will, and enable us to walk, run, leap, and perform any other volun- 
 tary act. The muscles by which we bend the arm, open and shut the 
 mouth, etc., are voluntary muscles, because we call them into action at 
 pleasure, by an effort of the will. 
 
 The involuntary muscles are those over which the will has no 
 influence. The heart is a muscular organ, acting with tremendous 
 force in propelling the blood through the arteries; the stomach also, 
 and the intestines have muscular coats, by which they are enabled to 
 contract and relax for the purpose of moving their contents; yet they 
 are uncontroled by the will, acting independent of it, and are there- 
 fore denominated involuntary muscles. There are others which are 
 both voluntary and involuntary, and are therefore said to be mixed ; 
 as the diaphragm, and other muscles of respiration. They perform 
 their regular functions, asleep or awake, whether we will it or not ; 
 yet we can, by an effort of the will, cause them, for the time being, 
 to act quicker, faster or slower, as we please. 
 
 Muscles are acted upon and controlled by the nerves. Contractility 
 is an inherent quality of muscular fiber, enabling it to shorten its 
 substance, like a piece of India-rubber, when the proper stimulus is 
 applied, and again relaxing when the stimulus is withdrawn. This 
 stimulus is the nervous fluid, which acts upon the muscles somewhat 
 similar to galvanism or electricity. The velocity of muscular con- 
 traction, or rapidity with which the voluntary muscles may be made 
 to act, is truly astonishing. It is often as quick as thought. This 
 may be seen in rapid speaking, or playing upon a musical instrument. 
 Persons have been known to utter distinctly fifteen hundred letters 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 19 
 
 in a minute, the pronunciation of each letter requiring both contrac- 
 tion and relaxation of the same muscles, thus making three thoitsa?ul 
 actions in a minute ! It is owing to the contractility of the muscles, 
 and the wonderful power which the will or mind (which furnishes 
 the nervous stimulus) has over them, that we are enabled to pursue 
 the various avocations of life. " By their action the farmer cultivates 
 his fields, the mechanic wields his tools, the sportsman pursues his 
 game, the orator gives utterance to his thoughts, the lady sweeps the 
 keys of the piano, and the young are whirled in the mazy dance." 
 
 The oblique abdominal muscles terminate in a broad pearl-colored 
 fascia, or aponeurosis, which completely covers the front or middle 
 portion of the abdomen ; while the dorsal muscles, or muscles of the 
 back, blend into one mass of tendon below, which expands and 
 attaches to the sacrum, and back part of the iliac crest, or hip bones. 
 On the wrists and ankles, the long tendons of the muscles are closely 
 and firmly bound down by strong bands, called the annular ligaments. 
 
 Notwithstanding their great number, the muscles all have names — 
 Latin names, some of them long and difficult to remember. These 
 names generally have reference in their meaning to the character or 
 use of the muscles to which they are applied, so that if we under- 
 stood the Latin language as well as we do the English, we should, on 
 hearing the name of a muscle, immediately know something of its 
 general character, situation, and use. 
 
 It would be as useless, perhaps, in a work like this, to give the names 
 of all the muscles, and their "origin" and "insertion," as it would 
 be difficult to convey an exact idea of them. The only way to get 
 a correct knowledge of the muscles, as to their shape, size, and loca- 
 tion, is by seeing them dissected on the real subject. But such a 
 knowledge, even, is of but little practical use to any one except the 
 anatomist or surgeon. It is well to know that we have muscles, and 
 to understand the general character and use of them. It is still 
 more important to know how to take care of our muscles — how to 
 develop them properly and keep them in a healthy condition. 
 
 The accompanying engravings will give you an idea, as well as it 
 can be done on paper, of the character, shape, and appearance of the 
 muscles. They exhibit only the superficial or outside muscles, such 
 as would be seen on removing the skin from the body. Underneath 
 them is one or two, and in some places several layers of other mus- 
 cles. Such as can be seen in the Figures are numbered, and their 
 names and uses given in the following tables. 
 
20 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 Names op the Principal Muscles, and Their Uses. 
 Fig. 3 — Front View of the Muscles. 
 
 1. Occipito-frontalis — to raise the eyebrows, and move the scalp. 
 
 2. Orbicularis palpebrarum — to close the eyelids. 
 
 3. Levator labia superioris — to elevate the upper lip. 
 
 4. Zigamaticus major; 5 Z. minor — to elevate angles of the mouth. 
 
 6. Masseter anterior — to bring the jaws together in chewing. 
 
 7. Orbicularis oris — to close and pucker the mouth. 
 
 8. Depressor labii inferioris — to depress the lower lip. 
 
 9. Platysma myoides (and 6, Fig 4) — to bend the neck forward. 
 
 10. Deltoid (and 8, Fig. 4) — to elevate or raise the arm. 
 
 11. Pectoralis major — to bring the shoulder forward. 
 
 32. Latissimus dorsi — to draw the arm backward and downward. 
 
 14. Biceps flexor cubiti — to bend the arm at the elbow. 
 
 15. Triceps extensor cubiti — to extend the fore arm. 
 
 16. Supinator radii longus — to bend the wrist. 
 
 18. Flexor carpi radialis longior — also to bend the wrist. 
 
 19. Flexor communis digitorum — to bend the digits, or fingers. 
 
 20. Annular ligament — a strong ligament which surrounds the wrist, to hold the 
 muscles and tendons down to their place. It is a perfect wrist-band. 
 
 21. Palmar fascia — or fascia of the palm of the hand — a tendonous structure, 
 spread out to protect the organs beneath. 
 
 22. Obliquus externus abdominus — to support the bowels. 
 
 26. Psoas magnus — 27 Abductor longus — 28 Sartorius — these three muscles bend 
 he lower limbs at the hip joints. The Sartorius is called the "tailor's muscle," 
 because it is the muscle used in drawing one leg over the other, in the position of a 
 tailor when sewing. 
 
 29. Rectus femoris — 30 Vastus externus — 31 Vastus internus — these three extend 
 or straiten the leg at the knee. 
 
 32. The tendon of the patella. 
 
 33. Gastrocnemus — to extend the foot. 
 
 34. Tibialis anticus — to bend the foot at the ankle. 
 
 36. Tendons of the Extensor digitorum communis — to extend the toes. 
 
 Fig. 4 — Back View of the Muscles. 
 
 3. Complexus — to draw the head backward. 
 
 4. Splenius (two, S. colli and S. capitis) — to draw the neck backward, and rotate 
 the head. 
 
 5. Masseter — to close the jaws. 
 
 6. Sterno-cleido — mastoideus — to draw the head forward. 
 
 7. Trapezius — to draw the shoulder up and backward. 
 
 8. Deltoid — to raise the humerus. 
 
 10. Triceps extensor — to extend the fore arm; 13, tendonous portion of the triceps; 
 14, anterior edge of the triceps. 
 
 16. Supinator radii longus — to supinate the hand, or turn it upward. 
 
 17, 22. Extensor communis digitorum — to extend or straiten the fingers. 
 
Pig. 3, 
 
 Front View of the Musoles. 
 
Fig. 4. 
 
 Back View of the Muscles. 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 23 
 
 18. Extensor ossis metacarpi pollieis — to extend the first metacarpal bone ; 19 — 
 its tendons. 
 
 20. Olecranon process of the ulna and insertion of the triceps. 
 
 21. Extensor carpi ulnaris — to extend the hand. 
 
 24. Latissimus dorsi — to draw the arm backward and downward; 25 — its tendon- 
 ous origin. 
 
 20. Obliquus externus — to support the bowels. 
 
 27. Gluteus medius — to rotate the thigh outward and inward. 
 
 28. Glutens magnus — to draw the thigh backward. 
 
 29. Biceps flexor ci-uris — to flex or bend the leg. 
 
 30. Semi-tendinosus — to assist in bending the leg. 
 
 31. 32 Gastrocnemius, (internus and externus) — to extend the foot. 
 83. Tendo Achillis — the great tendon or cord of the heel. 
 
 Alternate Exercise and Eest constitute the great law of muscular 
 health and development. The muscles should be used, in order that 
 their size and strength may be equal to the demand made upon them. 
 It is a law of the muscular system that whenever a muscle is-called 
 into frequent use, its fibers increase in thickness — within certain 
 limits — and become capable of acting with greater force ; while on 
 the contrary, the muscle that is little used decreases in size and 
 power. This exercise, or use of the muscles, however, must be 
 properly regulated, and confined within certain limits. Too much, 
 or too long continued exertion, is injurious. Eelaxation should 
 quickly follow contraction, or exhaustion of the muscle will be the 
 consequence. So must rest follow exercise, and it must be continued 
 long enough for the nutrition and recruit of the muscles to take place, 
 or they will become lessened in size and diminished in power. Exer- 
 cise, either for pleasure or profit, should never be carried to the 
 point of languor or exhaustion. When it is desirable to develop or 
 strengthen the muscular system, exercise should be taken moderately 
 at first, and gradually increased as the system can bear it. 
 
 Friction upon the muscles — in other words, rubbing them — is very 
 beneficial. It hastens the process of nutrition, and the re-supply of 
 the exhausted nervous fluid. The whole body should be well rubbed 
 once or twice a day. The horse will travel farther and easier, if not 
 only rubbed daily, but also at such times as the traveler stops to rest. 
 " It is a matter of surprise," says a popular writer on Physiology, 
 " that the experience and common sense which lead every person 
 who owns a horse, to have him well groomed every day, should not 
 have taught men that the same good thing should be done for the 
 human body, which will in fact be more benefited by rubbing than 
 any animal. Every laborer with muscles or brain, every gentleman 
 
24 
 
 or lady of leisure, who cares to labor easily, enjoy comfort, or appear 
 gracefully, should equally and daily practice rubbing the body from 
 head to foot." 
 
 The regular exercise of the muscles should be conducted under 
 proper mental influences. The mind and the body reciprocate in 
 their influences, upon each other. The mind has much to do with 
 the beneficial exercise of the muscles, while inactivity of the muscu- 
 lar system produces ennui, and dullness of intellect, which nothing 
 but exercise can remove. In fine, proper and judicious exercise pro- 
 duces delightful sensations, a clearness of intellect, and elasticity of 
 spirits, that the indolent never know. While, in order to a healthy 
 exercise of the muscles, there should be an active intellect, cheerful 
 disposition, wholesome food, plenty of pure, cool air, and loose warm 
 clothing in cold weather, and loose cool clothing in warm weather. 
 
 THE CIRCULATORY ORGANS. 
 
 The Heart. 
 
 The Heart is a very strong muscular body, which propels the blood 
 through the arteries to every part of the system. It is somewhat in 
 the shape of an inverted cone, and is situated in the chest, a little to 
 the left of the sternum or breastbone, its lower end or apex resting 
 on the tendonous portion of the diaphragm, about three inches from 
 the sternum, opposite the space between the fifth and sixth ribs of 
 the left side. The heart is surrounded by a strong membranous sac 
 called the pericardium, which protects it, and confines it to its proper 
 place. It occupies an oblique position in the chest, and is almost 
 wholly covered by the lobes of the left lung. The medium weight 
 of the heart, in adults, is from eight to ten ounces, being about an 
 ounce heavier in man than in woman. 
 
 The heart has four cavities, two of which are called auricles and two 
 ventricles; and from its peculiar construction may properly be called 
 a double organ, having two sides, the right and the left, with an 
 auricle and ventricle in each. The compartments of the two sides, 
 are separated by a muscular partition, called the septum. The aorta 
 or great artery-trunk, and the pulmonary artery proceed from the heart 
 — the latter from the right ventricle, and the other from the left 
 ventricle. The large trunks of the veins, called the descending and 
 ascending vena ca,va, and the pulmonary veins, terminate or open into 
 the auricles of the heart. 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 
 
 25 
 
 View of the Heart. 
 
 Fig. 5. — Ra, Right auricle; Rv, Right ventricle; La, Left auricle; Lv, Left ventricle; 
 A, Great aorta and its arch ; B, aorta descending into the abdomen ; C, right sub- 
 clavian vein, coming from the right arm ; D, left subclavian vein, coming from the 
 left arm — these two branches unite and form the descending vena cava; E, ascending 
 vena cava, which returns the blood to the heart from the lower extremities ; F, vein 
 returning the blood from the liver, spleen, and bowels ; H, arteria innominata, 
 dividing into right carotid artery (K-)> which goes to the right side of the neck ; 
 and right subclavian artery (J.), which goes to the right arm ; M, left carotid artery, 
 going to left side of the neck; N. left subclavian artery, going to left arm; P, pulmon- 
 ary artery, which rises from the right ventricle and divides, one branch, passing 
 under the arch of the aorta, goes to the right lung, the other goes to the left lung ; 
 0, 0, pulmonary veins, which return the blood from the lungs to the heart — they 
 empty into the left auricle. JUi^'The arrows show the course of the blood in the 
 arteries and veins. 
 
 The auricles differ in the strength and thickness of their walls 
 from the ventricles, being thinner, and of a bluish color. They serve 
 
26 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 as a sort of reservoirs or receivers of the blood, as it arrives by the veins. 
 The ventricles have their walls thicker than the auricles, because 
 greater strength is required of them, to force the blood out and 
 through the arteries ; and the walls of the left ventricle are thicker 
 than those of the right, for the reason that greater power is required 
 of it. The right ventricle only propels the blood to the lungs, while 
 the left forces it to all parts of the body. Each of the cavities of the 
 heart will contain about two ounces of blood. The offices or func- 
 tions of these parts will be more fully explained when we come to 
 speak of the circulation of the blood. 
 
 The action of the heart consists in its contraction and dilatation, and 
 as incredible as it may seem, it contracts every twenty-four hours, in 
 a healthy, grown person, over one hundred thousand times ! Asleep or 
 awake, the action of this important and wonderful organ goes con- 
 stantly on. 
 
 The pericardium, which surrounds the heart, secretes from its inter- 
 nal surface, a watery fluid, which serves to lubricate the exterior of 
 the heart, and thus j)revent friction between the two. Sometimes 
 when diseased a deposit of water takes place within the pericardium 
 and around the heart, constituting dropsy of the heart. 
 
 The true office of the heart was not fully known till Harvey dis- 
 covered the circulation of the blood. Yet so long ago as the days of 
 Plato it seems that a tolerably rational idea of its function and of the 
 circulation of the blood was entertained, for in speaking of this organ 
 that writer very prettily observes — " It is the center or knot of the 
 bloodvessels; the spring or fountain of the blood, which is carried 
 impetuously round ; the blood is the food of the flesh ; and for the 
 purpose of nourishment, the body is laid out in canals, like those 
 which are drawn through gardens, that the blood may be conveyed 
 as from a fountain to every part of the body." It would be difficult 
 for any one at the present day to give in as few words a more correct 
 and expressive idea of the whole subject than is here given by this 
 ancient heathen philosopher. 
 
 The Arteries. 
 The Arteries are strong, elastic, membranous tubes, which arise 
 from the heart by two trunks, and convey the blood, by their innu- 
 merable branches, from the heart to every part of the system. They 
 are composed of three coats. The outside, called the cellular coat, is 
 firm, strong, and elastic, enabling it to withstand the impulse of the 
 blood as it is sent from the heart. The middle or muscular coat is 
 composed of yellowish-white fibers — is thicker than the external 
 coat, but not so strong, as its fibers pass around the tube instead of 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 
 
 27 
 
 lengthwise. The inner coat is a thin, serous membrane, which lines 
 the interior of the artery and gives it a smooth surface, permitting 
 the blood to flow along it freely. 
 
 The arteries are enveloped in sheaths of a loose cellular texture 
 (the same which envelop the muscles), which separate them from 
 the adjacent parts, and also enclose the veins and nerves which gene 
 rally accompany them. 
 
 All the larger arteries are deeply seated, by which arrangement 
 they are protected from injury by accidents, while the veins, which 
 do not involve so serious consequences in case of wounds, are gene- 
 rally placed near the surface of the body — often immediately under 
 the skin, as on the back of the hand, and upon the wrist. 
 
 Fig. 6. 
 
 Fig. 6. — The Arterial System : — 
 
 1. Commencement of the aorta, where it 
 
 leaves the heart. 
 
 2. Arch of the aorta. 
 
 3. Carotid artery — (one on each side) . 
 
 4. Temporal artery. 
 
 5. Subclavian artery. 
 
 6. Axillary, artery. 
 
 7. Brachial artery. 
 
 8. Eadial artery. 
 
 9. Ulnar artery. 
 
 10. Iliac artery. 
 
 11. Femoral artery. 
 
 12. Tibial artery. 
 
 13. Peroneal artery. 
 
 H^g^All of these arteries are in pairs; that 
 is, one on each side, or in each extremity. 
 
 The Arterial System. 
 The Aorta, which conveys the pure blood to all parts of the body, 
 proceeds from the left ventricle of the heart, rises toward the left 
 
28 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY -AND 
 
 clavicle or collar bone, and turns in the form of an arch toward the 
 back and left side, and passes down behind the heart, through the 
 diaphragm, along the spine, sending off numberless branches — which 
 also divide and subdivide, like the branches of a tree — to all the 
 internal organs and parts of the body, and finally, in the lower part 
 of the abdominal cavity, it bifurcates — that is, divides into two main 
 branches, one passing down each leg, constantly sending off branches, 
 till the whole terminate in what are called capillaries — small blood- 
 vessels too delicate to be seen distinctly without the aid of a micro- 
 scope, and which will be described presently. 
 
 From the top of the arch of the aorta three main branches go off. 
 The first, or the one on the right, soon divides, a branch going to the 
 right arm — the right subclavian artery — and the other to the right 
 side of the neck and head — the right carotid artery. The other two 
 branches pass, one to the left side of the neck and head — left carotid 
 — and the other, the left subclavian, to the left arm ; all of which 
 divide into innumerable branches, which finally terminate in the 
 capillaries. The aorta, with its branches, which divide and subdivide 
 to their ultimate ramifications, thus pervading every part of the 
 human frame, constitute what is called the great Arterial Tree. 
 
 The pulmonary artery commences in front of the origin of the 
 aorta, from the right ventricle, and ascends obliquely to the under sur- 
 face of the arch of the aorta, where it divides into two branches, one 
 of which passes under the arch to the right lung, the other to the left 
 lung. These also divide and subdivide in the structure of the lungs, 
 and terminate in the capillary vessels, which form a fine net-work 
 around the air-cells of the lungs, and connect with the minute extrem- 
 ities of the pulmonary veins. This artery conveys the impure blood 
 to the lungs, as will be more fully explained hereafter. 
 
 The Yeins. 
 
 The veins are the vessels which return the blood to the heart after 
 it has been circulated by the arteries through the various tissues of 
 the body. They are thinner and more delicate in their structure 
 than the arteries. The blood passes through them slower than 
 through the arteries, and not being propelled by force, as in the lat- 
 ter, it is not necessary that they should be so strong in their texture. 
 They are, like the arteries, composed of three coats, the cellular, the 
 muscular, and the serous. 
 
 The Capillaries : Before proceeding further with the veins, it is 
 proper to speak of the Capillaries, as they form the connecting link 
 between the arteries and the veins, receiving the blood from the one 
 and transmitting it to the other. They are distributed through every 
 
THE LAWS OP HEALTH. 
 
 29 
 
 part of the body, constituting a complete net-work, and rendering it 
 impossible to insert the point of the finest needle into the skin or any 
 part of the flesh without wounding them and causing the blood to 
 flow. These little vessels are called capillary (which means hair) on 
 account of their being so small ; but a hair, compared with such 
 tubes, says Magendie, is a huge cylinder ! They are so small that 
 the aid of a microscope is required to see them. One of the character- 
 istics of inflammation is the red appearance of the part; this is owing 
 simply to the met that the capillary vessels are distended and highly 
 charged with blood. The same is seen when a lady blushes. It is 
 the stagnation of the blood in its passage through these vessels that 
 causes inflammation. The capillaries perform the important func- 
 tions of secretion and nutrition ; they extract from the blood its 
 nutricious materials and convert them into bone, muscle, and the 
 various other tissues of the body. 
 
 Fig 7. 
 
 Fig. 7 — The Venous System: — 
 
 1. The right auricle. 
 
 2. Descending vena cava. 
 
 3. Ascending vena cava. 
 
 4. Right and left iliac veins. 
 
 5. Right and left subclavian veins. 
 C». Jugular vein of right side. 
 
 The Venous System. 
 
30 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 As the veins proceed, their various branches, like the branches of a 
 river, coalesce or unite, to form still larger branches, till they finally 
 terminate in the large trunks, which convey the blood direct to the 
 heart. In diameter the veins are much larger than the arteries. 
 They are also furnished with numerous valves, particularly the large 
 veins of the extremities, which allow the blood to flow freely toward 
 the heart, but operate to prevent any retrograde movement. 
 
 The veins that receive the blood from all parts of the body, follow 
 nearly the same course as the arteries, and at last unite to form two 
 large trunks, called the ascending vena cava and the descending vena 
 cava. The ascending cava is that which receives the blood from the 
 lower extremities and the regions of the abdomen ; while the descend- 
 ing cava receives the blood from the upper parts of the body ; and 
 both empty their contents into the right auricle of the heart. 
 
 There is a peculiarity however in the veins that come from the 
 stomach, spleen and intestines. They unite to form a large vein 
 called the vena porta, which enters the liver, and there divides and 
 ramifies that organ like arteries, and then unite again into a common 
 trunk which enters the ascending vena cava near the heart. This is 
 called the portal circulation. 
 
 Besides these there are the two pulmonary veins, which rise in the 
 substance of the lungs, from the numerous capillaries, and return the 
 blood from those organs, after it has been purified, to the left auricle 
 of the heart. 
 
 THE RESPIRATORY ORGANS 
 
 The Lungs. 
 
 The respiratory organs are the Lungs (in animals called the lights) 
 the Trachea or wind-pipe, the Bronchia or bronchial tubes, and the 
 Air-cells — which are innumerable little cells at the extremities of the 
 bronchial tubes. The Diaphragm, ribs, and several muscles, also aid in 
 the respiratory, or breathing process. 
 
 The Lungs are soft, spongy bodies, occupying the cavity of the 
 chest, or thorax, situated on each side of the heart, and are attached 
 to the neck by means of the trachea or wind-pipe. They consist of 
 two portions, called the right and the left lung, which are separated 
 from each other by a thin membranous curtain called the mediastinum. 
 This curtain stretches from the spine or back-bone to the sternum or 
 breast-bone, and divides the chest into two cavities. 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 
 
 31 
 
 The shape of the lungs, as a whole, corresponds with the cavity of 
 the chest, being rounded or convex next the ribs, and hollow or con- 
 cave next the heart and diaphragm. In color they are of a grayish 
 Ted, but in old age change to a livid purple. The great serous mem- 
 brane, already described, which lines the inside of the chest, called 
 the pleura is reflected upon the lungs, and forms their external cover- 
 ing or coat. That is to say, the pleura is double, one lamina of it 
 lining the inside of the ribs, or costals, called the pleura costalis ; and 
 the other — a continuation of the same — which covers the lungs, 
 called the pleura pulmonalis. The right lung is the larger (because 
 the heart takes up a portion of the left side of the chest), and is 
 divided into three portions, called lobes. The left lung has but two 
 lobes — the heart and its surrounding membrane, the pericardium, 
 being situated between them. 
 
 Fig. 8. 
 
 1,1. An outline of the 
 right lung. 
 
 2. 2. An outline of the 
 
 left lung. 
 
 3. The larynx. 
 
 4. The trachea, or wind- 
 
 pipe. 
 
 5. 6. The right and left 
 
 bronchial tub's, 
 which go to the 
 right and left 
 lungs, and di- 
 vide into innu- 
 merable branch- 
 es, which termi- 
 nate in the little 
 air-cells, 9, 9, 9, 
 9, a very imper. 
 fect idea of 
 which is shown 
 in the Figure. 
 
 Fig. 8 — The Trachea and Air-Tubes of the Lungs. 
 The Trachea, or wind-pipe, passes down in front of the throat oi 
 food-pipe, and may be distinctly felt, being immediately beneath the 
 skin. Just below the top of the breast-bone it divides laterally into 
 two branches, called the bronchia, which go direct to the lungs, and 
 there divide and subdivide into an immense number of little tubes, 
 constituting the air-passages of the lungs, which gradually diminish 
 
32 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 in size, and finally terminate in what are called the air-cdls. These 
 cells are small, very thin, and communicate freely with each other. 
 The membrane which composes these cells is continued throughout 
 the air-passages, and is estimated to be equal in extent to near 22,000 
 square inches. Hence it will be seen that the lungs are capable of 
 containing a large amount of air. The quantity which enters at each 
 inspiration is supposed to be about 40 cubic inches, and an equal 
 quantity of course is given out at each expiration. Hence, supposing 
 there are 20 inspirations in a minute, which is nearly correct, the 
 quantity of air that would enter and pass out every minute would 
 be 800 cubic inches; and at the same rate it would amount to 48,000 
 cubic inches in an hour, and 1,152,000, every twenty four hours ! 
 
 The process of breathing is of the greatest importance in the ani- 
 mal economy. The lungs are the great laboratory of the system, for 
 the purpose of purifying the blood and rendering it fit for circulation, 
 for the purposes of nutrition, and the production of animal heat — as 
 will be explained hereafter. 
 
 The cells and air-passages of the lungs are lined with a delicate, 
 thin, mucous membrane, which becomes at times the seat of various 
 disorders, as croup, asthma, bronchitis, influenza, and whooping- 
 cough. It also performs the function of absorption, and will take up 
 the poisonous properties of tobacco smoke, the fumes of spirits, and 
 other volatile substances, which often produce very deleterious effects. 
 It is owing to this power of absorption that the best treatment of 
 lung diseases is by the inhalation of medicated vapors. 
 
 The Diaphragm. 
 
 The Diaphragm, called also the midriff, is a thin muscular parti- 
 tion between the chest and the abdomen, extending crosswise of the 
 body, and is attached by its margin to the spine, to the lower ribs on 
 each side, and in front to the sternum, or breast-bone. It separates 
 the respiratory organs from those of digestion, or rather the heart 
 and lungs from the stomach, liver, spleen, etc. The diaphragm rises 
 upward within the chest, so as to form an arch, the lungs resting 
 upon its upper surface, while the stomach and liver accommodate 
 themselves to the concavity of its lower surface. It is perforated by 
 the oesophagus or food-pipe, which passes to the stomach, and by seve- 
 ral other important tubes, among which are the great aorta, and 
 ascending vena cava. 
 
 The diaphragm is the principal agent in producing the act of res- 
 piration. Every time we breathe, this organ contracts, by which 
 means it descends from its arch-shape to that of & plane or level sur- 
 face, pushing down the stomach and liver with it. This enlarges 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 33 
 
 the cavity of the chest, while the lungs, which rest upon its upper 
 surface, follow it in its descent, allowing those organs to expand, and 
 thereby causing a vacuum within them, which is immediately filled by 
 air which rushes in through the trachea and bronchial tubes, filling 
 up the air-cells. This is called inspiration. The diaphragm then 
 immediately becomes relaxed ( unless prevented by the will, as in 
 " holding the breath"), and is pushed up by the organs beneath it, 
 assuming its arched shape again, thus diminishing the size of the 
 chest, which compresses the lungs and causes the air within them to 
 be pressed out or expelled. This is termed expiration. An enlarge- 
 ment of the chest therefore is accompanied with inspiration, and a 
 contraction of it with expiration. In the first, the diaphragm con- 
 tracts and becomes a, plane; in the other it relaxes and is pushed up 
 by the abdominal viscera beneath it. What we call breathing there- 
 fore is performed entirely on the principle of the blacksmith's 
 bellows, the operation of which is familiar to most persons. There 
 are several of the muscles of the ribs, which assist in expanding and 
 contracting the chest, and consequently in respiration. 
 
 THE DIGESTIVE ORGANS. 
 
 The principal organs of Digestion are the Stomach, Intestines, 
 Liver, and some smaller glands that will be noticed under the proper 
 head. The Mouth, Teeth, Pharynx, (Esophagus, Lacteals, Thoracic 
 Duct, and Pancreas, are also sometimes classed among the digestive 
 organs. The mouth and teeth need no description. The pharynx is 
 simply -that cavity immediately back of the mouth and root of the 
 tongue, properly speaking, the throat — It is the common opening from 
 which both the trachea and oesophagus commence. The (Esopha- 
 gus is a large membranous tube through which the food passes from 
 the mouth or pharynx into the stomach. It is a muscular organ, 
 lined with a mucous membrane — and passes down behind the trachea 
 and heart, and terminates in the stomach. The Lacteals, Thoracic 
 Duet, and Pancreas, will be described in their proper places. 
 
 The Stomach. 
 The Stomach is a membranous sac or bag, into which the food 
 passes when it is " swallowed," preparatory to the process of digest- 
 ion. It is situated mainly in the left side of the upper part of the 
 3 
 
34 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 abdominal cavity, immediately below and in contact with the dia- 
 phragm, and extends from left to right. When moderately distended, 
 the stomach of an adult is capable of holding about three pints. The 
 left extremity of the stomach, which is much larger than the right, 
 lies immediately under the lower ribs of the left side, while the right 
 extremity extends only a little beyond the lower end of the sternum 
 or breast-bone, toward the right side, and is overlapped by the left 
 lobe of the liver. It is separated from the small intestines by the 
 arch of the colon, which passes immediately below it, from the right to 
 the left side. 
 
 The stomach has two orifices or openings. The upper one, which 
 is near the left extremity, is formed by the termination of the oesoph- 
 agus, and is called the cardiac orifice. The other is the opening at 
 the right extremity, which communicates with the intestines, or 
 rather with the duodenum, and is called the pyloric orifice. This orifice 
 has a kind of valve which is called the pylorus — a Greek word signi- 
 fying porter, or gate-keeper — because it will not readily allow the food 
 to pass out of the stomach unless properly digested. 
 
 The substance of the stomach consists of three coats. The outer, 
 which is called the serous, or peritoneal coat, is a firm, strong, glossy 
 membrane, which not only covers every part of this important organ, 
 but extends to all the intestines, and also lines the cavity of the abdo- 
 men. The middle or muscular coat is composed of two layers of fleshy 
 fibers — one layer of which extends longitudinally of the stomach, 
 and the other transversely. These fibers have the power of contrac- 
 tion and relaxation, for the purpose of producing the peculiar 
 motions of the stomach in digestion. The inner or mucous coat is soft, 
 velvety, and presents many folds, somewhat resembling honey-comb, 
 and is of a pale pink color in health, but red when inflamed. Within 
 the folds of this coat exist numerous little glands which secrete what 
 is called the gastric juice, a fluid which is essential to the process of 
 digestion. 
 
 Bloodvessels and nerves are distributed to the stomach more plen- 
 tifully than to any other organ. It also has a branch extended to it 
 from the great sympathetic nerve, which causes it to sympathize so 
 readilj' with other parts of the body when they are diseased. Let 
 any important organ of the system become seriously affected, and the 
 patient soon becomes " sick at the stomach." 
 
 The Intestines. 
 The Intestines, or alimentary canal, as they are sometimes called, 
 are divided into two parts, the small and large intestines. The small 
 intestine, in an adult is about twenty -five to thirty feet in length, 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 
 
 35 
 
 and the large one about five feet, being altogether some five or six 
 times, longer than the body. They are attached to the spine or back- 
 bone, by folds of the peritoneum, which is here called the mesentery, 
 and which contains the mesentery glands. It spreads out from the 
 spine like a ruffle from the bosom of a shirt, having the intestines 
 attached to its edge, and allows them to float somewhat loosely in 
 the cavi<-y of the abdomen. 
 
 *IG. 9. 
 
 Front View of Organs in the Chest and Abdomen. 
 Fig. 9. — The figures three and four represent the lobes of the right and left lungs; 
 5, the right ventricle of the heart; 6, the left ventricle; 7, the right auricle; 8, the 
 left auricle: 9, the pulmonary artery ; 10, the aorta; 11, the descending vena cava; 
 12, the trachea; 13, the oesophagus; 14, 14, the pleura, which lines the inside of the 
 chest; 15, 15, the diaphragm, which separates the lungs and heart from the stomach 
 and liver; 16, 16, the right and left lobes of the liver; 17, the gall bladder; 18, the 
 stomach, partly overlapped by left lobe of the liver; 26, the spleen; the duodenum 
 (19, 19,) is partly seen immediately under the left lobe of the liver; 20, the ascend- 
 ing colon ; 21, the transverse colon ; 25, the descending colon ; 22, 22, 22, 22, the 
 
36 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 small intestines; 23, 23, the walls of the abdomen turned down. The kidneys lie 
 immediately behind the stomach and liver. The muscles of the chest, and ends of 
 the ribs cut off, are intended to be designated by figures 1 and 2, and the edge of the 
 pleura is seen immediately inside of them, next the lungs. 
 
 The structure of the intestines is very similar to that of the stom- 
 ach — having three coats, the same as that organ, the peritoneal, the 
 muscular, and the mucous. The muscular coat, as in the stomach, 
 consists of two sets of fibers, the longitudinal and the circular, which, 
 by their alternate contraction and relaxation, produce what is called 
 the vermicular (worm-like), or peristaltic motion of the bowels — which 
 is for the purpose of moving their contents. 
 
 The first portion of the small intestines is the Duodenum — so called 
 because it is about twelve inches long. It is considerably larger in 
 diameter than any other portion of the small intestines, and hence 
 has been considered a sort of secondary stomach. It commences at 
 the pylorus and passes obliquely backward to the under surface of the 
 liver — then descends perpendicularly in front of the right kidney, 
 and passes across under the stomach, behind the colon, and termi- 
 nates in the commencement of what is called the Jejunum, which is 
 the next subdivision of the small intestines. About four inches 
 from the pylorus, the duodenum is perforated by the biliary and 
 pancreatic ducts, through which it receives the bile and pancreatic 
 juice — fluids which are essential to the process of digestion. 
 
 The Jejunum and Ileum constitute the remaining portion of the 
 small intestines, and occupy the middle and lower part of the abdo- 
 men, and are encircled by the large intestine, which is also divided 
 into three parts, the Caecum, the Colon, and the Rectum. The jejunum 
 is ten to twelve feet in length, while the length of the ileum is sixteen 
 to eighteen feet. The ileum terminates in the ccecum, or commence- 
 ment of the large intestines. 
 
 The small intestines are the seat of an important function. It is 
 in them — but principally in the duodenum — that what is called the 
 chyle is separated from the balance of the food, and is taken up by a 
 set of little vessels called absorbents or lacteals, and finally conveyed 
 into the blood, for the nourishment of the body. These vessels are 
 very numerous, and open their mouths upon the internal surface 
 of the mucous membrane of the bowels. They will be more fully 
 described hereafter. 
 
 The large intestines, as I have said, are divided into ccecum, colon, 
 and rectum. The coecum is only a sort of pouch, about three inches in 
 length, which receives the lower end of the ileum. It is situated in 
 the lower part of the abdomen, at the right side, just within the 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 37 
 
 hip bone, where it is tied down so as to be unable to get out of its 
 place. 
 
 The colon commences at the ccecum, taking an upward course along 
 the right side, toward the liver, where it turns and crosses from the 
 right to the left side immediately below the stomach, and above the 
 small intestines, constituting what is termed the arch of the colon. It 
 then makes another turn, and descends along the left side of the 
 abdominal cavity, terminating opposite the coecum in a sort of double 
 curve, called from its resemblance to the letter S., the sigmoid flexure. 
 The rectum is a continuation from the sigmoid flexure — is about eight 
 inches long, and is the lower extremity of the intestines. 
 
 THE GLANDULAR SYSTEM. 
 
 The glands are soft, fleshy, organized parts, having arteries, veins, 
 nerves, and absorbents, and are designed to separate some peculiar 
 fluid from the blood, which is needed for some of the various opera- 
 tions of the system, or is to be rejected from the body. The 
 process by which such fluids are separated from the 'blood, is called 
 secretion. 
 
 The glands differ greatly, both as to size and shape, and in the 
 character of the fluids they secrete. The largest gland in the body is 
 the liver, which secretes the bile. The female breast is also a gland, 
 designed for the secretion of milk. The kidneys also are glands. 
 
 The Mucous Glands : These are a numerous class, are very small, 
 consisting of little bags, formed by a peculiar membrane, and open 
 by minute ducts, through which they discharge their contents. They 
 are distributed upon the mucous membrane of the tongue, and that 
 which lines the nose, wind-pipe, stomach, intestines, and bladder, fur- 
 nishing a peculiar kind of fluid, called mucus, with which those parts 
 are lubricated. 
 
 The Sebaceous Glands are similar in structure to the mucous 
 glands, but secrete an oily or fatty fluid, which forms the suet or fatty 
 portion of the body. 
 
 Of the Salivary Glands, there are three pairs — so called because 
 they secrete the saliva or spittle. The principal of these are the par- 
 otid glands, situated, one on each side, immediately back of the angle 
 of the lower jaw, between that and the ear. They open by a duct 
 upon the inner surface of the cheek, and furnish the principal amount 
 of the saliva, which serves to moisten the food while undergoing the 
 
38 ANATOMY, rilYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 process of mastication or chewing. These glands are the seat of the 
 mumps. The next pair are the submaxillary — seated under each angle 
 of the jaw, and open by a duct into the mouth, on each side of what 
 is called the frenum, or bridle of the tongue. The other pair are the 
 sublingual glands, so called because situated under the tongue, near 
 its back part. They have several ducts, by which their secretion is 
 poured into the mouth. 
 
 The Lymphatic Glands appear to have no other office than that 
 of receiving and transmitting the lymphatic vessels. They have no 
 excretory ducts. They are very numerous throughout the system, 
 the largest and most familiar to us being situated in the groins, the 
 arm-pits, and along the sides of the neck. In the neck they often 
 become swollen in scrofulous affections, and form large tumors — 
 sometimes ulcers. The glands of the arm-pit and groin are also 
 liable to become diseased. We come now to the larger glands. 
 
 The Liver. 
 
 The liver is of a brown-red color, and in a healthy grown person 
 weighs near four pounds. It is situated in the upper portion of the 
 abdominal cavity, mainly in the right side, under the ribs, and is 
 divided into two principal lobes, called the right and left. Its upper 
 surface is convex, or rounded, and corresponds to the concavity of 
 the diaphragm, to which it is attached by several ligaments. Its 
 lower surface is hollow or concave, and is in connection with the 
 stomach and duodenum. Its right lobe is principally thick and massy, 
 but its left is thin, and spreads itself smoothly over the stomach. 
 
 In some diseases the liver becomes enlarged and indurated, or hard, 
 and may be felt projecting below the ribs in the right front of the 
 abdomen, and sometimes even on the left. It may however be 
 pushed down by the diaphragm so as to appear like an enlargement, 
 in diseases of the chest, as dropsy, when the liver itself is not dis- 
 eased. It is altered materially in its texture by the processes of 
 disease, becoming in some cases quite soft, and in others extremely 
 hard and firm; and in some instances it acquires an enormous size, 
 weighing from twenty to thirty pounds. 
 
 The liver is supplied with bloodvessels, nerves, and absorbents, 
 and has for its office the secretion of bile, which plays an important 
 part in the process^of digestion. 
 
 The Gall Bladder: Belonging to the liver, and attached to the 
 under side of its right lobe, is a membranous bag, or receptacle, 
 large enough to contain one to two ounces of fluid, called the gall- 
 bladder. This seems to serve as a kind of reservoir to receive the sur- 
 plus bile from the liver, during the intervals of digestion.. 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 39 
 
 The bile is secreted in the liver, and is conveyed by innumerable 
 little tubes to what is called the hepatic duct, through which it passes 
 on its way to the duodenum. From the gall bladder, or cyst, as it is 
 sometimes called, proceeds also a duct, called the cystic duct, which 
 unites with the hepatic duct between the liver and the duodenum, 
 forming what is termed the common duct, which enters the duodenum 
 about four or five inches from the pyloric orifice. 
 
 The Kidneys. 
 
 The Kidneys (there are two) are of a dark red color, and resemble 
 in shape a certain kind of bean known as the kidney bean. They 
 are five to six inches long, and three to four inches wide, and are 
 situated one on each side of the spine, in the back and upper part of 
 the abdominal cavity, their upper half stretching across the two 
 lower false ribs^and having their upper end in contact with the 
 lower side of the diaphragm. It is owing to this fact — their contact 
 with the diaphragm — that pain is felt in breathing when the kidneys 
 are inflamed. 
 
 The office of the kidneys is to secrete the urine, which is collected 
 in little tubes and poured into what is called the pelvis of the kid- 
 ney — a cavity in its center — whence it passes out through the ducts 
 or tubes called the ureters — one leading from each kidney, and is 
 emptied into the bladder, which is situated in the bottom of the 
 abdominal cavity and is the receptacle of the urine, where it is col- 
 lected and retained until discharged from the body. 
 
 The Spleen. 
 
 The Spleen is a soft spongy body of a dark purple color, situated 
 above and in front of the left kidney, and immediately to the left of 
 the stomach, to which it is connected by small bloodvessels, and by 
 the cellular membrane. It also has an attachment to the lower edge 
 of the diaphragm, near the spine. The spleen varies in size, but is 
 generall}- about four inches long, three inches wide, and two inches 
 thick. In the animal, this organ is generally called the melt. 
 
 The spleen sometimes becomes greatly enlarged, and may then be 
 felt below the ribs, to the left of the stomach. This often occurs in 
 typhus fevers, and protracted cases of the chills, or ague— particu- 
 larly if much quinine has been taken. It is plentifully supplied with 
 bloodvessels, but has no excretory duct, or outlet. The real use of 
 the spleen is, as yet, unknown. It has been removed in animals, 
 without being followed with any bad result. 
 
40 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 The Pancreas. 
 The Pancreas, which is known in the animal as the sweet-bread, is 
 also a glandular body, of a pale-red color, bearing a resemblance in 
 shape to the tongue of a dog. It lies across the spine, immediately 
 behind the stomach, and is in contact at its smaller extremity with 
 the spleen. It has an excretory duct, which opens into the duode- 
 num in connection with the hepatic duct from the liver. The office 
 of the pancreas is to secrete what is called the pancreatic juice, a fluid 
 somewhat similar in appearance to the saliva, and pour it into the 
 duodenum, which is supposed to be necessary in the process of 
 digestion. 
 
 The Absorbents. 
 
 The Absorbents are small, delicate, transparent vessels or tubes, 
 which exist in every part of the body, and are denominated Lacieals 
 or Lymphatics, according to the liquids which they contain. 
 
 The Lacteals open on the inner surface of the intestines, and suck 
 up or receive what is called the chyle, a milk-like fluid of which the 
 blood is formed, and convey it to what is called the thoracic duct. In 
 their course they perforate the. middle and outer coats of the intes- 
 tines, pass through the mesentery, and mesentery glands, and termi- 
 nate in this duct. The lacteals are an important set of vessels, for it 
 is through their agency that the chyle or nutricious part of the food 
 is separated from the refuse, or innutricious, and conve} 7 ed to the 
 blood, to nurture and replenish the system. It is probably a reverse 
 action of these vessels that constitutes cholera; or at least I am per- 
 suaded that such a condition exists in that disease. 
 
 The Lymphatic vessels arise from every part of the body, and con- 
 tain a whitish, transparent fluid denominated lymph. They form, 
 together with the lacteals, what is called the Absor-bent System. They 
 are extremely small and delicate, and can not readily be seen with 
 the naked eye. They pass through what are termed the lymphatic- 
 glands, and in common with the lacteals, terminate in the thoracic 
 duct. 
 
 The lymphatics take up fluids from different cavities and parts of 
 the body, and carry them into the circulation, and it may therefore 
 be readily supposed that they often prevent the occurrence of dropsies. 
 They may be compared to a greedy set of little animals, ready to lay 
 hold of and carry off every thing that comes in their way. They seem 
 to have no judgment as to what is good and healthy, but will absorb 
 poisonous and deleterious substances, as well as the most nutricious. 
 It is well known that mercury rubbed on the skin in the form of 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 41 
 
 ointment, may be absorbed, and produce salivation as effectually 
 as if taken internally. Croton oil rubbed on the abdomen 
 produces purging, and arsenic applied to cancers, and opium to 
 burns, have been absorbed in quantities sufficient to poison the 
 patients. Blood effused under the skin, or nails, producing a dark 
 appearance, is removed by these little vessels. Their office seems to 
 be that of general usefulness, ready to take up and carry off any 
 refuse material, dead matter, or unhealthy deposit, in any part of the 
 system. 
 
 Thoracic Duct. 
 The Thoracic Duct, which may be regarded as the trunk of the 
 absorbents, because it receives the absorbent vessels from almost every 
 part of the body, including of course, the lacteals, though small — 
 being only about the size of a goose-quill in diameter — is a very 
 important organ in the human organization. It commences at the 
 lower end and back part of the abdominal cavity, and passes upward 
 along the spine, by the side of the aorta, as high as the lower part 
 of th% neck, on the left side, or opposite the sixth cervical vertebra, 
 where it makes a sudden turn downward and forward, and enters the 
 left subclavian vein, just under the left clavicle or collar bone. It pours 
 its fluid, the chyle, into the current of the venous blood, going direct 
 to the heart. 
 
 THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
 
 The Kervous System consists of the Brain, the Spinal Marrow, 
 and the ^serves which go off from them. 
 
 The Brain. 
 The Brain is the seat of the nervous sensation and of the intellect. 
 It is contained within the skull, and is divided into two parts, called 
 the cerebrum, or great brain, and the cerebellum, or little brain. The 
 first is situated in front and above the level of the ears ; the other 
 below that level and in the back part of the cranium. The cerebrum 
 is divided into two hemispheres, the right and left, by a cleft or 
 fissure extending from the top down nearly or quite two-thirds of 
 the way through it ; and into this fissure a portion of the dura matei . 
 or lining membrane of the skull dips, serving as a partition between 
 the hemispheres. The portion of membrane which thus dips into 
 
42 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 the fissure is called falx cerebri, from its resemblance to a sickle. 
 Upon its inferior, or lower surface, the cerebrum is divided into three 
 lobes, the anterior or front, the middle, and the posterior or back lobe. 
 The two hemispheres are connected by a dense layer of transverse 
 fibers, called corpus callosum. 
 
 The brain is surrounded by three membranes, called the dura mater, 
 the arachnoid membrane, and thejpta mater. The dura mater — which 
 means strong mother — lines the inner surface of the skull, and is as its 
 name indicates, a strong, dense, membrane, having a bright, silvery 
 appearance. Next we have the arachnoid, which is the serous mem- 
 brane of the brain. Though it is double, like all the serous mem- 
 branes, it is ver} T thin and delicate. The pia mater is a soft, vascular 
 membrane, which immediately surrounds and invests the whole sur- 
 face of the brain, and dips into its convolutions. It is copiously 
 supplied with bloodvessels, which afford nourishment to the brain. 
 
 The substance of the brain does not, as is sometimes supposed, con- 
 sist exclusively of a white, pulpy mass, but is more or less fibrous in 
 its structure, and is of two different colors. Upon the upper and out- 
 side surface of the cerebrum (the membranes having been removed) 
 the appearance is that of undulating windings, producing small 
 rounded protuberances, called convolutions. Remove a portion of the 
 upper part of the brain, horizontally with a sharp knife, cutting 
 through these convolutions, and we have presented a white substance 
 in the center of each convolution, while the outside portion to the 
 thickness of a quarter to a half inch is of an ashy gray appearance — 
 and is called the corticle or cinericious portion, while the white cen- 
 tral portion is called the medullary. In the interior of the brain are 
 several cavities, the two largest of which, extend from the anterior to 
 the posterior of the brain, and are called the lateral ventricles. An 
 effusion of serum or water is sometimes deposited in these cavities 
 from the small bloodvessels of the membrane which lines them, pro- 
 ducing internal dropsy of the brain. 
 
 The cerebellum is only about one seventh as large as the cere- 
 brum , and like that, is composed of white and gray matter, but 
 unlike it also, the gray constitutes the larger portion. The white 
 matter in the cerebellum is so arranged that when it is cut through 
 vertically, that is, up and down, it presents the appearance of the 
 trunk and branches of a tree. Hence it is called arbor vitce, or tree of 
 life. The cerebellum is situated under the posterior lobe of the cere- 
 brum, and is separated from it by an extension of the dura mater, 
 which is here called the tentorum. 
 
 At the bottom of the brain is a sort of bulb, some larger than a 
 man's thumb, called the medulla oblongata. It is composed of three 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 43 
 
 pairs of small bodies, called corpus pyramidale, restiforme, and olivare, 
 all united together into one body. The medulla oblongata is simply 
 the commencement of the spinal marrow, or that portion of it within 
 the skull. 
 
 The brain is the foundation upon which the science of Phrenology 
 is based; the moral and intellectual, as well as the physical character, 
 depending upon the quality of its texture, and the relative size and 
 development of its various organs, or convolutions. 
 
 The Spinal Cord. 
 
 The Spinal Column, which is composed of the vertebra?, or bones 
 of the back, contains the spinal cord, the roots of the spinal nerves, 
 and the membranes of the cord. 
 
 The Spinal Cord, or as it is sometimes called, Spinal Marrow, 
 extends from the medulla oblongata through the opening or canal in 
 the spinal column, down to the second lumbar vertebra, which is just 
 below the small of the back, where it terminates in a round point, or 
 bundle of nerves. It is similar in structure to the brain, indeed it is 
 a continuation of the brain, and is also inclosed in a continuation of 
 the three membranes of that organ. It is round, larger at the top 
 than the bottom, and has three enlargements; the uppermost of 
 which is the medulla oblongata, the next where the nerves leave it 
 which go to the upper extremities, and the third where the nerves 
 of the lower extremities branch off. 
 
 The spinal cord is partially divided by an anterior and posterior 
 fissure, into two lateral cords, which are only united by a thin layer 
 of white medullary substance. These lateral cords are each divided 
 by furrows into three distinct parts, or columns, called the anterior, 
 the lateral and the posterior columns. The anterior are supposed to be 
 the motor columns or origin of the nerves of motion ; the posterior 
 the columns of sensation ; while the lateral or side columns are devoted 
 to the function of both motion and sensation. 
 
 The Nerves. 
 The Nerves are numerous long, round, white cords of various sizes, 
 which originate in the brain, and the spinal cord, and are distributed 
 in every direction to all parts of the body. They communicate freely 
 with each other, thereby forming an extensive net-work, and become 
 so numerous in their ultimate ramifications, that you can not prick 
 the skin or flesh with the finest needle without wounding one or 
 more of their branches, and producing pain. The great sympathetic 
 nerve however, instead of having but one center or origin, has many 
 
44 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 small centers, called ganglia, and also numerous communications with 
 the brain and spinal cord. 
 
 The great attributes of the nervous system are the capacity of 
 receiving impressions, the endowment of thought and feeling, and 
 the power of putting the muscular machine into action; in other 
 words, the nerves possess the attributes of sensation, thought, and 
 motion. They can not act however independent of the brain. If a 
 nerve, for instance, leading to any sensitive part be cut, that part 
 will immediately lose its sensibility, because the communication 
 between it and the brain is destroyed. So also if the motor nerve lead- 
 ing to any part be cut, or so injured or compressed as to stop the flow 
 of the nervous fluid, that part will lose the power of motion, for the 
 same reas'on. Every sensation and motion of whatever nature, 
 requires the intervention of the brain. Light may make an impres- 
 sion on the eye, sound on the ear, or some object on the nerves of 
 feeling or touch, but this impression must first be conveyed to the 
 brain, along the nerves, before sensation is effected. If the skull 
 become fractured so as to compress the brain, all consciousness and 
 feeling are lost until the compression is removed. Narcotics, such as 
 opium, are sometimes given for the purpose of producing a temporary 
 relief of pain, but instead of removing the cause of the complaint, 
 they only stupefy the brain, and render it incapable of receiving an 
 impression from the nerves — -hence there can be no pain felt while 
 the brain is in this condition. 
 
 The various organs of the body are supplied with nerves, which 
 are essential to the proper performance of their functions. If the 
 nerves which are distributed to the stomach were cut, the process of 
 digestion would be arrested. The heart would cease to beat if its 
 nerves were divided, for it is through these nerves that the heart is 
 acted upon by the brain, and made to propel the vital fluid through- 
 out the system. But for these mysterious cords, these electric wires, 
 which connect all parts of the body with the brain, we could neither 
 see, hear, taste, or exercise any of the senses ; indeed we could not 
 exist. 
 
 The nerves are divided into the sensible and insensible; the voluntary 
 and involuntary. The first convey sensibility to the parts to which 
 they are distributed, as the nerves of the skin ; the second, like the 
 brain itself, are destitute of sensibility, and exhibit no pain when 
 wounded. The nerves of sight and hearing are of this class. They 
 are capable of being acted upon however by light and sound. 
 
 The voluntary nerves are those which control the voluntary action 
 of the muscles, as those of the leg and arm. Hence they are the 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 45 
 
 nerves of voluntary motion, and are governed by the will. The invol- 
 untary nerves are such as are not under the control of the will, but that 
 act independent of it, as the nerves of the heart, the stomach, etc. 
 
 Nerves of the Brain. 
 
 There are twelve pair of nerves which originate in the brain. They 
 nearly all pass out through openings for that purpose in the base of 
 the skull. Their names and manner of distribution are as follows : 
 
 First pair — the Olfactory nerve, or nerve of smell. It ramifies 
 upon the membrane of the nose. 
 
 Second pair — the Optic nerve, or nerve of sight. It expands on 
 the retina of the eye. 
 
 Third pair — called Motorcs oculorum goes to the muscles of the 
 eye. 
 
 Fourth pair — Patheticus. goes also to the muscles of the eye. 
 
 Fifth pair — called Trifacial, because of its dividing into three 
 branches before leaving the skull, all of which go to the face, jaws, 
 mouth, teeth, nose, and forehead. 
 
 Sixth pair — called Abduccntes, the smallest of the nerves of the 
 brain, and is apportioned to a single muscle of the eye. 
 
 Seventh pair — the Portio Mollis, is distributed upon the external 
 ear. 
 
 Eighth pair — the Facial nerve — is distributed over the muscles of 
 the face. 
 
 Ninth pair — called Glossopharyngeal, goes to the mucous membrane 
 of the tongue, throat, and to the glands of the mouth. 
 
 Tenth pair — the Pneumogastric ; this pair sends branches to the 
 throat, lungs, spleen, pancreas, liver, stomach, and intestines. 
 
 Eleventh pair — called Spinal accessory, connects with the ninth and 
 tenth pair and distributes itself upon the muscles about the neck. 
 
 Twelfth pair — called the Hypo-glossal nerve, goes to the muscles of 
 the tongue, and is its motor nerve. 
 
 Nerves of the Spine. 
 The nerves that originate in the spinal cord are arranged in thirty- 
 one pairs, each nerve arising by two roots, one from the anterior 
 portion of the cord — which is the motor root — and the other the sensi- 
 tive root, from the posterior side of the cord. There is what is called 
 a ganglion, that is, a small bulb or enlargement, found on each posterior 
 root, soon after it leaves the spinal cord. Immediately beyond this 
 ganglion the two roots unite and constitute a spinal nerve, which 
 passes through the opening between the vertebras on the sides of the 
 spinal column, and thence divide and subdivide, till their minute 
 
46 
 
 "branches arc lost upon the tissues of the different organs to which 
 they are distributed. 
 
 The first eight pairs of spinal nerves are called the cervical nerves, 
 because they originate within the cervical vertebrae ; the next twelve 
 pairs, for a similar reason, are denominated dorsal nerves, the next 
 five, lumbar nerves, and the remaining six, sacral nerves. 
 
 The four lower cervical and the upper dorsal pass into each other 
 and then separate to unite again, thus forming what is called the 
 brachial plexus. Six nerves proceed from this plexus, which ramify 
 the muscles and skin of the upper extremities. 
 
 The last dorsal and the five lumbar nerves form a similar plexus, 
 called the lumbar plexus. From this plexus six nerves also go out, 
 which ramify upon the muscles and skin of the lower extremities. 
 
 The four upper sacral unite and form the sacral plexus, which sends 
 out five nerves to the muscles and skin of the hips, and to the lower 
 extremities. 
 
 The Great Sympathetic Nerve : This nerve is so called from its 
 numerous connections with different parts of the body. It arises 
 from a branch of the sixth, and one from the fifth pair of cerebral 
 or brain-nerves, which unite into one trunk and descend along the 
 spine to the lower end of the sacrum. It communicates by branches 
 with each of the spinal nerves, and with several of the cerebral, and 
 also sends off branches to the different organs contained in the chest 
 and abdomen. Below the vertebrae of the neck it has a ganglion for 
 each intervertebral space, which are supposed to form nervous cen- 
 ters, giving off branches in different directions. 
 
 The branches of this nerve accompany the arteries that sujjply the 
 different organs of the abdomen, and form plexuses around them, 
 which take the name of the particular artery with which they are 
 connected — and thus we have the mesenteric plexus, the lupatic plexus, 
 the spleenic plexus, etc. All the internal organs of the head, neck, 
 and trunk, are supplied with branches from it. The sympathetic 
 nerve is supposed to be the nerve of organic life, and to preside over 
 nutrition, secretion, the action of the heart, and circulation uf the 
 blood, as well as to maintain a communication between different parts 
 of the body, and to be the connecting link between the brain and 
 the abdominal viscera. 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 47 
 
 PHYSIOLOGY, AND THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 
 
 Waste and Supply or the Body. 
 The human body is constantly undergoing change. The living- 
 machine is in continual operation from birth till '"death ; this opera- 
 tion produces friction, attrition, and wearing away ; particles become 
 decayed and useless, and are cast off, to be replaced by new ones. 
 Whether asleep or awake, sick or well, this wearing out and change 
 of particles goes on. In the expressive language of Dr. Watts, the 
 poet and philosopher — 
 
 " The moment we begin to live, 
 We all begin to die." 
 
 This is strictly true, applied physiologically to the particles which 
 compose our bodies. But it is also true that while we are dying we 
 are also reviving; that while -our bodies are constant^ wearing out 
 and decaying by particles, they are as constantly being regenerated 
 and renewed by particles. And this change, this perishing and 
 renewing of particles goes on in every part of the body — in every 
 bone, muscle, and tissue, so that in the course of time, it must be evi- 
 dent our bodies become entirely renewed. It has been said that this 
 renewal of the entire body takes place or is completed once in every 
 seven years. But there is no certainty in this. The probability is 
 that in some cases, as in active healthy children, it is effected in 
 much less time ; while in others, as the aged, or the lazy, corpulent, 
 inactive adult, it may require twice or three times seven years. But 
 whether the process requires seven years, or seven times seven, the 
 constant decay and renewal of the body is a well-established doctrine 
 of physiology. 
 
 Before proceeding to the subject of Nutrition let us first see what 
 becomes of these worn-out and useless particles, for it is very proper 
 that every one should understand this. The bod}' does not decay 
 and wear away upon the outside merely. If it did, the decayed par- 
 ticles would rub off and be lost — a very simple process. But, as I 
 have said, this decay of particles goes on in every part and tissue of 
 the body, internally as well as externally. Now it is plain that unless 
 
48 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 there was some plan provided, some wise arrangement, for tho 
 removal of these useless particles from the bod}', the most serious 
 consequences might ensue. They are not only of no further service, 
 but if retained must act as foreign matter, and produce irritation, 
 fever, inflammation, and perhaps would putrify and poison the whole 
 system. But the necessary provision has been made. All over the 
 body, and all through it, there is distributed a set of little vessels, 
 with their mouths opening on the internal surfaces of all the cavities, 
 tubes, and membranes, and which are continually sucking up and 
 carrying off every dead particle and all foreign matter they can lay 
 hold of. These little vessels are called Absorbents, and have been 
 described in the proper place. The greater portion of them open 
 into the bloodvessels, and consequently pour their contents of 
 decayed and refuse matter into the blood. From the blood a portion 
 of it is separated by the kidneys and passes directly out of the body. 
 Some is thrown into the bowels and passes out in that way. But by 
 far the largest proportion is eliminated from the body through the 
 pores of the skin, along with the perspiration. A free and healthy 
 operation therefore of the absorbent system is very essential to the 
 health of our bodies. If the kidneys fail to secrete their share of the 
 waste material, it is retained in the blood and is carried round in the 
 circulation and distributed to all parts of the system, to become the 
 source of irritation and poison, and may show itself on the surface in 
 blotches, sores, and inveterate eruptions ; or it may be thrown upon 
 the lungs and lead to consumption. But above all is it important 
 that the outlet through the skin, through which the greater portion 
 of these decayed particles have to pass, should be constantly main- 
 tained in a proper and healthy condition. This part of the subject 
 however comes under the head of Perspiration and Exhalation, and 
 will be noticed in its proper place. 
 
 Having seen that our bodies are constantly wearing out, and the 
 manner in which the dead particles are removed, we come directly 
 to the subject of Nutrition, or Supply; for it must be evident that if 
 we are continually losing particles of our bodies, there must be some 
 way to supply new particles to take their place or we should in the 
 course of time become ' mere skeletons,' or entirely wasted away. In 
 order to maintain a proper balance between Supply and Waste, and 
 have all things go on in a healthy condition, we must be as con- 
 stantly receiving new particles from some source or other, as we are 
 losing old ones. And in childhood and youth, while the body is 
 growing, it is evident that the supply must be greater than the loss. 
 Whence comes this supply ? 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 49 
 
 NUTRITION. 
 
 Nutrition is the renewal of the materials of which the different 
 parts of the body are composed. The Circulation, Digestion, and 
 Respiration, are the three great agents in this vital process. The 
 blood however is the immediate source of nutrition. Every thing of 
 a nutrient character, whether for bone, muscle, nerve, ligament, or 
 other tissue, must first be converted into blood, or incorporated with 
 that fluid, before it can be applied to its intended uses ; for the nutri- 
 tive process is simply a kind of secretion, by which particles of mat- 
 ter are separated from the blood, and conveyed with wonderful 
 accuracy to the particular textures for which they are suited. The 
 nutrient vessels which separate these particles of new material from 
 the blood, may be said to antagonize with those of absorption : While 
 the one class, with most beautiful precision, are constructing and 
 renovating the animal frame, the other are as diligently engaged in 
 pulling down and removing the old material. This process of nutri- 
 tion, or separating new material from the blood and applying it to 
 the appropriate textures, as bone, muscle, ligament, etc, is effected 
 by a set of minute vessels, the smallest in the human body — so 
 small that they can onlj T be detected through the aid of a powerful 
 microscope. They are the smallest of the Capillaries. 
 
 " As the blood goes the round of the circulation, the nutrient capil- 
 lary vessels select and secrete those parts which are similar to the 
 nature of the structure, and the other portions pass on ; so that every 
 tissue imbibes and converts to its own use the very principles which 
 it requires for its growth ; or, in other words, as the vital current 
 approaches each organ, the particles appropriate to it feel its attrac- 
 tive force — obey it — quit the stream — mingle with the substance of 
 its tissue — and are changed into its own true and proper nature." 
 And thus bone attracts from the blood, through its capillaries, the 
 material suitable to make bone, and muscle that which is suitable to 
 make muscle, and so on throughout the different tissues of the body. 
 
 Of course all nutrition is derived ultimately from the food we eat, 
 and consequently involves the process of digestion ; but the immedi- 
 ate, direct agent for making, developing, sustaining, and renewing 
 the body, is the blood. This being the fact we speak first of that 
 fluid, and its circulation ; after which it will be necessary to inquire 
 where and how the blood itself is furnished with the elements of 
 nutrition — which will lead us a step further back, to the subject 
 of digestion and assimilation of food, thus reversing the order usu- 
 ally pursued by writers on this subject. 
 
50 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 The Blood. 
 
 The Blood is that fluid which circulates in the heart, arteries, 
 capillaries, arid veins. In the arteries it is of a "bright red or light 
 vermillion hue, while in the veins (except those which convey it 
 from the lungs to the heart) it is of a dark red or purple color. The 
 quantity of blood in the body of an adult person is estimated to be 
 about twenty -five to thirty pounds. Its temperature in a state of 
 health is about 100 degrees Fahrenheit. In some diseases, as scarlet, 
 and other fevers, it rises five to ten degrees above this ; while in some 
 others, as the cholera, it falls twenty to thirty degrees below it. 
 
 The blood is the most important fluid in the body, for it is not only 
 the sole material from which every part of the body is made but 
 it furnishes the various secretions, as bile, pancreatic juice, saliva, 
 etc., and is the source of animal heat, diffusing warmth throughout 
 the system, and maintaining the temperature of the body at a uni- 
 form standard amid the various changes of heat and cold. 
 
 The blood contains an immense number of little red globules, which 
 can only be distinguished through a microscope, and which contain, 
 or rather constitute its coloring matter. When drawn from the body 
 and allowed to rest, it separates into two parts, one of which is solid, 
 or of a jelly-like consistence, and is called the crassamentum, or clot. 
 This part contains the red globules. The other is a water}', trans- 
 parent fluid, of a slightly yellowish hue, and is called the serum. The 
 serum is said to constitute fully one-fifth of the blood, in a healthy 
 state of the body. In diseases, generally, the proportion of serum is 
 increased ; consequently there is a diminution of the healthy and 
 nutritive properties of the blood, as the serum is but its watery por- 
 tion, and probably serves only as a solvent for foreign substances, 
 and as a medium in which to suspend the red globules. 
 
 Upon washing the crassamentum, the coloring matter disappears, 
 and a whitish substance remains, called jibrine, which is the principal 
 material of which the muscles are formed, and probably other por- 
 tions of the body. 
 
 So important is the blood to health and even the existence of our 
 bodies, that it was said by the ancients that "the blood of the body 
 is the life thereof." Whether this be true wholly, or only in part, it 
 is very certain that we can not live, even for one short hour, without 
 this wonderful fluid. 
 
 Circulation of the Blood. 
 Extraordinary as it may seem, it is only a little over two hundred 
 years since the circulation of the blood was discovered. This 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 51 
 
 discovery, as the reader is probably aware, was made by "William 
 Harvey, an eminent English physician. So strong is the force of 
 prejudice, and so difficult is it to discard preconceived opinions, that 
 instead of receiving the meed of praise from his professional brethren 
 for this brilliant and important discovery, he was violently perse- 
 cuted by them — so much even that it is said he was obliged to retire 
 to an obscure corner of London, and finally lost nearly the whole of 
 his practice. In his history of England, Hume remarks that no phy- 
 sician in Europe who was forty years of age at the time, ever adopted 
 Harvey's doctrine of the circulation. Yet where is the physician 
 now, or person with any pretensions to science, who doubts it? No 
 doctrine in physiology is better established or more generally under- 
 stood than that of the circulation of the blood. 
 
 The heart, as has been said, is properly a double organ, having 
 two sides or compartments, in each of which there are two cavities, 
 one called the auricle and the other the ventricle. By the muscular 
 contraction and relaxation of the heart, producing alternate diminu- 
 tion and enlargement of these cavities, the blood is forced first from 
 the auricles into the ventricles, and then from the ventricles into 
 the arteries. The dilatation of the ventricles is called the diastole of 
 the heart, and their contraction its systoU. 
 
 In describing the circulation of the blood, the right auricle of the 
 heart may be regarded as the proper starting point, as it is the cav- 
 ity which receives from the veins the blood from all parts of the 
 body, after it has gone the round of the circulation. It is with this 
 auricle that the two great veins (upper and lower vena cava) con- 
 nect, and into this they discharge their contents of venous blood, 
 Avhich is now of a dark red, almost black color, and is unfit for the 
 nourishment and growth of the body until it has been renewed and 
 purified in the great laboratory of the lungs. From here the blood 
 is forced by the contraction of the auricle through an opening into 
 the right ventricle, which is situated immediately below it. The right 
 ventricle in its turn contracts and forces the blood into the pulmonary 
 artery, and through it and its branches to the lungs. Inside of' this 
 ventricle are what are called the tricuspid valves, which close upon 
 the entrance from the auricle and thus prevent the blood from regur- 
 gitating, or returning to the auricle when the ventricle contracts. 
 There is a similar provision in the pulmonary artery, called the 
 semilunar valves, which prevent the blood from returning to the 
 ventricle when it dilates or relaxes. 
 
 In the lungs the blood undergoes its great change. It here becomes 
 what may be termed oxygenized and decarbonized; that is, charged 
 with oxygen, and freed from its carbon, and thereby changed from a 
 
52 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 dark purple to a bright red color, and rendered fit for re-circulation, 
 and all the purposes of nutrition. This change is effected by the 
 action of the atmospheric air, taken into the lungs in breathing. The 
 pulmonary arteries divide and subdivide into innumerable branches, 
 which distribute themselves to all parts of the lungs, and finally lose 
 themselves in the minute capillaries. These little vessels surround 
 the air-cells of the lungs, forming a kind of net-work around them ; 
 so that when air is taken into the lungs, and these cells are filled with 
 it, a chemical action takes place between the blood and the air. The 
 cells and the capillaries are so very thin, that oxygen escapes through 
 them from the air, and unites with the red globules, or iron of the 
 blood, producing a red oxide of iron ; while at the same time the car- 
 bon which the blood has taken up in its round through the body, and 
 which gives to it its dark color, is either burnt up by the oxygen, or 
 escapes through the air-cells and passes out along with the breath 
 when ejected from the lungs. Thus the blood becomes purified and 
 ready for use again. It is now of a bright red color. 
 
 From the capillaries of the air-cells the blood now passes into the 
 minute extremities of the veins, which unite with them the same as 
 the arteries, and thence into the two pulmonary veins which convey it 
 direct to the left auricle of the heart. This auricle then contracts, 
 and forces the blood down into the left ventricle. In this ventricle are 
 what are called the mitral valves, which prevent the blood from return- 
 ing to the auricle. The left ventricle then contracts and forces the 
 blood into the great aorta, through which, and its numerous branches 
 and their subdivisions, it is distributed to every part of the body. 
 There is also a valve within the mouth of the aorta, the semilunar, 
 which prevents the blood from reflowing into the ventricle. The 
 difference between the functions of the pulmonary artery and the 
 aorta is, the former proceeds from the right ventricle and distributes 
 only impure blood to the lungs, to be purified ; the other connects 
 with the left ventricle, and distributes pure blood to all parts of the 
 body, the lungs included. 
 
 The aorta sends off branches to the head, neck, viscera, and upper 
 and lower extremities, which divide and subdivide into innumerable 
 smaller branches, which ramify upon the bones, muscles, skin, and 
 every part of the body, until they are finally lost in the little capil- 
 lary vessels, the same as the extremities of the pulmonary arteries. 
 Every tissue of the body is full of these capillaries, which form the 
 connecting link between the arteries and the veins. It is while the 
 blood is passing through these, that its nutritive properties are 
 taken up and assimilated to the different parts of the body, by a still 
 smaller set of vessels, which open into these, called the nutritive 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 
 
 53 
 
 capillaries. In this way the blood is made to nourish, sustain, and 
 replenish the system. In this way the growth of the body is effected, 
 and all the new particles obtained to supply the continual waste that 
 is going on in the various tissues. 
 
 Fig. 10. 
 
 An ideal view of the Circulation in the Lungs and System. 
 1, Eight auricle ; 2, right ventricle ; 3, pulmonary artery ; 4, 5, left and right 
 branches, going to the lungs ; 6, 6, the capillaries of the lungs ; 7, 8, pulmonary veins, 
 returning blood to left auricle of the heart; 9, left auricle; 19, left ventricle; 11, 
 20, aorta; 12, 13, 13, branches of aorta, ascending and descending; 14, 14, the capil- 
 laries, into which the arteries terminate, and from which the veins rise; 15, 16, 
 descending and ascending vena cava. g^^The arrows show the course of the blood. 
 
 Having parted with its nutritive properties, and also lost much of 
 its oxygen, the blood is ready to be sent back to the heart, and thence 
 to the lungs to be again purified and renewed. It has again become 
 quite dark, from the loss of its oxygen, and the presence of carbon. 
 From the capillaries therefore it passes into the extremities of the 
 veins, and thence is collected from all parts into larger veins, all of 
 which terminate at last in the two large trunks, the ascending and 
 
&i ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 descending vena cava, from which it is poured into the right auricle 
 of the heart, and is ready to proceed on the rounds we have just 
 described. This is the circulation of the blood. 
 
 The motive power that forces the blood through the arteries is the 
 contraction of the heart, or of its ventricles. This force or influence 
 is felt to the very extremities of the arteries, for what we call the 
 pulse is nothing more than the motion or wave in the artery — the 
 impulse caused by the beating or contracting of the heart. The ven- 
 tricles of the heart contract, or the pulse beats, about seventy times 
 every minute, in an adult ; in children much often er, and in old age 
 less than that. At every stroke of the heart it is estimated that it 
 forces two ounces of blood into the aorta ; and if it contracts at the 
 rate of seventy times a minute, it will only require about three min- 
 utes at most for all the blood in the body to pass through the heart, 
 and consequently to go the rounds of the circulation. 
 
 The influence which returns the blood to the heart, through the 
 veins is not so well understood. Indeed there is nothing satisfactory 
 known on the subject. We know that it is so returned, and that 
 therefore nature has some sufficient plan for doing it — and this is 
 about all we do know in regard io it. There have been various the- 
 ories proposed by physiologists, the most probable of which I regard 
 that of nervous or electrical influence, and the muscular contraction 
 of the veins themselves. 
 
 As the blood is the medium through which every part of the body 
 receives* its nutriment, and as this nutriment is extracted from the 
 blood while it is passing through the minute vessels at the extrem- 
 ities of the arteries, it is evident that in order to have health and 
 strength of the body, there should be a full and free distribution of 
 this fluid to all the parts. To secure this, a proper degree of daily 
 exercise is necessary. The skin should be kept clean, and sufficiently 
 warm, so that the capillaries next the surface do not become closed 
 or congested by chill or cold, or the blood may be concentrated upon 
 internal parts, and debility or disease be the result. Next to having 
 a supply of good, rich and healthy blood, it is important that its cir- 
 culation be equal ; that is, properly and equally distributed to all 
 parts. In case of unequal circulation, the extremities cold, particu- 
 larly the feet — skin pale or sallow, with other symptoms usual in 
 kucIi cases — rely on ablutions of the body, warm and cold baths, fric- 
 tion upon the surface, and plenty of out-door exercise, to restore the 
 equilibrium, and bring back the health. They will be found better 
 than all the drugs and patent medicines in the country. 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 55 
 
 DIGESTION: 
 
 Although the blood, as we have seen, is the immediate agent of 
 nutrition, by which the body in all its parts is sustained, and devel- 
 oped, yet the blood itself, with all its elements of nutrition, is derived 
 from the food we eat. This change of foreign substances — what we 
 eat and drink, into the material of the body, is one of the most extra- 
 ordinary phenomena in nature, and is eminently worthy of our study, 
 both as a matter of interest and of utility. "When we recollect how 
 various are the articles of food, and how dissimilar most of them are 
 to the blood, it seems scarcely possible that such a change could occur. 
 Yet it does occur daily in our own bodies, although we are uncon- 
 scious of it. Though we are not acquainted with the precise means 
 by which nature performs this function, or indeed any function, we 
 can point out the organs employed, and the different changes the 
 food undergoes in each one. Commencing then with the food on the 
 table we will follow it from the time it is received into the mouth, 
 noting all the processes and changes through which it passes, until 
 it is finally converted into blood, and building material for the body. 
 
 The first stage of the process of digestion is that of mastication, 
 which consists in chewing or grinding the food and thus preparing 
 it for entering the stomach. The act of mastication is so well under- 
 stood that it needs no description, more than to say that it is materi- 
 ally aided by a fluid called the saliva or spittle, which is secreted by 
 <'crtain organs heretofore described, called salivary glands. As soon 
 as food is taken into the mouth and the act of chewing- commences — 
 particularly if it be dry food, these glands begin to secrete and pour 
 into the mouth through their little ducts this fluid, which serves to 
 moisten the food and help reduce it to a condition suitable for enter- 
 ing the stomach. The saliva, it is thought, also aids in the process 
 of digestion after the food has. passed into the stomach. 
 
 The next act after mastication is that of deglutition, or swallowing — 
 which is also too well understood to need .special description. It is 
 proper however to remark here that the food should be well masti- 
 cated and thoroughly moistened with the saliva before it is swallowed. 
 The habit of taking fluids, as tea, coffee, or even water, along with 
 our food, is by no means a good one. The less fluids of an}- kind we 
 take at meals the better. One reason of this is that fluids taken into 
 the mouth along with food prevent the flow of the saliva. The saliva is 
 a provision of nature for moistening the food ; but if the mouth is 
 already full of water, or any other foreign liquid, the saliva will not 
 enter. If drinks must be taken at meals, it should be done when 
 
56 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 there is no food in the mouth — after it has been masticated and swal- 
 lowed ; or, which is still better, after the meal has been finished. 
 There are other objections, and serious ones, to the use of fluids at 
 our meals, which will be mentioned as we proceed. 
 
 Chymification : Soon after the food enters the stomach, which it 
 does through a pipe or tube called the (Esophagus, it undergoes the 
 first part of the real process of digestion, by being converted into a 
 homogeneous, semi-fluid mass of grayish pulp, called chyme. The 
 previous processes of mastication and deglutition are but preparatory 
 ones. The stomach, as has been said, is a kind of pouch or bag, with 
 strong muscular walls, which by their alternate contraction and 
 relaxation, keep the masticated food in constant motion — churning it 
 from side to side, and thus breaking it still finer and finer, and mixing 
 it more intimately. The grand agent however, in converting the 
 food into chyme is a peculiar fluid known as the gastric juice, which is 
 secreted from the inner walls, or lining membrane, of the stomach. 
 This fluid has a remarkably solvent power and will act upon ordi- 
 nary articles of food with the greatest readiness. It is so powerful 
 even out of the body that a portion put into a bottle, for instance, 
 will dissolve or digest a piece of meat or other food suspended in it, 
 almost the same as though it were in the stomach. The gastric juice 
 differs in its nature according to the character of the food upon which 
 the animal subsists. Thus, in herbivorous animals, that live alto- 
 gether upon vegetables, as the sheep, or the ox, it can not dissolve 
 flesh ; while in exclusively carnivorous animals it can not dissolve 
 vegetables, but in man as in other omnivorous animals it acts equally 
 upon both animal and vegetable food. A somewhat remarkable pecu- 
 liarity of this fluid however, is that it can not act upon any substance 
 possessing life or vitality ; hence it does not injure the coats of the 
 stomach and intestines, with which it comes in contact ; and hence 
 also we often find that worms live unhurt in the stomach and bowels. 
 But as soon as they die, they are dissolved by it, or digested. It 
 will also soon destroy the coats of the stomach after death. The 
 natural appearance of the gastric juice is that of a limpid, colorless 
 fluid, slightly viscid, and somewhat acid to the taste. 
 
 When the food has become properly digested, or converted into 
 chyme, it passes from the stomach, through the pyloric orifice into the 
 duodenum,where it undergoes the process of what is termed chylification. 
 A peculiarity in this pyloric orifice, or pylorus, is that it will not allow 
 the food to pass it without first being properly dissolved by the gastric 
 juice, or chymified. All undigested masses, pieces of beef or whatever 
 else it may be, will be refused exit until they are reduced to the proper 
 consistence. Hence the name pylorus, which means gate-keeper. 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 57 
 
 Chylificatton : This consists in the separation of the nutricions 
 portion of the food from the innutricious or refuse. In the duode- 
 num the food or chyme as it now is, meets with two other fluids, the 
 bile and the pancreatic juice. The bile is a dark green, bitter, and 
 alkaline fluid, while the pancreatic juice somewhat resembles the 
 saliva. These fluids are conveyed into the duodenum through small 
 tubes or ducts coming from the organs which secrete them — the liver 
 and the pancreas — as has been fully explained in the anatomy of 
 these organs. 
 
 Immediately after the chyme becomes mixed with these fluids it 
 begins to separate into two distinct portions, one of which is the 
 chyle, or nutricions portion, and the other the refuse portion, which 
 passes off by the bowels. The chyle is a white, milk-like fluid. It 
 resembles blood however, in nearly every particular except its color ; 
 and hence has been called white Hood. Indeed it is blood, and only 
 waits the coloring process, to be ready for use in the processes of 
 circulation and nutrition. 
 
 Absorption of the Chyle : The refuse or innutricious portion of 
 the food, as I have said, passes off by the bowels ; but the chyle is 
 absorbed or taken up by an immense number of little vessels or tubes 
 which open upon the inner surface of the duodenum and small intes- 
 tines, called Lacteals, and is by them carried and emptied into the 
 Thoracic Duct, a long tube about the size of a goose-quill, or hardly 
 so large, which runs up along the spine, behind the stomach and 
 heart, and empties into the left subclavian vein, at a point under the 
 left clavicle, near the neck. Through this the chyle passes, and is 
 thus mixed with the ven o u s blood, and goes with it direct to the heart, 
 and thence to the lungs, where the action of the air, or the oxygen 
 from the air, turns it red. and converts it into real blood. From the 
 lungs it passes back again to the heart, through the pulmonary veins, 
 and is distributed along with the general mass of blood to all parts 
 of the body, through the arteries ; thus nourishing and invigorating 
 the system, and supplying the waste that is continually taking place, 
 as well as furnishing additional material for increasing the size of the 
 body during its growth. All the nourishment and strength we 
 receive from our food is obtained in this manner; and all our bones, 
 muscles, and every part of our bodies, are made in this way; the 
 food we eat making the blood, and the blood in turn making the more 
 solid parts. How wonderful ! When we reflect that this piece of 
 bread, or this potato, which we are about to eat, to satisfy our hunger, 
 will, in a few hours be converted into red blood, flowing through our 
 veins and arteries, and that probably before we rise in the morning 
 from our slumbers and our dreams, it will constitute a part of our 
 
58 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 Jiving flesh of our body — the change will appear little less than a 
 miracle ! 
 
 Additional Observations on Digestion. 
 
 The absorption of the chyle takes place, principally, from the 
 duodenum, and first portion of the small intestines, called the 
 jejunum; less from the second portion, the ileum; and still less, if 
 indeed any, from the large intestines. The lacteals commence upon 
 the inner surface of the intestines, and, as has been said in describing 
 these vessels, pass through certain small bodies, called the mesenteric 
 glands, which are supposed to exert some influence upon the chyle as 
 it passes through them. The lacteals all terminate in the lower end 
 of the thoracic duct, where there is a sort of enlargement of that ves- 
 sel, called the Receptacle of the Chyle. 
 
 The time required for digestion to take place — that is, to change 
 food into chyme, ready to pass out of the stomach into the duodenum, 
 varies according to the character of that food, and the tenderness of 
 the fiber on which the gastric juice is required to act, as also upon the 
 proper or improper mastication of it before entering the stomach. It 
 has been found by experiment that rice, sago, tripe, raw eggs, soused 
 pig's feet, broiled venison steak, and a few other articles, require bu 
 about an hour to an hour and a half; while some meats, as broiled beef 
 steak, broiled fresh pork, and mutton, require about three hours, and 
 veal, fried beef, salt fish, salt pork, most domestic fowls, as chickens 
 and ducks, nearly or quite four hours. Turnips, potatoes, beets, 
 carrots, wheat and corn bread, green corn, and apple dumplings 
 require about three hours, and melted butter and old cheese near 
 four hours. Boiled cabbage, four and a half hours, and roasted fresh 
 pork five hours. Eadishes, pickles, and raw onions, from six to 
 twelve hours, and sometimes longer. Oily substances, as beef and 
 mutton suet, the greasy portion of soups, and grease generally, are 
 digested with great difficulty. 
 
 The medium time for the digestion of a meal, under ordinary cir- 
 cumstances, is about three hours and a half. If we drink freely at 
 the time — especially of ice-water, it will require four hours, or longer. 
 
 Moderate exercise after a meal increases the temperature of the 
 stomach, and assists the digestion. It is best, however, always to 
 rest half an hour immediately after eating a hearty meal. 
 
 On Drinking at Meals, and Liquid Aliments. 
 Wine, spirits, water, tea, coffee, and other fluids, are not affected 
 by the gastric juice, and consequently not digested. All fluids must 
 pass from the stomach — mostly by absorption — before digestion commences. 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 59 
 
 Hence, here is another important reason why fluids should not be 
 taken along with our food, or at least should be taken sparingly. 
 They only retard digestion. The habit of soup-eating at meal time 
 is a bad one. It is better to avoid soups entirety, if we are well and 
 intend to eat a full meal. All their watery portion must be absorbed 
 and removed from the stomach before digestion can take place. 
 Soups also, such as we find at the hotels and eating-houses, usually 
 contain stimulating condiments, which excite the mucous membrane 
 of the stomach and produce an artificial and often greatly increased 
 appetite, thereby causing us to eat too much. The stomach should 
 never be excited by artificial stimulants, as peppers, mustard, and the 
 like, for the purpose of increasing the appetite. Nature is the best 
 stimulant, and the best judge as to when we should eat and when we 
 should not. 
 
 It is no objection to the truth of this doctrine, to say that milk is 
 healthy and nutricious, and that physicians recommend soups and 
 broths for the sick and the convalescing. In the first place, fully 
 eighty per cent, of the best milk is water. This must be absorbed 
 and removed from the stomach. The remainder, the nutricious por- 
 tion, is then formed into a kind of curd, and is no more a liquid, but 
 a semi-solid. The gastric juice can now act upon it and change it 
 into chyme. But as to the utility of milk at all as food, beyond mere 
 infancy, there is good room to doubt. 
 
 As to the utility of broths and gruels for the invalid — this can 
 only be justified upon the following principle. Usually in such cases, 
 particularly in persons recovering from a spell of sickness, as fever, 
 or other acute diseases, there is a morbid craving appetite, sometimes 
 almost furious, and generally demanding things that are entirely 
 improper, as pork, cabbage, cheese, pickles, mince-pie, and the like. 
 In order to quiet the appetite as well as we may with safety to the 
 patient, and at the same time furnish the raging stomach something 
 to work upon, to busy itself with, and, as it were, "keep it out of 
 mischief'' for a few hours, we give it a lot of gruel, or weak soup, 
 which, after all, affords it but little nutriment, or not enough to do 
 any harm. The stomach in such cases needs something to fill it up, 
 to distend it somewhat ; but if we should do this with strong food, 
 we should at once endanger the patient's health, if not his life. 
 Upon this hypothesis, only, can the usual practice of giving soups to 
 the sick be justified. But in many cases, perhaps in most, a small 
 quantity of solid food — a crust of bread, or some boiled rice, would 
 be much better. 
 
 Another reason why drinks should not be taken at meals is, that, 
 as a general thing, they contain no nutriment, and hence do not help 
 
60 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 to satisfy the appetite, although they do help to fill and distend the 
 stomach. We usually eat as much food when we drink a pint of 
 water or coffee along with it, as we would were we not to drink any 
 thing; and if wine, or ale, or stimulating drinks are used, we will be 
 apt to eat more, for they excite the appetite. The consequence is, 
 that, with our eating and drinking, the stomach will be so much dis- 
 tended as to be uncomfortable, and if the habit be persisted in, it will 
 certainly lead to permanent disease of that organ. More dyspepsias 
 and ruined stomachs are produced in this way than people are 
 aware of. 
 
 Avoid fluids as much as possible when you eat. Remember, that 
 like the saliva when fluid is in the mouth, the gastric juice will not 
 flow, when the stomach is filled with liquids ; or if it does, it will be 
 so diluted by them that it can not act upon the food. I have known 
 some of the most inveterate cases of dyspepsia cured entirely by 
 abstaining from the use of drinks of all kinds at meals. Eut particu- 
 larly at dinners should we dispense with drinking, for it is then that 
 we usually eat the most hearty. If drinking can not be entirely dis- 
 pensed with at breakfast and supper, by all means leave it off at din- 
 ner — the principal meal — and for at least three hours after, if you are 
 at all dyspeptic. Cold water, especially ice-water, is bad at meal-time. 
 It chills the stomach and retards or puts back absorption, as well as 
 digestion, at least half an hour ; and absorption of the fluids, you 
 know, must take place before digestion commences. I can hardly 
 say that ice-water is healthy at any time. It should be used with 
 caution — particularly by all who are not in the habit of using it 
 daily. 
 
 On the Quantity of Food. 
 
 No very definite or satisfactory rule can be prescribed as to the 
 exact quantity of food necessary for the system. It is generally 
 admitted by intelligent men that we eat too much — nearly twice as 
 much as nature for all practical purposes requires. Philosophers, 
 physiologists, chemists, pathologists, and dieteticians, all agree in 
 this. Not of course that every individual eats too much ; but that 
 the people of this country, as a people, are given to excessive and 
 unnecessary eating. 
 
 The proper quantity of food must necessarily vary according to 
 the age, occupation, habits, and health of a person, and also the 
 climate or temperature in which he lives. Children and young per- 
 sons require an extra amount of food to furnish material for the 
 growth of the body. The more rapid the growth of the child, the 
 greater the demand for food. 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 61 
 
 Persons of active habits, and such as labor hard, or exercise a 
 great deal, need more food than those of inactive or sedentary habits. 
 Increased action of the body increases in a proportionate degree the 
 wearing out of the organism, and facilitates the removal of the waste 
 material through the different outlets, especially through the lungs 
 and the skin. This increase in the waste of the body requires of 
 course an additional amount of food out of which new material is to 
 be made to supply the loss. This law holds good however only 
 where labor or bodily exertion is not carried so for as to produce 
 muscular and nervous exhaustion, and consequent debility; for in 
 such case the stomach and whole digestive apparatus would suffer 
 also, and would require that less food be taken, for the time being, 
 or greater debility and perhaps serious disease would be the 
 result. 
 
 A sudden change from active, laborious habits, to such as are inac- 
 tive and confining, requires that the usual amount of food should be 
 diminished. Let an active, laboring man take a trip on one of our 
 fine steamboats requiring several days, and ten chances to one he 
 will soon feel the effects of disregarding this important law of our 
 nature, in the form of dyspepsia, sour stomach, head-ache, and a gen- 
 eral derangement of the system. He will be sensibly impressed with 
 the fact that he has either eaten too much, or has not had exercise 
 enough. 
 
 In warm weather, or in warm climates, we require much less food, 
 and of a less stimulating nature, than in cold. I have frequently 
 noticed that when in New Orleans I ate much less than when in the 
 upper country, and that I could do as well there on two meals a-day. 
 as on three in the latitude of Cincinnati or Chicago. A certain 
 amount of food is needed fur fuel ; in other words, a certain amount 
 of carbon, which is obtained from our food is needed for a sort of 
 combustion by its union with oxygen, for the purpose of producing 
 bodily heat, and of maintaining a proper temperature of the system. 
 In warm weather, and even when the body is warmly clothed, a less 
 amount of food for this purpose will be needed. In the arctic regions 
 the inhabitants live almost exclusively on animal food ; while under 
 the tropics some nations subsist entirely on vegetable diet, and do 
 not seem to wish or require any thing more stimulating. 
 
 The quantity of food must also be regulated according to the health 
 of the individual and consequent condition of the digestive organs. 
 No more should be taken than can be well digested : for unless the 
 food is properly digested and changed, as has been described, it does 
 not invigorate the system, but actually does harm. Large quantities 
 of food at any time oppresses the stomach, and produces languor of 
 
62 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 both body and mind, and of course can but be still more detrimental 
 when the system is not in perfect health. 
 
 Some writers lay it down as a rule to be observed in regard to 
 quantity, other things being equal, that we should eat no more than 
 is barely sufficient to satisfy the appetite. This however is not a 
 safe rule. We are not always able to distinguish readily between 
 appetite and mere taste, and hence are liable to eat too much. It is 
 far better to say, never eat till the appetite is satisfied — always quit 
 hungry. Most persons seem to eat just about as much as they can, 
 so as not to suffer from it immediately. The inquiry seems to be — 
 with those who inquire at all — not how little they may eat, but rather 
 how much, without the loss of health as the consequence. It is a 
 better rule, I have said, to leave off hungry, or as some say, never 
 eat quite enough. " Grant Thorburn, whose writings over the signa- 
 ture of Laurie Todd, have interested and delighted many, and who, 
 at the age of ninety, or nearly so, is almost as young in his feelings 
 as ever he was, is accustomed to say to his friends that he never ate 
 enough in his whole life." But even this rule — to leave off hungry — 
 will not apply in all cases, for some people never are hungry ! There 
 was once a sort of half-idiot who always went about asking the peo- 
 ple if they didn't wish to know the art of never being dry, or thirsty? 
 The secret was, he said, " always mind to drink before you are dry, 
 and you never will be dry." A great many people apply this rule 
 to their eating. They always eat before they are hungry, and hence 
 never are hungry. The present fashionable styles of cookery are 
 well calculated to make us mistake taste for appetite, and eat more 
 than we ought, and more than we would of good, plain, wholesome 
 food. 
 
 Eating Between Meals. 
 One of the most common sins against the laws of health is eating 
 between our regular meals. At present it is customary in many 
 places and with persons of all classes, to eat so often that they seldom 
 ifeverhavea good appetite; and what appetite they may have at 
 first is soon spoiled by their over-indulgence in eating. Not con- 
 tent with three meals a- day, they must take a lunch in the forenoon, 
 and another in the afternoon, so that the stomach has no rest during 
 the whole day, and by the time supper arrives, it is so much fatigued 
 and jaded that this meal — which is usually a heavy one — will hardly 
 be disposed of during the whole night. The reward so richly earned 
 is sure to follow. Our sleep is disturbed and unrefreshing ; the night 
 is passed in restless anxiety or distressing dreams, and we wake next 
 morning with a bad taste in the mouth, dryness of the throat, dull 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 63 
 
 headache, loss of appetite, and an unwillingness to rise. Such a course 
 of living, if persisted in will unquestionably bring about a bad state 
 of things, resulting in confirmed dyspepsia, and a general loss of 
 health. The stomach requires a proper degree of rest. It has a 
 muscular coat, which, like all muscular bodies, needs rest after exer- 
 cise, and must have it — or we will pay the penalty. Of all the organs 
 of the body, there is probably none so much abused as the stomach. 
 
 Whether Ave eat once, twice, or three times a-day — and we should 
 never eat more than three times — we should eat only at our regular 
 meals. Nothing containing nutriment, whether solid or liquid, 
 whether fruits, nuts, or cakes, should be allowed to go down our 
 throats between meals. Apples, oranges, nuts, and the like, of course 
 are intended for us to eat, but it should all be done at our tables, and 
 regular meals. Not however, as the general custom is, at the end, 
 when we have already eaten as much as we ought; but along with 
 our bread and other food, as a part of the meal. And so also should 
 pies, puddings and cakes, if eaten at all. But it is better to avoid all 
 pastries entirely. 
 
 It is a mistaken idea among farmers that they can not get along 
 through harvest, during the long hot days, without eating something 
 between meals — especially in the afternoon. They will find on trial 
 that they will be able to endure the heat and fatigue of the harvest 
 season much better without their " four o'clock piece." It only does 
 harm, by over-tasking the stomach and rendering it unprepared for 
 the evening meal. If you value good health and long life, avoid all 
 eating between your regular meals — every " appearance of evil" of 
 this kind — whether it be lunches, oyster-suppers, apples, oranges, 
 candies, or what not. either in large or in small quantities; for even 
 the smallest portion — a crust of bread or a mouthful of apple — will 
 call into exercise the whole digestive system. 
 
 Eegularity in Eating. 
 
 Another very important rule in regard to eating is regularity. 
 We should make it a point to take our meals at regular hours ; and 
 rather than vary from this it is better to miss a meal occasionally. 
 It may be stated as a general law — with here and there an exception 
 perhaps, as there are exceptions to all general laws — that those per- 
 sons who are most regular in their hours of eating, other things 
 being equal, are the most healthy, and in old age. are the most cheer- 
 ful, sprightly and youthful in their feelings. 
 
 We are to a great extent creatures of habit, and may accustom 
 ourselves to almost any hours for eating, and hence may as well be 
 regular as irregular. The habit of irregular eating often grows up 
 
64 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 with us from childhood. Unfortunately for human health and hap- 
 piness, the 3'oung are too often trained up, in regard to this matter, 
 in a way they should not go, and when they become old they dislike 
 to part from it. Too often in childhood is the foundation laid for 
 ruined health and a miserable existence, by the fond but unwise 
 indulgence of parents. And many a child too has been carried away 
 by summer and autumnal diseases, that might have escaped, had it 
 been less indulged, or been properly trained in its habits of eating. 
 Many a child has been fed to death by its mother. Locke, the phi- 
 losopher, has said, that " when a child asks for food at any other 
 time than at his regular meals, plain bread should be given him — no 
 pastry, no delicacies, but simply plain bread. For if the child is 
 really hungry, plain bread will readily go down ; if not hungry, let 
 him go without till he is so." This is good advice. But it is still 
 better to give him nothing at all between his meal times. These, of 
 course, should be more frequent than for larger persons; but they 
 should be at regular stated periods. I know it is hard to train up 
 a child in the way he should go, and harder still to train ourselves 
 to proper dietetic habits ; but the importance of doing so, whether 
 we eat two, three, or more times a day, is at least equal to the diffi- 
 culties we may encounter, and is certainly worthy of our best and 
 nost considerate efforts. 
 
 Eating too Fast. 
 
 Another very common violation of the laws of health, is in eating 
 too fast. This is almost as bad as eating too much, for it amounts to 
 nearly the same thing. Persons sometimes boast that they can eat 
 a regular meal in five or six minutes. Such persons swallow their 
 food without chewing. This is not really eating in the proper 
 sense of the term. Every one knows, that if we eat fast we can not 
 properly masticate our food ; and if there be one law of our nature 
 which is more rigid in its demands than an} 7 other, and the violation 
 of which is sure to be followed, sooner or later, by severe punish- 
 ment, it is that which requires that our food be well masticated 
 before it is swallowed. 
 
 As I have said in describing the process of digestion, the food, after 
 it enters the stomach, has to be changed into a soft, pulpy mass, 
 called chyme, which is done by the solvent properties of the gastric 
 juice, and the incessant muscular action of the stomach. This change 
 must be complete; there must be no lumps, or large chunks, or even 
 small ones — but all must be reduced to a perfect semi-fluid mass, 
 before it can pass into the duodenum for chyiification. Do you not 
 see how much labor you can save your stomach by chewing your 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 65 
 
 food well, or how much you may cause it by neglecting to do so? 
 The stomach, as I have several times said, needs rest after its labor ; 
 but if it must be tugging away upon a large chunk of beef-steak, or 
 several of them, and a cold potato, and perhaps a large slice of pickle, 
 from the moment you have swallowed your dinner until supper-time, 
 do you not see that it will get no time to rest? And tug away it 
 certainly will, until the last chunk you have swallowed is reduced to 
 chyme, or it has given out in utter exhaustion, or has made itself sick 
 by bringing on inflammation. It must be plain, therefore, that the 
 habit of swallowing our food half masticated, or less than half, as is 
 done by those who eat fast, is a very bad one. 
 
 Another serious objection to fast eating is, that it does not become 
 properly mixed or moistened with the saliva — indeed scarcely at all. 
 The saliva does not commence to flow, or even to secrete, until we 
 commence chewing the food, and it continues to flow only while we 
 continue to chew. But if the food is gulped down without chewing, 
 there will be little or no saliva go down with it, yet the saliva, to 
 some extent certainly, is essential to proper and healthy digestion. 
 It will not answer so well to moisten and wash down the food with 
 water, or other drinks. That will only make the matter worse, for it 
 will retard digestion by preventing the flow of the gastric juice, or 
 by diluting it if it does flow. There is no way so good as nature's 
 own way. Our teeth have been given us to grind our food, and the 
 salivary glands to moisten it, and we should make use of them. 
 Instead of five or six minutes, we should never occupy less than thirty, 
 in eating a full meal, where we can at all command the time; and it 
 is better, especially at dinner, to go over, rather than under thirty 
 minutes. But whether you eat slow or fast, a long or a short time, 
 little or much, always bear this one important thing in mind — masti- 
 cate your food well, before you send it into your stomach. By so 
 doing you will derive more benefit from it, will not be so likely to 
 eat too much, and will enjoy vastly better health. 
 
 RESPIRATION 
 
 In describing the anatomy of the lungs and the circulation of the 
 blood enough perhaps has been said to give you a tolerably correct 
 idea of the process of Eespiration, and of the important relation it 
 bears to Nutrition, on account of its influence upon the blood. Some 
 special remarks upon the subject however may not be amiss, as it is 
 5 
 
66 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 one of the essential processes of the living economy, without which 
 we could not live, any more than we could live without the blood 
 itself. Every body knows that we can not live without breathing — 
 that if from any cause whatever our breath is cut short, we die imme- 
 diately. But I apprehend it is not very generally known why this 
 is so, or what is the exact relation the air which we inhale into our 
 lungs sustains to our animal life. This will now be explained. 
 
 Kecessity of Bespiration. 
 
 Respiration or breathing is for two important purposes: First, 
 and mainly, for the purpose of purifying the blood ; and second, for 
 the purpose of producing animal heat. The organs engaged in respi- 
 ration are the lungs, the bronchial tubes, and the air-cells of the 
 lungs ; and when the change of the blood is included, the pulmonary 
 arteries, veins, and capillaries of the lungs are to be added. Beside 
 these, if we include the mechanical act of breathing, the diaphragm 
 and certain muscles of the chest, are also to be taken into the account. 
 
 The purification of the blood is indispensable, so indispensable 
 indeed, that it would soon cause death if it were to remain un- 
 changed. The venous blood is full of poison, which it has acquired 
 in its circulation through the body ; and this poison can only be 
 temoved by bringing it into contact with the atmospheric air, which 
 ?*s done in the lungs by the process of breathing. This poison is car- 
 bonic acid, and results from the union of carbon with oxygen, two 
 agents which have a remarkable affinity for each other when found 
 in the body. Carbon, as I have before remarked, is obtained from 
 our food ; it is of the same nature as charcoal, and in itself is quite as 
 harmless as charcoal ; but when it unites with oxygen, or, as is really 
 the case, when it is burned up by that vital gas, the result or resid- 
 uum — what we may call the ashes — is carbonic acid, a suffocating, 
 deadly poison. This carbonic acid is the same thing that is some- 
 times found at the bottom of wells, and in mines, in the form of a gas, 
 usually called " choke-damp," and which will kill a person or animal 
 immediately, if breathed or inhaled into the lungs. It is also the 
 same as that given off by burning charcoal, which has often caused 
 the death of persons, by suffocation, who have left it to escape into 
 their bed-rooms. 
 
 The blood is sent to the lungs for the purpose of getting rid of this 
 poison. It there escapes through the air-cells, and is expired, or 
 thrown off with the breath. This is the reason why people are suffo- 
 cated, or their health greatly injured, by breathing the same air over 
 again too many times. It becomes more and more charged with this 
 poisonous gas every time it is breathed, and if continued long enough, 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 67 
 
 will produce death as effectually arid certainly as the choke-damp 
 of wells. In badly ventilated rooms, and in buildings containing 
 large public assemblies, people are often poisoned in this way, and 
 if not killed outright, have head-aches nervous depression, and faint- 
 ings, which often laj T the foundation of more serious diseases. 
 
 Mechanical act op Breathing. 
 
 As has been said, the diaphragm is the principal organ in producing 
 the act of breathing. For a particular description of this muscle, see 
 its anatoni}'. By its contraction it presses down the abdominal vis- 
 cera immediately beneath it, and thereby enlarges the capacity of the 
 chest in that direction, allowing the lungs to expand, by following 
 it. At the same time the muscles of the ribs contract and draw them 
 upward and outward. The chest being thus enlarged, downward by 
 the diaphragm, and laterally by the muscles of the ribs, giving the 
 lungs room to stretch out and expand, which they do — a vacuum is 
 formed, and the air rushes in through the trachea or wind-pipe, and 
 the bronchial tubes, and fills up the air-cells; and just on the very 
 same principle too that air will rush in and fill up any vacuum. This 
 is called inspiration. It is estimated that the whole extent of these 
 air-tubes and cells in the lungs of a grown person is equal to twenty 
 thousand square inches, or more than twenty times the surface of the 
 whole body ; and that the quantity of air received into, and expired 
 from them, in twenty-four hours — allowing that we breathe twenty 
 times a minute, and fill the lungs each time — must be near four 
 thousand gallons. But we do not always inhale a full breath — seldom 
 as full as we ought. Many persons injure their health by getting 
 into a habit of inhaling too little air; and some ladies ruin theirs by 
 lacing their chests so that they can not, if they would, inhale more 
 than half as much as they should. It would be much wiser, because 
 much less injurious, if they would compress their feet, like the Chi- 
 nese ladies, instead of their lungs. 
 
 When we inhale the air and inflate the lungs, we are said to draw 
 in the breath ; but the drawing, you perceive, is done b}^ the dia- 
 phragm, and intercostal muscles, which enlarge the chest, and the 
 air forces itself in and fills up the lungs. When the air has remained 
 in the lungs a sufficient time to purify the blood, the muscles relax, 
 the ribs fall in or press upon the sides of the lungs, the diaphragm 
 rises, being forced upward again by the stomach and liver, and some 
 of the abdominal muscles, and thus the lungs are compressed, and the 
 air ejected or forced out. The expulsion of the air from the lungs, or 
 sending the breath out, is called expiration. And the whole process — 
 
68 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 inspiration and expiration, or drawing in and sending out the air — 
 is called respiration or breathing. 
 
 Changes of the Blood and Air. 
 
 The manner in which the blood is purified will be better under- 
 stood by observing the changes which it and the air undergo, when 
 they come in contact with each other. About one-fifth part of the 
 atmospheric air is oxygen — the balance nitrogen. On examining the 
 air however — the breath — as it comes from the lungs, it will be found 
 that the greater part of the oxygen has disappeared, and that another 
 gas — carbonic acid — has taken its place. This new gas, as has been 
 said, is formed by the union of the oxygen from the air with the car- 
 bon in the blood. The venous blood, which is heavily charged with 
 carbon, and which gives it its dark color, is conveyed to the lungs 
 through the pulmonary arteries, and passes from them into the capil- 
 laries, which surround the air-cells, forming, as has been said, a fine 
 net-work. It is here that the blood is brought in contact with the 
 air — or so near it that it amounts in effect to the same thing. The 
 air is in the cells, the blood on the outside of them in the minute 
 capillaries, the walls of which are so thin and porous that the oxygen 
 escapes from the air, unites with the blood, burns up its carbon, sets 
 free the carbonic acid, which results from the combustion, and which 
 escapes through the cells, takes the place of the oxygen in the air, 
 and is ejected with it from the lungs. Thus the blood becomes 
 changed — oxygenized, as it is sometimes termed ; and at the same 
 time the air or breath becomes changed also. The one is made 
 pure — the other impure. And this process goes on constantly ; every 
 time we inspire or take in a fresh supply of air, a fresh supply of 
 venous blood is forced into the capillaries, around the air-cells, the 
 previous lot being purified, is sent off into the veins of the lungs and 
 conveyed by them to the heart, for general distribution. 
 
 One important effect of this change upon the blood is that it is 
 turned from a dark purple to a bright red color. This is caused 
 partly by the destruction of the carbon and carbonic acid in the 
 blood, as has been described, and partly by the union of oxygen with 
 the iron in the blood. Of the fact that there is a certain portion of 
 iron in the blood there can be no doubt. It has been abundantly 
 proved by chemical analysis. The red globules of the blood are 
 largely composed of this mineral, and by the union of the oxygen 
 with them, they become, to a certain extent at least, a red oxide of 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 69 
 
 Importance of Free Ventilation. 
 It is estimated that an ordinary sized person requires about 40,000 
 cubic inches of oxygen gas every twenty-four hours, to be used up in 
 breathing, in the manner just stated. About four-fifths of this, or 
 perhaps a little more, is consumed in burning up the carbon in the 
 blood, and is turned into carbonic acid ; the balance is used in giving 
 to the blood its color and proper stimulus. From this simple fact, 
 and bearing in mind also that only about one-fifth part of the air is 
 oxygen, any person can form a tolerably correct idea as to the 
 amount of fresh air needed in a given time in public halls and places 
 containing a large number of people. And with the other simple 
 fact before them that about one-fifth of the air or breath that escapes 
 from our lungs — if it was pure when it entered — is carbonic acid gas, 
 and contains little or no oxygen, they can form some idea of the im- 
 portance and necessity of free ventilation. It is seldom however, 
 that this matter is properly attended to : indeed we have good reason 
 to believe that its importance is very little understood. We often 
 sec several hundred persons crammed together into a room where 
 not more air can enter than is necessary for one-fourth the number; 
 and the consequence is they all soon feel uneasy and oppressed, and 
 many of them no doubt suffer afterward still worse ; and yet the 
 probability is that few of them ever think of the cause. But above 
 all things is it important that our sleeping-rooms should be well ven- 
 tilated. Too much attention can hardly be paid to this matter; yet 
 I am sony to say very little is given to it, as a general thing. Ben- 
 jamin Franklin somewhere says that it is recorded of Methuselah — 
 though he does not tell us where it is recorded — that when he was 
 five hundred years old the angel of the Lord appeared unto him and 
 told him to arise and build himself a house, for he was to live yet 
 five hundred years longer. " If I am to live but five hundred years," 
 said Methuselah, u it is not worth while to build me a house; I will 
 sleep in the open air, as I have been used to do." The moral of this 
 is that sleeping in the open air, or where he always had a full supply 
 of pure fresh air, was the cause of his living so long. The hint is a 
 good one, and we should profit by it in the arrangement of our sleep- 
 ing-rooms. 
 
70 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 ANIMAL HEAT. 
 
 We are next to explain, if we can, the source of animal heat, and 
 the manner in which it is generated. I say, if we can, for physiol- 
 ogists do not all agree in regard to this matter. That there is such 
 a thing as animal beat, and that the human system has within itself 
 the power and capacity of generating this heat, and of regulating it 
 according to circumstances and conditions, we know; but the precise 
 manner in which this is done does not seem to be so well understood 
 yet, as some other processes of animal life. Inanimate substances 
 are influenced in their degrees of heat and cold by the temperature 
 which surrounds them, and by other bodies with which they are in 
 contact. Not so however with man. He has a temperature of his 
 own, independent of the surrounding medium in which he lives, and 
 is capable of maintaining this temperature at very nearly the same 
 degree in all seasons and climates, whether the surrounding atmo- 
 sphere be warm or cold. The standard heat of the human body is 
 about 100 degrees, Fahrenheit. It seldom varies from this, in a state 
 of health; or if it does, it is but little. Perhaps 98 to 102 degrees 
 may be regarded as the limits of variation. 
 
 I have said that physiologists do not all agree as to the production 
 of animal heat. This is true however only to a certain extent. All 
 the best authors on the subject agree in this — that the lungs are the 
 principal laboratory of the system for the production of heat, and 
 that it results from the chemical action of the atmosphere upon the 
 blood; or, to speak more correctly, from the union of the oxygen of 
 the atmosphere with the carbon in the blood. Some however main- 
 tain in addition to this that there is a constant union of oxygen and 
 carbon, and consequent evolution of heat, going on in the minute 
 capillary vessels throughout the system, and which accounts in part 
 for the change in the color of the blood, from a light red to a purple r 
 or from arterial to venous. This is probably true. One thing is 
 certain: a union of oxygen and carbon can not take place any where T 
 whether in the system, or in the open air, without producing combus- 
 tion, and consequently heat. What we calibre, or the burning of coal, 
 wood, or any other combustible substance, is nothing more nor less 
 than the rapid union of the oxygen in the atmosphere with the car- 
 bon in the substance burned. The union which takes place in the 
 human system between the oxygen and carbon, is not so rapid — not 
 so great, as when it takes place in the open air, in the phenomenon 
 of fire; but so far as it goes it is precisely the same thing ; and pro- 
 duces the same result — that of heat^ 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 71 
 
 Probably sufficient has been said in explaining the process of Kespi- 
 ration, and the change of the blood in the lungs, to give you an idea 
 of the manner in which heat is generated in the body. I have there 
 told you that the oxygen escapes from the air we breathe, while it is 
 in the air-cells, and unites with the carbon in the blood as it passes 
 through the capillaries which surround these cells; and that the 
 union of these two agents produces a sort of combustion, which puri- 
 fies the blood, or rids it of its excess of carbon. In other words the 
 oxygen burns up the carbon. Now nature is a great economizer. 
 Hence this very process by which the blood is purified is turned to a 
 double account. The only way to get rid of the carbon in the blood, 
 which must be done somehow or other, is to burn it up. To do this, 
 it must be brought into contact with ox} T gen, for without this won- 
 derful gas, combustion can not take place any where ; and this, it 
 seems, can only be done, to any great extent, in the lungs, and in the 
 manner already described. But, as has also been said, a union of 
 oxygen and carbon, or combustion, can not take place, either in or 
 out of the body, without producing heat. But the living organism 
 requires heat. It must be kept near a certain degree of temperature, 
 or the blood will thicken and stagnate, and the whole machinery of 
 the system soon cease to operate. As the blood flows through every 
 part of the system — is constantly going to and returning from every 
 part, in a ceaseless round of circulation, there can be no better way — 
 none so good indeed — to warm the general system and all its parts, 
 and maintain the required degree of temperature, than to warm the 
 blood. What a happy thought ! What a wise arrangement ! Warm 
 the blood, and let the blood warm the body ! And the very process 
 which purifies the blood, warms it ; the very combustion which 
 removes or destroys its carbon — which must be done, and yet can be 
 done in no other way — also, as a natural consequence, heats the blood, 
 and brings it up to the proper degree of temperature. And by the 
 rapid and constant circulation of the blood, this temperature is 
 extended and maintained throughout the system. What wisdom, 
 both in arrangement and in economy, is here exhibited ! 
 
 As an evidence that heat is generated in the lungs, and in the man- 
 ner stated, we have but to observe the fact that the body becomes 
 warmed, or its heat increased, by any exercise or other means that 
 causes us to breathe quicker. As a more perfec . test let any person, 
 instead of taking any manual exercise, sit or lie ilown in a cold room 
 and breathe faster and fuller for half an hour, and the result will be 
 that he will grow quite warm, perhaps uncomfortably so. Many of 
 us do this of cold winter nights, without probably ever thinking of 
 the philosophy of the thing, for the purpose of getting warm in a 
 
72 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 cold bed. Cold atmosphere is more dense, and consequently contains 
 more oxygen to the cubic inch, than warm atmosphere; and hence 
 the cold atmosphere with which we may be surrounded and which we 
 breathe, actually aids by its coldnes in producing the increased 
 amount of bodily heat required in cold weather. A person who sits 
 still by a large fire on a cold day will often be quite chilly, while 
 another who moves briskly about, out of doors, will feel quite warm. 
 The one vainly tries to imbibe warmth externally, while the other, 
 by his exercise and consequent increased breathing, produces it 
 internally. 
 
 Although the principal amount of animal heat is undoubtedly pro- 
 duced in the lungs, yet it probably is not all produced there. A por- 
 tion of the oxygen which passes through the air-cells into the blood — 
 perhaps one-fifth — instead of being consumed with the carbon, unites, 
 as has been already stated, with the iron or red globules of the blood, 
 which gives that fluid its bright red color. This passes into the gen- 
 eral circulation, and while the bli>od is passing through the capil- 
 lary vessels, especially in the skin and near the surface of the body, 
 it is thought that a union of oxygen and carbon again takes place, in 
 which more or less heat is evolved. We know that the blood loses 
 its bright red appearance, and that this transformation takes place 
 in the capillaries, where it changes from arterial to venous blood. 
 Hence it must part with its oxygen, and the most reasonable conclu- 
 sion seems to be that it is used in consuming the carbon that it here 
 meets with. 
 
 Some have supposed that animal heat is owing in some respect to 
 nervous influence. If by nervous influence we mean the electricity 
 of the system, this may to a certain extent be true. It may be that 
 electricity has something to do with the production of heat ; perhaps 
 it serves as the spark to light the fire, for we know that oxygen 
 and carbon will not of themselves ignite, that they will not com- 
 mence to burn, in other words, to unite in the form of combus- 
 tion, without first being started or touched off, by the application 
 of a spark from some source or other. Electricity will do this. 
 And it may be that a constant flow of electricity, a constant appli- 
 cation of sparks, is necessary to continue the combustion. Fire 
 will not burn in water, or in a fluid ; yet this burning of carbon is in 
 the blood, which is an aqueous fluid. May it not be that the presence 
 of animal electricity keeps up this singular fire, this combustion of 
 carbon and oxygen, in the blood? Allowing the nervous system to 
 be the source of the electricity, and the nerves its conductors, in this 
 way, and this only, I think, may it be said that animal heat is dey^md- 
 ent upon nervous influence. 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 73 
 
 ABSORPTION. 
 
 In describing the process of digestion, I had occasion to speak of 
 the absorption of the chyle from the duodenum and small intestines ; 
 also of the fact that all fluids taken into the stomach were absorbed 
 before digestion took place. These processes are carried on by cer- 
 tain vessels for that purpose, called lacteals and lymphatics, aud have 
 already been described. There is still another process of absorption, 
 however, carried on very generally throughout the system, in regard 
 to which it is proper to say something. 
 
 By absorption is meant the removal, the sucking-in or taking up, 
 of any substance which comes in contact with the body, or any por- 
 tion of it, either upon the surface in the lungs, or in the stomach and 
 intestines, which is done by what are called the absorbents, a set of 
 minute vessels everywhere distributed through the system, and which 
 act like a set of hungry, ravenous little animals. They will absorb 
 every thing that comes in their way, if they can, whether it be inju- 
 rious or beneficial, poisonous or healthy ; and as they empty their 
 contents directly into the veins, the blood of course becomes poisoned 
 in this way, and disease, and not unfrequently death is the conse- 
 quence. It is on this principle of absorption that medicines are often 
 applied to the surface of the body when they can not be taken inter- 
 nally. In such cases the cuticle or scarf-skin is first removed by a 
 blister, as without this, absorption will not take place readily. Yet 
 we know that it will take place to some extent even without the 
 removal of the cuticle. This is proved by the fact that thirst may 
 be diminished by bathing the body in water ; and even hunger to 
 some extent satisfied, by the application of nutricious liquids to the 
 surface. Sailors are aware of this fact, and sometimes, in cases of 
 extreme thirst and destitution of fresh water, let themselves down 
 into the sea water, by which means the blood becomes sufficiently 
 diluted by the water that is imbibed or absorbed through the skin, to 
 greatly relieve the burning thirst, for the time being. But as a gen- 
 eral thing, absorption will not take place to any perceptible extent, 
 through the cuticle or outside skin, and probably only, as in cases 
 of bathing, where the body is allowed to remain in the water long 
 enough to soften the cuticle to an extent sufficient to admit of a per- 
 meation which otherwise could not occur. 
 
 In cases of cuts and abrasions of the skin, persons should be very 
 careful about coming in contact with poisonous substances. Serious, 
 and often fatal cases of poisoning have occurred in this way. Med- 
 ical students are sometimes poisoned in this way by cutting 
 
74 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 themselves while dissecting dead bodies; and occasionally the same 
 fatal results occur to persons in removing the skins from dead ani- 
 mals. Putrified flesh is poison, and if this poison, though ever so 
 small a quantity, is brought in contact with any portion of the body 
 where the cuticle has been removed, or with a cut or sore, it is imme- 
 diately taken up by the absorbents and carried into the blood, and 
 the person is poisoned. Such poisons are generally fatal. It is on 
 this principle that the poison of snakes and other venomous reptiles 
 act. Yegetable and mineral poisons will act in the same way. Per- 
 sons can not be too careful in regard to this matter. 
 
 But probably the greatest medium through which foreign sub- 
 stances and agents are absorbed into the system is the lungs. 
 Various poisons, vapors, and other hurtful substances and gases 
 which float in the atmosphere, are taken into the lungs in breathing, 
 and by means of absorption are carried into the blood, and the gen- 
 eral system. Absorption by the lungs is very rapid and powerful. 
 It is a well-known fact, having been repeatedly proved by experi- 
 ments, that if a person breathe the vapor of turpentine for a few min- 
 utes, it may be detected in the blood and other fluids of the system in 
 a very short time afterward. The vapor of prussic acid, if inhaled 
 into the lungs, will produce death almost instantly. It is also in this 
 way that contagious and infectious diseases, as the small-pox, are 
 communicated. This will account for the origin of many diseases, 
 the causes of which are not readily understood, and will also show 
 us why and how it is that so much sickness is found in crowded ten- 
 ements, and in cities and streets where there is but little pure air in 
 circulation, and where filth and dirt and decayed matter are allowed 
 to accumulate. It will also account for the fevers and agues of new 
 countries, and certain marshy districts. The malaria, or marsh- 
 miasma arising from swamps in hot weather, and from decaying veg- 
 etable matter, floats in the atmosphere, and is taken into the lungs 
 along with the breath, and is absorbed into the blood and diffused 
 throughout the system, until it finally accumulates to an extent suffi- 
 cient to produce fever and ague or some other disease. These mias- 
 matic poisons and deleterious gases may remain in the system for 
 weeks and even months before they exhibit their effects openly; and 
 hence many diseases, no doubt, are attributed to other causes, or to 
 some unknown cause, which are due to them alone. 
 
 If we would enjoy good health, therefore, we must learn to avoid 
 the enemies of health. We must seek pure air, and, in hot seasons 
 at least, avoid swampy and malarious localities, and filthy streets 
 and cities. But if we disregard the most palpable laws of health, 
 and become sick, we should not lay the blame to an inscrutable 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 75 
 
 Providence, or a hard and cruel fate, but to our own ignorance and 
 temerity, and the transgression of laws which we ought to under- 
 stand and obey. If the poisons which float in the air Ave breathe 
 could not penetrate the air-cells of the lungs and enter the blood, 
 then neither could the oxygen of the air, and hence the blood could 
 not be purged of its carbon, and animal heat could not be generated, 
 and we should soon die from impure blood or from the effects of cold. 
 So, too, if the cutaneous and other absorbents could not take up 
 poisonous substances that come in contact with them, and carry them 
 into the blood, then neither could they remove, in like manner, the 
 waste and morbid matter of the system, and our bodies would soon 
 putrify and decompose, in the most horrid manner. All these func- 
 tions and laws of our being are for the best and wisest purposes — are 
 in fact essential to our existence ; and it is our business and our duty 
 to make ourselves acquainted with them. All the laws of nature, 
 whether physical or organic, are inflexible in their operation, and 
 their infringement or disregard is sure to be followed by appropriate 
 punishment. They make no allowance for motive or ignorance, but 
 act upon all alike, whether they be wise or ignorant. 
 
 PERSPIRATION. 
 
 The Skin. 
 
 The Skin is the seat of the important function of Perspiration. It 
 forms the external covering of the body, and to the naked eye, 
 appears to consist of a single membrane. Examination however has 
 shown that it is composed of no less than three layers or mem- 
 branes. 
 
 The first or outside layer is called the Cuticle or Epidermis, and 
 sometimes also the " Scarf-skin." It is the part that is raised in a 
 blister, and, except on the palms of the hands and soles of the feet, is 
 very thin and transparent. It has no bloodvessels or nerves, and is 
 therefore destitute of feeling, or sensibility. It is perforated with 
 innumerable pores, or minute holes, through which the perspiration 
 passes, and also the hairs. It is constantly wearing out and being 
 renewed. On the palms of the hands and soles of the feet it is very 
 thick, particularly in persons that labor, and being every where 
 without sensibility, it serves as a protection to the true skin, and a 
 barrier against the ready absorption of substances that come in con- 
 tact with the surface. 
 
76 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 The internal layer is called the Cutis vera, or true s7cin, and is plen- 
 tifully supplied with nerves and bloodvessels. So numerous are they, 
 indeed, that you can not insert the point of a needle without pro- 
 ducing pain and causing the blood to flow. When examined under 
 a microscope, this layer is found to consist partly of dense fibers 
 which intersect each other in various directions, and partly of minute 
 bloodvessels, capillaries and nerves, which fill up the spaces 
 between the fibers, the whole forming a most complete and compact 
 net work. Within the true skin are also an immense number of lit- 
 tle glands with minute ducts, which penetrate the other layers and 
 open upon the surface, constituting the pores of the skin. These 
 glands are of two kinds, the sudorific glands which secrete the perspi- 
 ration, or the aqueous portion of it, and the sebaceous glands, which 
 secrete an oily fluid, which serves to lubricate the external skin und 
 defend it from the action of moisture, and also prevents it from 
 becoming dry and harsh. It is owing to the presence of this oily 
 substance that water or perspiration collects in drops upon the skin. 
 
 Between these two layers of the skin, or between the cuticle and 
 cutis, is a thin layer called the rete mucosum, the office of which seems 
 to be simply to contain the coloring matter of the different races. In 
 the Negro it is black; in the mulatto yellow; in the Indian a dirty 
 red ; and in the European more or less white, as the apjDearance of 
 the skin ma} T indicate. Were it not for the rete mucosum the Afri- 
 can would appear as white as we do. It gives to the skin the various 
 colors and shades of color, which are to be noticed in the people of 
 different nations and climates. 
 
 The Source of Perspiration. 
 
 The perspiration, or what we call sweat, is secreted from the blood, 
 by the little glands which I have just mentioned. While the blood 
 is passing through the capillaries of the skin, these glands secrete 
 from it, or absorb its excess of watery fluid, and along with it a 
 large amount of useless and extraneous matter. 
 
 Perspiration is distinguished into two kinds — sensible and iiiscnsible; 
 a distinction however without any difference, except in quantity. It 
 is said to be insensible, when it passes off from the body in the form 
 of an invisible vapor; and sensible, when it collects on the surface in 
 drops, in the form of sweat. In the one case it is so gradual, and is 
 so rapidly evaporated, that it does not accumulate upon the skin so 
 as to be perceived, and hence is said to be insensible; while in the 
 other, either from exercise, the heat of the surrounding temperature, 
 or the action of some agent taken into the system, the perspirable 
 matter is thrown upon the surface faster than it can be evaporated, 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 77 
 
 so that it becomes more or less perceptible, and is therefore said to 
 sensible. The process is all the same however, in both cases, the 
 difference being only in degree. 
 
 The Uses of Perspiration. 
 
 Most prominent among the uses of perspiration may be regarded 
 that of removing from the system worn-out and useless matter and 
 poisonous gases. It has been shown that through the medium 
 of respiration the blood is oxygenized and purged of its excess of 
 carbon and carbonic acid ; but it is probably relieved of a still greater 
 amount of impurities and injurious substances through that of per- 
 spiration. It has been ascertained that the average number of pores 
 in the skin to the square inch is about 2,800, and the number of square 
 inches of surface in a man of ordinary size is 2,500, which would give 
 the whole number of pores of the skin as 7,000,000. We need not be 
 surprised therefore at the fact stated by Sanctorius, and other emi- 
 nent writers on the subject, that from one-half to five-eighths of all 
 that we eat and drink passes off through these pores in the form of 
 perspiration. All physiologists agree that from twenty to forty 
 ounces of matter — thirty ounces being the average — pass off through 
 the skin of a healthy adult every twenty-four hours. A large pro- 
 portion of this perspirable matter is made up of the decayed and 
 waste particles of the body, which have been thrown into the circu- 
 lation by the absorbents, and thence extracted by the sudorific 
 glands. As has been stated elsewhere, the constant wearing out of 
 the material of the various tissues of the body, furnishes a large 
 amount of waste matter, all, or nearly all of which, is eliminated 
 from the blood and the system in this way. 
 
 Besides the waste material of the body, there are often other irri- 
 tating and poisonous substances which can only be removed from 
 the system through the medium of perspiration. I have already 
 explained in the proper place the course which every thing that 
 enters the stomach takes in its passage through the system. Fluids 
 are absorbed, and pass directly into the blood. Solids undergo diges- 
 tion and then pass into the duodenum and intestines, whence all that 
 ekn be reduced to a semi-fluid state, in the form of chyle, is conveyed 
 into the blood through the lacteals and thoracic duct. When poi- 
 sonous substances are taken into the stomach therefore, if not ejected 
 by vomiting, induced either by the poison itself or by something 
 taken for the purpose, or removed by artificial means, they will enter 
 the blood, and with it the general system, in the same way; that is, 
 through the absorbents or the chyle ducts. Solid and liquid poisons 
 usually enter the system in this way, through the mouth and stomach, 
 
78 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 while poisonous vapors, miasmata, and gaseous substances enter 
 through the lungs and pass directly into the blood by absorption, as 
 has been previously explained. It is reasonable to suppose that more 
 or less poison is taken into the system through one or both of these 
 mediums every day. There is probably not a day or a night but we 
 inhale more or less impurities in the air we breathe. In cities, towns, 
 and in many districts of country, especially in warm weather, there 
 are always more or less animal and vegetable effluvia, and poisonous 
 gases afloat in the atmosphere. And it can not be doubted that we 
 often take into our stomachs irritating and poisonous substances along 
 with our food, to say nothing of our medicines. All such injurious 
 agents, after they have once entered the circulation, can only be 
 removed from the system through the grand emunctories of the 
 blood, the perspiratory organs. By this most admirable provision 
 of nature, the fluids are cleansed, and extraneous matter is eliminated 
 from the body, but for which, debility, disease, and a general derange- 
 ment of the living machinery would speedily ensue. 
 
 Another use of the perspiratory process is to regulate and modifj" 
 the temperature of the body. As has been shown, animal heat is 
 generated in the system by a sort of combustion resulting from the 
 union of oxygen and carbon. As this combustion, in the coldest of 
 weather, is sufficient to maintain the heat of the system at about 100 
 degrees, it is evident that if there were not some wise provision for 
 its escape in case of excess, we should be too warm in summer ; indeed 
 we should be too warm at all times, and would soon be consumed 
 with burning fever. A large amount of heat escapes from the body 
 by evaporation, passing out through the pores of the skin along with 
 the perspiration ; indeed this is its natural outlet, and its escape is 
 the more rapid in proportion to its excess, if the perspiratory organs 
 be in a healthy condition. Every one knows how readily we per- 
 spire when the body is heated by exercise ; and in very warm weather 
 we often perspire freely without exercise. Exercise, you know, par- 
 ticularly if it makes us breathe faster, augments the heat of the body, 
 and this renders an increase of perspiration necessaiy. We here see 
 another evidence of the economy and wisdom of nature in employ- 
 ing the perspiratory process for the double purpose of relieving 
 the system of its waste matter and its excess of heat at the same 
 time. 
 
 We may still add as another use of perspiration, and one too of no 
 small consequence — that of moistening the surface of the body. The 
 skin, as well as every other part of the body, requires a certain 
 amount of moisture for the purpose of lubrication, to keep it soft, 
 pliable, and in a healthy condition, and also to protect it against the 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 79 
 
 action of the atmosphere and other external agents, and against the 
 too ready absorption of poisonous substances. 
 
 Importance of Perspiration. 
 
 The perspiratory process is one of immense importance in the liv- 
 ing machine, and can scarcely be over-estimated. There is probably 
 no other single function of the body which holds so great an influ- 
 ence over the health and integrity of the system. If you have read 
 what has been said of its uses, and will but reflect a moment upon 
 the probable consequences that would result in case it should be sus- 
 pended, you can not help but see that it is of the greatest importance. 
 So apparent is this that it seems almost unnecessary for me to say any 
 thing further on the subject. But as I wish to make my remarks as 
 useful and practical as my limited space will allow, I propose to 
 glance for a few moments at some of the consequences of suspended 
 perspiration, in order that you may the better understand and appre- 
 ciate the importance of the function. 
 
 You know something of fever. Perhaps you have felt its scorch- 
 ing influence. Did you ever notice, or think of, the condition which 
 exists in fever? The skin is hot and dry. The whole system seems 
 filled to excess with heat. The heart beats violently, and the blood 
 rushes through the arteries with unwonted rapidity and violence. 
 There is no perspiration ! Did you ever think of that? The prominent 
 condition in fever is suspended perspiration. In fact this is the imme- 
 diate cause of fever. There can be no fever when the pores are 
 open, and the sweat flowing freely: when the perspirator}' organs 
 are in full play, and the skin is in a healthy condition. Suspended 
 perspiration is not the remote cause — not the exciting, first cause of 
 the disease. It may not be even the second, nor the third cause — for 
 there are often several causes, which combine to produce fever; but it 
 is the immediate cause, the actual, real condition which exists in all 
 cases of general fever. In treating a case of fever, one of the first 
 objects of the physician is to produce a free perspiration. If he can 
 do this, and restore a healthy action to the skin, he will have "broke 
 the fever." Jn such cases relaxant and sudorific, or "sweating med- 
 icines," are given. And very often a good emetic of Lobelia and 
 Ipecac will afford immediate relief, because it relaxes the pores of the 
 skin, and excites the sudorific glands, thus inducing perspiration, by 
 which means the confined heat of the body is allowed to escape, and 
 along with it more or less of the accumulated vitiating matter which 
 acts as an exciting cause of the disease. Cleansing the body well 
 with a weak alkali, made by adding a little saleratus, or common ley, 
 to warm water, is often beneficial; because it removes from the 
 
80 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 surface the oily matter which is thrown out by the sebacious glands 
 and which is apt to become tough and hard in case of fever, and 
 obstruct the external openings of the pores. But one of the best 
 means of relief in cases of fever is the Hydropathic treatment, or wet 
 sheet. The cold water absorbs the heat from the surface, relaxes the 
 skin, opens the pores, excites the cutaneous glands, and induces per- 
 spiration, quicker, safer, and better, probably, than any other means 
 known. A few good " packings " in the cold wet sheet, of an hour to 
 an hour and a half each, will often break up the worst case of ordi- 
 nary fever, and simply, too, upon the ground of restoring a healthy 
 action to the perspiratory organs. 
 
 In fever, I have said, the skin is hot and, dry, and there is no per- 
 spiration. Let us now look for a moment into the cause of all this 
 trouble and derangement. One of the principal uses of perspiration 
 -is to eliminate from the body its worn-out and morbid matter and 
 poisonous substances. JSTow let there be a check of perspiration, 
 from any cause whatever, and what will be the consequence? If it 
 is but slight, we may have unpleasant feelings, head-ache, perhaps a 
 cough, or it may be the tooth -ache, or rheumatism, with a dry skin, 
 and more or less feverish symptoms. The obstruction however not 
 being very great, nature may overcome it in a day or two, and 
 restore things to their normal condition. But let the obstruction be 
 complete and continued for some time, and then see what follows! 
 In the first place all the fetid and waste matter is retained in the 
 system, and is distributed by the blood through every part of the 
 body. And this offensive matter is all the while increasing in quan- 
 tity. Soon it begins to act as an irritant and poison. The fluids 
 become vitiated ; the muscular fiber irritated ; then a sort of general 
 inflammation sets in. Add to this the accumulating heat of the body, 
 which is also very much confined, and you can easily see how we 
 may soon have a fever. In such case the suppression of the perspi- 
 ratory process may be the primary or main cause of the disease, for 
 the retained waste matter of the system will soon prove a sufficient 
 proximate or exciting cause, even of the worst kind of putrid and 
 malignant fever. If the suppression be permanent and complete, the 
 disease may assume the type of what is termed continued fever, m 
 which case it is apt to be more or less malignant in its character 
 Should it take the intermittent form, however, there will be seasons of 
 relaxation and perspiration, during which a sufficient amount of the 
 waste matter of the system may be thrown off, along with the perspira- 
 tion, to prevent the disease from assuming a putrescent character. This 
 perspiration — during the intermissions — though it probably relieves 
 the system of much offensive matter, is not a natural, healthy process, 
 
 i 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 81 
 
 but is rather the effect of debility and the relaxation which follows 
 as a consequence after the excitement of the fever. 
 
 But again : In certain districts, and at certain seasons of the year, 
 especially in hot weather, the atmosphere is more or less loaded with 
 malaria, and it may be with other poisonous gases. Suppose the 
 perspiratory process be interrupted or suspended at such times, then 
 all of this noxious matter that is absorbed through the medium of 
 the lungs, will be retained in the system, and the probable conse- 
 quence will be fever and ague. But it may be asked, Do we never 
 have the ague unless the perspiratory function is interrupted ? I pre- 
 sume we do. But the probability is that in a majority of cases at 
 least a suspension of perspiration acts as the immediate cause of 
 anticipating or hastening its development. The pulmonary absorp- 
 tion, or imbibation of gases through the medium of the lungs, is very 
 great ; and there are no doubt times, in highly malarious districts, 
 when the system takes in more of the poison than can be thrown off 
 by the skin, in which case, if the person remain long enough in the 
 infected district, the poison will accumulate and the disease develop 
 itself, in spite of all that nature can do to prevent it. This is more 
 especially true of persons in whom the perspiratory function is 
 feeble, or whose skin is in an unhealthy condition. In such cases, 
 where the system is already charged to excess with the ague poison, 
 a sudden closing of the natural and only process which affords it an 
 outlet — it may be from simpl3 r getting the feet damp, from sitting in 
 a draft of air, exposure to the night air, remaining in a cool, damp 
 room, or any thing that will cause a suppression of the perspiration — 
 may develop the disease immediately. If people would attend pro- 
 perl}' and understandingly to this important function of the system, 
 this great conservator of health, they need seldom have the ague, and 
 might also avoid many other diseases. You hardly ever see a per- 
 son have the ague, or chills and fever, whose perspiratory system is 
 in an active, healthy condition — in other words, who sweats freely. 
 
 But the ague is not the only complaint that may result from 
 checked perspiration. There are many other diseases which are 
 often induced by a suppression of this function — such, for instance, 
 as diarrhea, dysentery, rheumatism, congestion and inflammation of 
 internal organs, consumption, and diseases of the lungs and throat, 
 neuralgia, and the like, according as the predominant tendency to 
 any particular disease or condition may exist in the system at the 
 time. 
 
 The skin should always, if possible, be kept in a healthy condition j 
 and whenever therefore we discover that from any cause whatever 
 its functions have become deranged or suspended, we should lose no 
 6 
 
82 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 time in resorting to the proper means necessary to overcome and 
 remove the obstruction, and bring about a free and healthy action. 
 Persons will sometimes go for several days, or a whole week, with 
 obstructed perspiration, and the attending symptoms of an attack of 
 fever or some other disease, without doing any thing to remove the 
 difficulty. They know from their unpleasant feelings that they are 
 not well, and they see that they do not sweat any, or if any, very 
 little; the skin most of the time is dry and harsh, accompanied per- 
 haps with occasional flashes of heat — until finally they are pros- 
 trated by disease ; whereas, if they had made use of some simple 
 means at the commencement, or during the early stage of the derange- 
 ment, such as the wet sheet, the vapor bath, or a good artificial sweat 
 by means of warm teas, aided in obstinate cases by a Lobelia emetic, 
 they might have saved themselves from a long spell of sickness, and 
 perhaps a heavy Doctor's bill. There is nothing like taking time by 
 the forelock, in such cases. Remember that the poison, whatever it 
 may be, that produces the autumnal fevers and agues of our Western 
 country, comes in at the lungs, and must go out, if it goes out at all, 
 through the pores of the skin. Obstruct this outlet for a little while, 
 and you may have the ague, the intermittent fever, or any other 
 disease, a tendency to which may be prevailing at the time. Keep 
 the emunctories of the skin open and free, and there are ten chances 
 to one that you will escape unharmed. 
 
 BATHING AS A MEANS OF HEALTH. 
 
 We have seen, I trust, how important a relation the function of 
 perspiration holds in the general economy to the health and well- 
 being of the system. Among the means best calculated to promote 
 a healthy condition of this function, that of frequent bathing may be 
 regarded as holding a pre-eminent rank. Cleanliness of body is one 
 of the necessary conditions of health, because it is essential to a 
 healthy condition of the skin, and, consequently, of the whole perspi- 
 ratory apparatus. Daily bathing, of some sort or other, is to be 
 recommended at all seasons, but it should be rigidly observed during 
 warm weather. The water to be used for this purpose may be warm, 
 cold, or tepid, according to the time, or as the individual may prefer. 
 But as a general rule, the morning bath should always be cold, or 
 cool ; while the warm or tepid bath is to be preferred at night — except 
 in extreme hot weather, when either may be used. 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 83 
 
 The Sponge Bath : In all ordinary cases, the sponge bath may be 
 recommended, on account of its simplicity, and of its being easily 
 obtained at almost all times and places. It consists simply in wash- 
 ing the body all over, by means of a sponge, or cloth, or it may be 
 done with the hands alone, and then wiping dry and rubbing the 
 surface well with a towel. Friction upon the skin is an essential 
 part of the process, and should be used freely and thoroughly, both 
 during the washing and afterward, in drying the surface. It is 
 necessary also that the person immediately after dressing should take 
 free exercise in the open air for a short time, where the circumstances 
 will in any way allow of it. None but very great invalids should be 
 allowed to retire to bed immediately after bathing. The exercise 
 may be taken either in the room, or out of doors, when the weather 
 is favorable, as maybe most suitable to the condition of the person. 
 
 Cold ablutions of this kind are suitable for all persons and consti- 
 tutions. They may be used by women, children, persons of old age, 
 and those of feeble health and constitutions. They exert a stimu- 
 lating and strengthening influence upon the system, give tone and 
 energy to the skin and perspiratory organs, promote the secretions 
 and excretions, tend to equalize the circulation of the blood, and to 
 relieve local congestions. Many a feeble constitution has been made 
 comparatively healthy and robust by persevering in their use. They 
 naturally have also a happy and beneficial effect upon the mind and 
 intellect. 
 
 In cold weather, the room in which the bathing is performed may 
 be slightly warmed for sickly and debilitated persons, in order to 
 prevent the danger of their taking cold ; but for persons in good 
 health, or sufficiently so for them to get through the operation 
 quickly, and take exercise immediately afterward, this should not be 
 done. As a general thing, a cold room is to be preferred to a warm 
 one. in all cases where the person goes immediately from the room 
 into the open air. 
 
 The Shower Bath : When convenient, the shower bath is an 
 admirable thing — to be followed of course with proper friction and 
 exercise. The morning is probably the best time to take it. In 
 order to take this bath properly, it is necessary to have a box or 
 apparatus constructed expressly for the purpose. Most of my 
 readers probably will know how such an apparatus should be made. 
 It is sufficient to say here that it consists, essentially, of an arrange- 
 ment by which the water is allowed to fall upon the body in many 
 small streams at the same time, and the greater the surface upon 
 which they fall, the better. Usually these baths are so constructed 
 that the streams fall perpendicularly, and strike upon the head and 
 
84 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 shoulders only. But sometimes they tire so arranged, by means of 
 leaden j^ipes, coiled around the inside of the box, somewhat like the 
 worm of a still, which are perforated with small holes, through which 
 the water jets out horizontally and strikes the body on all sides, at 
 the same time that it falls upon the head and shoulders from above. 
 This arrangement, of course, is the more complete ; but the usual 
 plan is amply sufficient for ordinary purposes. The box should be 
 large enough to permit the person to stand erect in it, and still allow 
 the water to fall one or two feet upon the head. At the top of the 
 box may be placed a large tin basin or vessel, the bottom of which is 
 perforated with small holes. Into this the w T ater may be poured 
 from a bucket by an assistant, or it may be conducted into it from a 
 reservoir above. The bath consists emphatically of what its name 
 indicates — a shower; any way to produce this will answer. Where 
 there are no better means at hand, an assistant may stand upon a 
 chair, or in some elevated position, and pour the water upon the 
 bather from a common watering-pot, which will answer as a very 
 good substitute for a more perfect machine. 
 
 The benefit of the shower bath consists mainly in the general shock* 
 and consequent reaction, which it produces upon the nervous system, 
 and the organs of the skin, whereby they are aroused to increased 
 action, the functions of secretion and excretion promoted, and the 
 whole economy more or less benefited. In order to derive the full 
 benefits of the bath, the w T ater must be cold. From a half minute, to 
 one or two minutes, according to the size and force of the streams, is 
 long enough to remain under the shower. Children and feeble per- 
 sons should be accustomed to the cold w r ater of these baths by first 
 using tepid or but slightly cool water, gradually changing to colder, 
 until they are able to stand it at the lowest temperature. The shower 
 bath apparatus may be recommended as an excellent thing in a fam- 
 ily. It is not only a great preserver of health, but it is valuable as 
 an auxiliary in the treatment of many diseases. 
 
 The Full Bath : This consists in immersing the whole body in 
 water. For this purpose a tub, vat, or bathing trough is necessary, 
 which should be large enough to take in the whole person and be 
 sufficiently roomy to admit of freedom of motion. The water may 
 be warm, tepid, or cold, according to circumstances. At night, it 
 should be warm or tepid ; and the person may remain in the bath 
 half an hour. 
 
 If cold water is used, it is necessary to prepare the system for it 
 before entering the bath, by first washing the head and neck with 
 cold water, and then the shoulders and chest. This indeed, is proper 
 in all cases of bathing in cold water. It will prevent too great a rush 
 
THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 85 
 
 of blood to the head, and to important internal organs, when the 
 water comes in contact with the whole surface of the body. 
 
 The length of time that a person should remain in a cold full-bath 
 is but short. The sudden contact of cold with the surface drives the 
 blood from the capillaries of the skin into the larger bloodvessels, 
 and if continued too long it will necessarily concentrate upon internal 
 organs, and may produce injurious consequences. The time may 
 vary, according to the coldness of the water and the condition of the 
 person. From half a minute to one or two minutes will be long 
 enough. A minute may be regarded as the average time, and if the 
 water is very cold, half a minute will do. During the bath the per- 
 son should also exercise his limbs as much as he can, and rub him- 
 self with his hand or a bathing brush, or have an assistant to do it 
 for him. As soon as he leaves the bath he should quickly dry the 
 whole body, and then make use of severe friction with a coarse towel 
 or brush, to promote a reaction. It is best for him, when he can, to 
 perform the rubbing himself, as it gives the whole body exercise. 
 After dressing, the next thing is exercise in the open air, whenever 
 the circumstances will allow of it. 
 
 The cold full bath is beneficial in all cases where an increased reac- 
 tion is necessary ; where the warmth of the body is unequal and 
 needs to be equalized ; where the organs of secretion are to be invig- 
 orated ; where the circulation of the blood should be determined to 
 the surface for the elimination of morbid matter from the system ; 
 and where the skin is in a feeble or unhealthy condition. It is to be 
 avoided however in all congestions and inflammations of important 
 internal organs, in all diseases of the chest, in affections of the brain, 
 and where there is a tendency of blood to the head, in persons of 
 plethoric habits, and where a violent excitement or shock would be 
 likely to prove injurious. In all such cases the warm or tepid bath 
 may be used, not only with safety, but often with great advantage. 
 
 Besides these there are several other kinds of baths, principally 
 local in their character, as the head bath, foot bath, sitz bath, and the 
 like, all of which are highly useful under certain circumstances. But 
 as my remarks are intended to show the uses and beneficial effects of 
 frequent ablutions and bathings, to explain the general principle upon 
 which they act, and to urge upon the attention of the reader their 
 necessity and importance, it is not necessary that I should enter into 
 a detailed or special account of the various kinds of baths. The 
 three which I have noticed will include the rest. They all act more 
 or less upon the same principle ; and when used as a remedial agent 
 in the treatment of disease, if the affection be local in its character, 
 the application of the water should also be local, and vice versa, if the 
 
86 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 
 
 disease be general, then should the bathing be general also. For a 
 more extended treatise on bathing and the use of water, as a reme- 
 dial agent, the reader is referred to some good work on Hydropathy 
 and the Water cure Treatment, where he w T ill find a fall description 
 of the different kinds of baths and water applications, with special 
 directions how and w T hen to use them in treating the various diseases. 
 
 But in all cases of cold bathing, let it ever be borne in mind that 
 the first and most important thing is to secure what is called A good 
 reaction. This condition will be manifested by an increased cheer- 
 fulness, and by a gentle glow upon the surface of the body. To 
 secure this, the water must be cold, the operation performed briskly, 
 and the friction more or less vigorous, as the case may require. When 
 the cold water first comes in contact with the skin, it usually causes 
 the blood to retreat from the capillaries toward the center of the 
 body. Eut this should only be temporary. The blood should return 
 again quickly to the surface, and should bring along with it an 
 increase of circulatory and nervous activity. 
 
 Should the cold bath, after all proper efforts, be followed by pale- 
 ness of the skin, dullness and inactivity of both body and mind, with 
 more or less chilliness, it is not likely to be useful, and should, for the 
 time, be abandoned. In such cases — which are rare — it will be best 
 to use tepid water, then that which is slight!}' cool, gradually lower- 
 ing the temperature, until, in the course of a few weeks at most, the 
 constitution may be so improved, that the coldest water can be used, 
 followed by the desired reaction. 
 
 Finally, in order to derive the full benefit from bathing of any 
 kind, and often any benefit at all, it is necessary to observe some 
 system in the matter. Some people seem to think they can bathe 
 indiscriminately in w T arm or cold water, and at any time of day that 
 is most convenient. This plan, or rather want of plan, will not do. 
 To many, such a course will be productive of more harm than good. 
 For most persons, perhaps, immediately after rising in the morning 
 is the best time, or as good as any, to take a cold sponge or show T er 
 bath. But there are some, particularly females, whose constitutions 
 and general health are too feeble to allow of this. In the morning 
 the system is in a languid and less active condition, and is not so 
 well able to produce a good reaction. Persons therefore of delicate 
 constitutions or feeble health, would do better to defer the operation 
 till the middle of the forenoon, when the system is usually in its best 
 and most active condition. A great change for the better has often 
 been found by adopting this plan. Bathing, like every thing else 
 pertaining to the human system, is subject to certain laws, and it is 
 our business and our duty to find out those laws, and then obey them. 
 
INDEX 
 
 ANATOMY. 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Divisions of the Human Body. 8 
 
 The Osseous, or Bony System 8 
 
 Bones of the Head— of the Trunk 10 
 
 " " Upper and Lower Extremities 13 
 
 The Teeth 14 
 
 Cartilages — Ligaments — Membranes 14, 15 
 
 The Muscular System 15, 19 
 
 Names and Uses of the Muscles 20 
 
 The Circulatory System 24 
 
 The Heart — Arteries— Veins 24, 28 
 
 The Respiratory System 30 
 
 The Lungs — Trachea — Diaphragm 31, 32 
 
 The Digestive System 33 
 
 The Stomach — Duodenum — Intestines 34, 36 
 
 The Glandular System. 37 
 
 The Liver — Kidneys — Spleen — Pancreas 38. 40 
 
 The Absorbents, and Thoracic Duct 40, 41 
 
 The Nervous System 41 
 
 The Brain — Spinal Cord — Nerves 41, 44 
 
 Nerves of the Brain — of the Spine 45, 46 
 
 PHYSIOLOGY. 
 
 Waste and Supply op the Body 47 
 
 Nutrition 49 
 
 The Blood, Description of. 50 
 
 Circulation of the Blood 50, 54 
 
 Digestion 55 
 
 Chymification 56 
 
 Chylification 57 
 
 Absorption of the Chyle 57 
 
 87 
 
88 INDEX. 
 
 Additional Observations on Digestion 58 
 
 On Drinking at Meals 69 
 
 On the Quantity of Food 60 
 
 On Eating between Meals 62 
 
 On Regularity in Eating , 63 
 
 On Eating too Fast 64 
 
 Respiration * 65 
 
 Necessity of Respiration 66 
 
 Mechanical Act of Breathing 67 
 
 Changes of the Blood and Air 68 
 
 Importance of Ventilation 69 
 
 Animal Heat 70 
 
 Absorption..... 73 
 
 Perspiration ." 75 
 
 The Skin 75 
 
 The Source of Perspiration 76 
 
 The Uses of Perspiration 77 
 
 Importance of Perspiration 79 
 
 Bathing, as a Means of Health < 82 
 
 The Sponge, or Hand Bath 83 
 
 The Shower Bath 83 
 
 The Full Bath 84 
 
 General Remarks on Bathing 4 85 
 
 ANATOMICAL PLATES. 
 
 Skeleton — Front View 11 
 
 Back View 12 
 
 Muscles — Front View 21 
 
 Back View.... 22 
 
 View of the Heart 25 
 
 Arterial System 27 
 
 Venous System 29 
 
 Lungs and Trachea 31 
 
 Organs of the Chest and Abdomen #y 35 
 
 Circulation of the Blood , 53 
 
"Additional Diseases 
 described and treated 
 
 By J. H. JORDAN, M. D. 
 
 PHYSICIAN TO THE CINCINNATI CHOLERA HOSPITAL IN 1849." 
 
\ 
 
 SUPPLEMENT 
 
 APOPLEXY. 
 
 Apoplexy is a disease characterized by a sudden loss of feeling, 
 consciousness, and the power of voluntary motion. Its immediate 
 cause is internal pressure upon the brain, from congestion or effusion. 
 It is most usually produced by a rush of blood to the head. It gener- 
 ally attacks elderly or middle aged persons, and seldom occurs in 
 early life. 
 
 Symptoms : The disease is sometimes preceded by certain premon- 
 itory symptoms, such as fullness and weight in the head, dimness of 
 sight, roaring in the ears, confusion of ideas, numbness in some por- 
 tion of the body, and other evidences of slight partial palsy. But 
 cases sometimes occur without any warning, even in the midst of 
 apparent good health. 
 
 When a person is attacked he suddenly falls, losing for the time 
 his sight, hearing, feeling, and power of motion — while the action of 
 the heart and lungs still continue. The veins of the face and neck 
 become turgid with blood, the arteries throb, pulse full, strong, and 
 slow; the breathing is also slow, and the power of swallowing much 
 impaired or entirely lost. This condition may continue for a few 
 minutes only, or for several hours; when, if not fatal, it slowly yields 
 to the power of nature, or the effect of remedies. The patient may 
 entirely recover from all bad effects of the disease, but it is very 
 often the case that partial palsy will remain for a long time, and it 
 may be permanent. The mind also is often more or less permanently 
 injured. Inflammation of the brain may also result as a consequence. 
 
 Persons usually recover from the first attack, and may from the 
 second ; but the third, of the severe form, generally proves fatal. 
 Profound coma or stupor, small quivering pulse, cold extremities, a 
 cold sweat on the skin, with increasing intervals between breathing, 
 are to be regarded as fatal symptoms. 
 
 Causes: In some persons there is a hereditary predisposition to 
 apoplexy. It is also said that persons with a certain formation of 
 50 (787) 
 
788 APOPLEXY. 
 
 body, as a full, plethoric habit, low stature, broad shoulders, and 
 short, thick neck, are predisposed to the disease. It occurs, however, 
 in persons of an opposite formation of body. 
 
 A predisposition to the disease is also acquired by certain habits 
 of life, such as high living, habitual intoxication, sedentary pursuits, 
 great indulgence in sleep, and long continued mental exertion. 
 
 Among the exciting causes may be named, distension of the stom- 
 ach by a full meal, immoderate use of ardent spirits, violent exercise, 
 severe fits of coughing, stooping and blowing the fire, and violent 
 passion. 
 
 Treatment. — The first thing to be done in a case of apoplexy is 
 to equalize the circulation, and thus withdraw the pressure of blood, 
 from the brain ; and then take measures to prevent a determination 
 of it to that organ again. 
 
 Prompt and energetic means are to be employed. Place the patient 
 in an easy position, with the head elevated; remove every thing from 
 the neck that might prevent the free return of blood from the head. 
 Apply cold water freely to the head and face, and as soon as possible 
 place the feet and legs in hot water. Strip the patient, and rub the 
 feet and legs, gradually extending the rubbing up over the body and 
 arms, applying warm water, to which has been added some Cayenne 
 or powdered mustard. This will produce a warmth in the extrem- 
 ities and a free action in the capillary vessels, which will invite the 
 blood to those parts and withdraw it from the brain. 
 
 At the same time, if convenient, and the attack seems to be a severe 
 one, preparations should be made to put the patient in a warm bath/ 
 large enough to contain the whole body as high as the arms or should- 
 ers; and if the first process does not succeed in restoring conscious- 
 ness in half an hour, he should be placed in this for another half 
 hour, or until relief is obtained, be it long or short. Keep the head 
 cool all the while. 
 
 As soon as the patient has been restored to consciousness and 
 relieved of urgent symptoms, he should £>e placed in bed, with the 
 head and shoulders somewhat elevated, and hot bricks or rocks 
 placed about his legs and body; and as soon as he can swallow, 
 a brisk, active purgative should be given. For this purpose there is 
 nothing better than the Anti-bilious Physic (see Table of Family Med- 
 icines), or two parts of pulverized Senna and one of Jalap. Take of 
 this compound a heaping teaspoonful, and as much Cream of Tartar, 
 mix in a little warm water, and give at one dose. It will be well to 
 add a little Cayenne to make it act quicker. If it does not operate 
 in an hour, repeat the dose ; and as the bowels are generally consti- 
 pated in this disease, it would be well to aid the operation by giving 
 
PALSY — PAEALYSIS. 789 
 
 an injection composed of a spoonful of the same physic in a pint of 
 warm water, a large spoonful or two of melted lard or sweet oil, and 
 a little salt or Cayenne. 
 
 A large mustard plaster should be applied over the region of the 
 stomach. It will have a tendency to prevent inflammation of the 
 brain. 
 
 Diaphoretic or sweating medicines should also be given, such as a 
 tea of the Composition Powder, pennyroyal, catnip, and the like. 
 There is no better way to equalize the circulation than to produce a 
 free and general circulation. 
 
 Do not bleed. The lancet never cured a case of apoplexy. It may 
 afford temporary relief, but it will oftener hasten a fatal termination. 
 Give no opium ; it will but aggravate the disease. During convales- 
 cence the purgatives should be repeated every few days, for a week 
 or two. 
 
 After recovery be careful in the diet and habits. Avoid strong, 
 high seasoned victuals, wines and liquors of all kinds. Use mainly 
 a spare vegetable diet. Make use of frequent bathings with friction, 
 and moderate exercise in the open air. Keep the feet warm. Avoid 
 fatigue of both body and mind, and in all things observe strict tem- 
 perance. 
 
 PALSY— PARALYSIS. 
 
 Palsy has its seat in the nervous system, and is characterized by 
 a loss of the power of motion or of feeling in the part affected, and 
 sometimes both. The most usual form of palsy is that where one 
 side of the body is affected. It sometimes seizes the lower extrem- 
 ities, or all below the hips. In the former case it is called hemiplegia; 
 in the latter, paraplegia. When confined to a particular limb, or set 
 of muscles, it is called paralysis, or partial palsy. 
 
 Symptoms : The symptoms of palsy are generally palpable enough, 
 and not easily mistaken. It is apt to come on very suddenly, with 
 an immediate loss of sensibility and the power of voluntary motion 
 in the part affected. Sometimes, however, it is preceded by a numb- 
 ness or coldness, and perhaps slight convulsive twitchings, and other 
 symptoms similar to those which precede apoplexy. 
 
 Sometimes the disease will go off spontaneously, with a diarrhea, 
 or fever. A feeling of returning warmth, and slight pricking pain 
 in the part, with returning sensation and power of motion, may be 
 regarded as favorable symptoms. 
 
790 PALSY — PAKALYSIS. 
 
 Causes : Palsy may be occasioned by any thing that prevents the 
 flow of the nervous fluid from the brain into the organs of motion, as 
 tumors pressing on the spinal cord, or nerve ; pressure from dislo- 
 cations and fractures of bones; by disease or wounds of the nerves. 
 The long continued exposure to the influence of certain sedative 
 agents; as the handling of white lead, exposure to the fumes of metals 
 and minerals will also produce paralysis. It is also symptomatic of 
 other diseases, as worms, scrofula, syphilis, apoplexy, or may follow 
 them as a result. 
 
 Treatment. — It is not often that we can do much for the hemi- 
 plegic or paraplegic form of the disease, if it is of long standing, 
 especially where both motion and sensation are gone. Yet in the 
 early stage it may often be cured by proper treatment. 
 
 At the commencement, if the attack has been sudden and violent, 
 pursue the same course as directed in apoplexy. 
 
 There will probably be spasmodic symptoms, violent twitching or 
 contortions of the muscles, perhaps of the face. For this, and to 
 allay spasms and pain, give the following : Sulphuric ether and tinc- 
 ture Lobelia, of each one ounce; tincture Cayenne and Laudanum, of- 
 each half an ounce; mix, and give a teaspoonful every ten to thirty 
 minutes, until the spasms subside. The back and spine should be 
 well bathed and rubbed with stimulating liniment, or Cayenne and 
 vinegar, and the same should be applied to the parts affected, using 
 brisk friction with the hand. As soon as urgent symptoms are 
 allayed, other treatment must be employed. 
 
 1st. Evacuate the bowels. It will generally be necessary to make 
 use of injections, for the bowels are usually much constipated, and 
 sometimes the lower portion of the body is so paralyzed or torpid 
 that purgatives will not act upon the bowels. And then, too, it is 
 not best to wait for a purgative to act, for it may be that the consti- 
 pation of the bowels is the principal cause of the difficulty. A dose 
 of some active purgative may be given, and the Anti-bilious Physic, 
 or Senna and Salts, and then give the following by injection : Pulver- 
 ized Lobelia and Cayenne, of each a teaspoonful ; a tablespoonful of 
 common salt, a gill of lard, or castor or sweet oil, and a pint of boil- 
 ing water. As soon as cool enough, give half of it, by means of a 
 large syringe, and the balance after the first has passed away. This 
 will excite an action in the bowels and induce evacuation, if any 
 thing will. 
 
 2d. Purgatives must be given every two or three days, such as the 
 Anti-bilious Physic, or pills made of the extract of Mandrake and 
 Cayenne; or the Podophyllin and LeptandHn may be used. These last 
 two are concentrated preparations, the first made from the Mand- 
 
ST. VITUS' DANCE — CHOEEA. 791 
 
 rake or Mayapple root (Podophyllum), and the other from the "In- 
 dian Physic," or Black Boot (Leptandria), and may be found in most 
 of the drug stores. From one to three grains of each, combined, will 
 be a dose for a grown person. They are both valuable remedies, in 
 man}' diseases. 
 
 3d. The patient should also take the following nervous pills: Ex- 
 tract Hyosciamus, 40 grains; extract Aconite, 20 grains; Macrotin, 20 
 grains; make into 20 pills, and let him take one every night and 
 morning. The Macrotin is also one of the new concentrated rem- 
 edies, made from the Battle Boot or Black Cohosh (Macrotys), and 
 may always be found along with the Podophyllin and Leptandrin, 
 or may be had of any Eclectic physician. 
 
 4th. Some good tonic bitters are also advisable, such as the follow- 
 ing : Take the roots of the Indian hemp, called also Bitter Boot, Milk- 
 weed (Apocynum canabinum), and Prickly-ash bark — a handful of 
 each ; bruise, and add a pint of boiling water. When cold, put all 
 into a jug or bottle, and add a pint of good whisky, and an ounce of 
 carhonate of iron. Take half a wine-glassful of this three times a 
 day. A handful of the Ladyslipper root would be a good addition. 
 The Indian hemp alone is an excellent remedy in all paralytic affec- 
 tions. An infusion made of an herb called Fever Few, to be drank 
 freely, cold, is also a valuable remedy in this disease, as well as in 
 St. Vitus 1 Dance, and such like nervous affections. 
 
 The extremities and parts affected, should be sponged once or 
 twice a day with cold water saturated with salt, and rubbed well. 
 Attend well to the skin and general system. Any slight attack of 
 palsy will yield readily to the foregoing treatment, unless the patient 
 be verv old and feeble. 
 
 ST. VITUS' DANCE— CHOREA. 
 
 This affection also has its seat in the nervous system, and consists 
 in convulsive and involuntaiy motions of one or more of the limbs. 
 It sometimes, also, affects one side of the face. 
 
 The complaint is chiefly incident to young persons, occurring 
 generally between the ages of seven and twenty-one. Girls are 
 more subject to it than boys. 
 
 Symptoms : Chorea seldom comes on suddenly. It is generally pre- 
 ceded by symptoms, varying in duration from a few da}'8 to severai 
 months — such as coldness of the feet and limbs, a tingling sensation 
 
792 ST. VITUS' DANCE — CHOEEA. 
 
 in the parts likely to be affected, heaviness in the extremities, 
 fullness in the head, obstinate constipation of the bowels, difficulty 
 of swallowing, a disposition to gloom, or excessive cheerfulness, and 
 sometimes a remarkable proneness to mischievous conduct. 
 
 After a while, irregular muscular twitchings, or spasmodic con- 
 tractions, are observed in the face, or in one of the extremities. One 
 of the legs will be affected with a kind of lameness, and the patient 
 drags it in an odd and ridiculous manner. Or he can not hold his 
 arm still, but is constantly throwing it about. When he undertakes 
 to carry food or drink to his mouth he makes numerous singular 
 gesticulations, perhaps, before he can accomplish it. The head some- 
 times partakes of the same convulsive action. 
 
 In severer cases the patient seems to have lost nearly all com- 
 mand over the voluntary muscles. When he attempts to walk he 
 usually hobbles along in an irregular manner. Sometimes he can 
 neither walk, stand, nor sit still. The hands and arms are often in 
 continual motion, jerking and flying about in every direction ; and 
 the muscular contractions of the face sometimes are extremely severe 
 and ludicrous, giving a continually varying expression to the counte- 
 nance. 
 
 In violent cases, swallowing is sometimes much impeded, the respi- 
 ration anxious and irregular, the voice altered, and the power of 
 speech very imperfect. In fine, the muscular system seems to be in 
 a state of revolt, bidding defiance to the authority and commands of 
 the will. It is truly a singular affection ! 
 
 Causes: This disease may be occasioned by various irritating 
 causes, such as teething, worms, acrid matter in the bowels, repulsion, 
 or driving in of chronic eruptions, as the itch, or drying up of scald- 
 head. It also, and perhaps more frequently, arises from violent 
 affections of the mind, as horror, fright, fear, anger, disappointed 
 love, and religious enthusiasm. Suppression of habitual discharges, 
 especially the menses, may produce it, and in many cases it arises 
 from debility and extreme irritability of the nervous system. It is 
 also said to take place from sympathy, at seeing others affected by 
 the disease. 
 
 Chorea, or St. Vitus' Dance, is not a very dangerous disease, as it 
 seldom proves fatal. It is not, however, entirely free from danger, 
 as, if continued long, it may run into Epilepsy, and in this way prove 
 fatal, or render the patient miserable for life. It is also apt to injure 
 the mind, if protracted a great while. 
 
 Treatment : The indications of cure are, first remove the exciting 
 cause, and then strengthen the nervous system. 
 
 Very often the stomach is in a deranged and irritable state. In 
 
ST. TITUS' DAXCE — CHOREA. 793 
 
 such cases give an emetic. It should be composed of equal parts of 
 Lobelia and Ipecac, given with some warm teas. 
 
 In a few hours after this give a purgative, which should be repeated 
 once in three or four days. Half a teaspoonful of Beache's Anti- 
 bilious physic, with one grain of Podophyllin, will do for a dose. 
 Repeat in six hours if it does not operate. When the subject is a 
 young girl about the age of puberty, or you have reason to suspect 
 that the develojnnent of the catamenia is concerned, the Podophyl- 
 lin, or May apple root, in some form, should constitute the principal 
 part of the purgative; and it might be repeated every other day, for 
 a few times. Other means should be used calculated to aid in bring- 
 ing on the catamenial discharge — such as frequent bathing the feet 
 and legs in warm water, sitting over the steam from bitter herbs, 
 drinking warm, diaphoretic and emmenagogue teas, as Composition, 
 pennyroyal, or ginger. A decoction made from the root of the Ver- 
 viae, is also valuable in all cases of suppressed or retained menses. 
 
 As a nervine and specific in St. Vitus' Dance, perhaps the Scull- 
 cap (Scutelaria Lateriafiord) is the best. It is an herb that can gener- 
 ally be got at Botanic drug stores. An infusion or tea is to be made 
 of this, of which let the patient drink from a half to a pint daily. 
 It may be drank warm or cold. If you add a portion of the Lady- 
 slipper root, it will be all the better. 
 
 There is also another herb, called Fever Few, which is valuable in 
 this affection. I have known cases where it alone has effected a cure 
 in the course of a week or two. An infusion or tea is to be made of 
 it, and taken same as the other. 
 
 Where the disease seems to be owing to debility of the nervous 
 system, some restorative bitters should be used, such as the follow- 
 ing : Take of Comfrey root one ounce, Spikenard root one ounce. 
 Columbo and G-entian roots, of each half an ounce, Chamomile flowers, 
 half an ounce. Bruise the roots, if not already powdered, and cover 
 the whole with a pint of boiling water. When cold, put all in a 
 bottle and add a quart of Madeira, or Malaga wine. Add to this an 
 ounce of red oxide, or carbonate of iron. Half a wine-glass to be 
 taken three or four times a day. 
 
 If the case is a very bad one, the following pills should also be 
 taken: Take extract of Hyosciamus, forty grains ; Gum Camphor, 
 forty grains: Musk, twenty grains; make into twenty pills, and give 
 one night and morning. 
 
 The sponge bath, of cold water and salt, should also be employed, 
 with plenty of friction. Also an occasional warm bath, at night. 
 
794 EPILEPSY — FALLING SICKNESS. 
 
 EPILEPSY— FALLING SICKNESS. 
 
 Epilepsy is a disease characterized by paroxysmal attacks of con- 
 vulsions, with temporary loss of sensibility and consciousness, fol- 
 lowed usually with coma, or stupor. It is one of the most distressing 
 diseases to which humanity is subject. 
 
 The disease comes on in sudden paroxysms or fits, which continue 
 for a few minutes or half an hour, then leave the patient in his usual 
 state, except that he is more or less debilitated and drowsy. The 
 disease is most common among children and young persons, and 
 boys seem to be more subject to it than girls. Its attacks are gener- 
 ally periodical, often monthly, or every new or full moon. Some- 
 times it occurs much more frequently, and again not so often as once a 
 month. 
 
 The disease is often hereditary, several persons in the same family 
 being subject to it, extending down through several generations. 
 
 Symptoms: The attack usually comes on suddenly, and the patient 
 falls to the ground — hence the name of falling sickness. "Where the 
 disease has become seated and habitual, the patient sometimes ex- 
 periences certain warnings of the attack, such as giddiness, dimness 
 of sight, confusion of mind, loud ringing in the ears, sparks and 
 flashes before the eyes, trembling in the limbs, anxiety, drowsiness, 
 starting during sleep, sullen gloominess, irritable temper, revery; 
 some grow timid and cowardly, others spiteful, quarrelsome, or mis- 
 chievous. But these premonitory symptoms usually last but a short 
 time, seldom more than a few seconds. 
 
 Some persons are warned of an attack by seeing spectres just 
 before it comes on. Others experience what is called aura epilep- 
 tica — a certain peculiar sensation which I believe occurs in no other 
 disease. It is a feeling of chilliness which commences in the feet, or 
 legs, and extends gradually up until it reaches the head, when the 
 patient suddenly becomes insensible and falls, or has the fit. In 
 many instances epilepsy occurs invariably at night, during sleep. 
 
 When the patient is attacked he immediately becomes insensible, 
 and more or less violently convulsed. The eyes roll about ; the lips, 
 eye-lids and muscles of the face are greatly distorted and convulsed; 
 the patient gnashes his teeth, and foams at the mouth; sometimes the 
 teeth are firmly pressed together, and the jaws fixed. 
 
 The face is sometimes pale, but more commonly of a livid, purple 
 color, with a congested state of the veins of the head and neck. 
 
 Sooner or later these spasmodic symptoms abate, generally 
 
EPILEPSY — FALLING SICKNESS. 795 
 
 gradually, and on coming to himself, the patient feels languid and 
 exhausted, and retains not the smallest recollection of what has 
 passed during the fit. 
 
 Causes : In some persons a hereditary predisposition to the dis- 
 ease exists. ".Repeated attacks render the patient still more liable to 
 subsequent attacks. It often comes on about the period of puberty, 
 owing no doubt to the important changes which take place in the 
 system at that time. 
 
 In some cases the disease is what is called idiopathic, that is, owing 
 to malformations of the skull, depressed bones, or a spongy growth 
 upon the internal surface of the cranium ; organic derangement of 
 the brain ; congestion or effusion of blood upon the brain. 
 
 In others it is symptomatic, owing to intestinal irritation, as from 
 worms, and other causes ; teething ; suppression or retention of the 
 catamenia; poisons received into the system. Onanism, or mastur- 
 bation, is also a fruitful cause of the disease. 
 
 Where a predisposition to the disease exists, an attack may be 
 brought on by violent affections of the mind, or of the nervous sys- 
 tem ; as sudden fright; fits of passion, and the like. Blows, wounds, 
 fractures and injuries of the head may also cause the disease. 
 
 Treatment. Very little can, or need be done, during the par- 
 oxysm, or while the fit is on, except to prevent the patient as far as 
 possible from injuring himself. Every thing should be removed 
 from about the neck. 
 
 A great many remedies have, from time to time, been proposed for 
 this disease, and relied on for a time as specifics ; but the truth is 
 they sometimes all fail. Where the disease is dependent on malfor- 
 mations of the skull, or organic derangement of the brain, it is very 
 seldom cured, especially if the patient be past the age of puberty. 
 
 Where the disease is but symptomatic, depending upon some other 
 derangement in the system, and not directly connected with the 
 brain, it can generally be cured, by removing the cause, and proper 
 attention afterward to the general system. 
 
 A general course of treatment, with particular reference also to the 
 cause of the complaint where it can be known, will be the most 
 judicious. 
 
 1st. An occasional cathartic or purgative will be proper under any 
 circumstance. And there is none better than the Podophyllum or 
 May-apple, in some form or other. It is an excellent anthelmintic, or 
 worm medicine, as well as a good emmenagoguc; and is also good in 
 all congestions and effusions on the brain, whether of blood or 
 serum. The bowels are to be kept loose, and for this purpose the 
 powdered roots of the May-apple and Milkweed (Apocynum) may 
 
796 EPILEPSY — FALLING SICKNESS. 
 
 be given together ; or they may be reduced to extracts and formed 
 into pills, giving two or three a day, or enough to keep the bowels 
 open ; or pills may be made of extract Hyosciamus and Podophyllin, 
 and given in the same way; two grains of the former and one of the 
 latter to a pill, one or two taken daily. 
 
 2d. An emetic, composed mainly of Lobelia, should be given at least 
 once a week. The stomach is generally more or less deranged in 
 this disease, either primarily or secondarily; besides, emetics stimu- 
 late the liver, pancreas, brain, and whole nervous system, and pro- 
 mote a healthy action in the skin. 
 
 3d. Anti-spasmodics are indispensable. Such as are both anti- 
 spasmodic and narcotic are preferable. The Scullcap, Macrotys, 
 Strammonium, Hyosciamus, are all good. The Mistletoe has also 
 been celebrated in this disease. 
 
 A decoction made of the Scullcap and Macrotys (Battle root), of 
 each two parts, and one part of the Mistletoe (when it can be had), 
 to be drank two or three times a day, or half a pint in twenty-four 
 hours. This should be continued for several weeks. 
 
 Also : Take of the tinctures of Strammonium and Hyosciamus 
 equal parts, mix, and give from ten to thirty drops three times a day. 
 Commence with ten drops, and increase one droj) each dose till you 
 reach thirty, or till a slight dizziness is produced, if it takes forty or 
 fifty drops, and then continue at that. 
 
 4th. Tonics: Great benefit is to be derived in many cases from the 
 use of tonics. There is generally weakness and debility of the whole 
 system, and then the disease also sometimes assumes the form of 
 masked or dumb ague. In such cases tonics are indispensable. For 
 this purpose Quinine may be used, made into pills with extract 
 Hyosciamus. Let there be from one to two grains of Quinine to the 
 pill, and give from three to six a day. 
 
 Or a tonic and anti-spasmodic bitters may be used, such as Peru- 
 vian bark, Columbo, Yirginia snake-root, Eattle root (*Macroty's), 
 and Lady-slipper root, equal parts of each, in spirits, or wine. This 
 is an excellent preparation, and may be used freely. 
 
 JSTitrate of silver is a remedy highly recommended by many, and 
 no doubt will often effect a cure. If continued a great while, it is 
 apt to show itself on the skin of the face and hands, turning it a 
 blue-black, or dark metalic color. It is given in doses of one-eighth 
 to one-fourth of a grain, three times a day — usually in the form of a 
 pill, mixed with extract Hyosciamus : Or in the following recipe : 
 Take Nitrate of silver, 10 grains ; Musk, 40 grains; Gum Camphor, 
 1 drachm ; Ext. Hyosciamus, 2 drachms ; make into 80 pills, and 
 give one night and morning. 
 
CATALEPSY. 797 
 
 I will name another remedy, which is very simple, you will think, 
 but which has been very highly spoken of in some parts of France. 
 It is this : As soon as a person is taken with a fit of epilepsy, or as 
 soon after as you can. cover the face with a black silk handkerchief, 
 tying it about the head and neck, so as to cover the entire face, 
 loosely, with but a single thickness of the handkerchief. It is said 
 to be certain and infallible ; the patient, it is said, will recover from 
 the attack almost immediately, or it will render it much lighter; and 
 by continuing to do this for a while, it is said the disease maybe 
 entirely broken up. In some parts of the country, where this remedy 
 is known, it is said that men, on seeing persons fall in the street with 
 epilepsy, have instantly pulled from their own necks their black cra- 
 vats and thrown them over the face of the sufferers, and produced 
 almost instant relief! It is certainly a cheap remedy, and is worth 
 trying, at all events. A person afflicted with the disease might keep 
 a large handkerchief, or piece of black silk about his neck, so as to 
 apply it himself, on the first indications of an attack; or if he could 
 not, some one that might be near at the time could do it, without 
 much delay. Xo measure should be left untried because it is simple 
 or ridiculous, that offers to cure so dreadful a disease as epilepsy. 
 
 CATALEPSY. 
 
 Catalepsy is a very remarkable disease. It consists in a tem- 
 porary suspension of consciousness, sensibility, and volition — the 
 body remaining in the precise condition in which it was when the 
 attack came on. There is no muscular contraction, rigidity, or 
 spasm. The respiration and circulation continue the same. It seems 
 a sort of trance, or ecstacy ; and may last for but a few minutes, 
 or it may continue for hours, or even several da}'s. 
 
 The attack generally comes on suddenly, without any warning. 
 The patient falls, or becomes perfectly heljriess and unconscious, and 
 every part of the body remains in precisely the position it was at the 
 moment of the seizure. When the patient recovers, he has no recol- 
 lection of what has occurred, and will commence acting or talking at 
 the point he left off when attacked, the same as if nothing had hap- 
 pened. The period occupied by the attack is a perfect blank in the 
 patient's existence; he does not even recollect that he has been 
 affected. 
 
 In most cases, especially if the attack has been of short duration, 
 
798 CATALEPSY. 
 
 the patient suffers no inconvenience afterward. Sometimes, how- 
 ever, in protracted cases, there will be some feeling of weight and 
 pain in the head, lassitude, and dullness of mind, after the attack has 
 passed off. 
 
 Cataleps}^ is sometimes complicated with other affections, or may- 
 terminate in them, as chorea, somnambulism, hysteria, and even 
 ejDilepsy. As a general thing, however, it is not a dangerous disease. 
 
 Causes : Catalepsy may be induced by various causes. It may 
 arise from intense passion; from long and hard study; from a mor- 
 bid state of the alimentary canal; worms; plethoiy; suppression 
 of accustomed evacuations. Persons of a nervous temperament are 
 said to be most subject to it. It occurs most frequently in females, 
 and very often about the age of puberty^. Suppression or irregular- 
 ities of the menstrual discharge is one of the most common causes 
 of the disease. 
 
 Treatment: During the paroxysm, cold water may be thrown 
 upon the face and body of the patient, and stimulating applications, 
 as No. 6, Tincture Cayenne, or Davis' Pain-killer, made to the spine, 
 with friction, in order to break up the cataleptic state. If these fail, 
 and the paroxysm seems likely to last a good while, stimulating 
 injections may be administered, such as an infusion of the Composi- 
 tion powder, or warm water, and oil or lard, with a little Cayenne 
 and salt in it, or No. 6. 
 
 As soon as the patient can swallow, a brisk purgative should be 
 given, especially where there is reason to believe there are irritating 
 matters in the bowels. 
 
 The after treatment should be upon general principles, with a view 
 also to the exciting cause, the constitution, condition, and temper- 
 ament of the patient. All the secretions and excretions must be 
 regulated, and the stomach, bowels, and skin, kept in a healthy con- 
 dition. Medicines of a restorative, nervine, and sometimes of an 
 anti-spasmodic character should be given. Sometimes eramena- 
 gogues, or medicines that will promote the menses, must be em- 
 ployed. Where this is indicated, a decoction of the Vervine root 
 should be freely used. It is one of the best remedies for suppressed 
 or retained menses known. An occasional physic of the May-apple 
 root should also be given, in such cases, and the feet, legs, and lower 
 part of the body frequently bathed in warm water. Moderate diet 
 and free exercise should be observed. 
 
HYSTERICS — HYSTERIA. 799 
 
 HYSTERICS— HYSTERIA. 
 
 Hysteria, or Hysterics, as it is commonly called, is an affection 
 peculiar to females, and is characterized by a sense of suffocation, 
 stupor, rumbling noise in the bowels, followed by the sensation of a 
 ball rising from the stomach to the throat ; sometimes convulsions; 
 laughing or crying without any apparent cause ; interrupted sleep, 
 sighing, and more or less flatulence. 
 
 Symptoms : Attacks of hysteria are sometimes preceded by low 
 spirits, anxiety of mind, a flow of tears, difficult breathing, palpita- 
 tion of the heart; a pain is felt in the left side of the stomach, which 
 advances upward into the throat as though it was caused by a ball. 
 Next the patient feels like suffocating, grows faint, followed by stupor 
 and perhaps insensibility. The body and limbs may be more or less 
 agitated; there may be alternate fits of laughing, crying, and scream- 
 ing, wild and incoherent expressions, followed by a temporary delir- 
 ium. The spasms at length go off, followed by belchings of wind, 
 sighing and sobbing, and the patient returns to her usual state of 
 health, with little or no recollection of what took place during the 
 fit — feeling, however, more or less pain in the head, and soreness 
 over the body. 
 
 Hysteric fits are seldom attended with danger, and the complaint 
 is never fatal, unless it runs into epilepsy or mania. 
 
 Causes : This disorder usually arises from the operation of certain 
 passions upon a feeble constitution. Females from puberty to the 
 age of thirty-five, are most subject to it. It chiefly affects those of a 
 sanguine temperament, relaxed muscular habit, and great nervous 
 sensibility. It is also more likely to occur in those in whom the 
 menstrual discharge is stopped too suddenly, or habitually obstructed. 
 
 Treatment. ZSot much is necessary to be done during the par- 
 oxysm, or fit. The patient's dress should be loosened, so as to allow 
 of free circulation and respiration. Cold water should be sprinkled, 
 or dashed over the face, the body placed in a recumbent position, the 
 head elevated, and free air admitted. The temples, abdomen, and 
 extremities may be rubbed. Do not confine the patient to the bed. 
 Use no more force than is necessary to keep her from injuring her- 
 self or the attendants. Allow her as much latitude and liberty of 
 motion as possible ; and if she is inclined to roll upon the bed, or the 
 floor — let her roll. 
 
 As soon as the patient is quiet enough, or has sufficiently recovered, 
 the feet and legs should be bathed in warm water, and an emetic 
 
800 HYSTEEICS — HYSTEKIA. 
 
 given, of Lobelia, or Lobelia and Ipecac. The object should be to 
 equalize the circulation, and allay the nervous excitement. An emetic 
 will remove the phlegm and mucus which have collected in the stom- 
 ach and throat, while it also throws the blood to the surface and 
 extremities, and makes an impression upon the brain and nervous 
 system. 
 
 Should the paroxysm be likely to last a good while, and it is not 
 convenient to give an emetic, the following Expectorant tincture may 
 be given, which will soon clear the throat of phlegm, and will often 
 break up the spasm in a few minutes. It is a preparation that should 
 always be kept on hand, as it is good in all cases of sjDasms, convul- 
 sions, suspended animation, pleurisy, hooping-cough, and wherever 
 an expectorant and anti-spasmodic are indicated. To make it, take 
 Blood root (Eed puccoon) 1 oz. ; Lobelia seed, pulverized, 1 oz. ; 
 Ipecac, 2 oz. ; Cayenne, one-half oz.; good whisky, one quart. Let 
 stand a week. Dose for a grown person, from a half to a table- 
 spoonful, repeated as often as necessary. If the patient can not 
 swallow, the same may be given by injection. 
 
 After the paroxysm is over, the patient should take a mild purga- 
 tive, to cleanse the bowels. And if we wish to eifect a permanent 
 cure, the bowels must be kept in an open and healthy state. A pill 
 composed of the extract of May-apple root, or of the Butternut bark, 
 with a little Cayenne or powdered cloves added, may be taken every 
 night or every other night, for this purpose, or any good vegetable 
 pill that will act gently on the bowels. 
 
 Asafetida is a celebrated remedy in this complaint. Women gen- 
 erally have an aversion to it on that account. It is a good agent, 
 however, and a pill of it, about the size of a small pea, may be taken 
 once or twice a day. 
 
 A mild emetic should be given once a week, composed of Lobelia 
 and Ipecac, with pennyroyal tea. Emetics will impart tone and 
 energy to the stomach, liver, and nervous system. 
 
 If the patient is feeble and debilitated, some restorative medicine 
 will be necessary, as a bitters composed of Spikenard, Gentian, 
 Chamomile flowers, and a little cloves and nutmeg, »n wine or spirits. 
 The patient should be treated kindly. Nothing harsh should be said 
 to her, calculated to arouse the passions, or excite the mind. She 
 should exercise often in the open air; never overload the stomach, 
 and use a light, nutricious, but easily digested diet. 
 
GIDDINESS — FAINTING. 801 
 
 GIDDINESS— VERTIGO. 
 
 Vertigo, or giddiness, called also dizziness, is very often but symp- 
 tomatic of some other disease, as hysterics, dyspepsia, over-determin- 
 ation of blood to the head, foul or sour stomach ; it may also be a 
 premonitory symptom of apoplexy. 
 
 Symptoms: It consists of what is called a "swimming in the 
 head;" everything seems to the patient to go round; he staggers, 
 and sometimes is in danger of falling. 
 
 Very little danger attends the complaint, unless it be caused by 
 too great a fullness of blood in the vessels of the brain. If this be 
 the case, it should be attended to in time, or it may terminate in 
 apoplexy or palsy. "When giddiness arises from some disease, it 
 will disappear by the removal of that disease. In females, it often 
 proceeds from difficult or obstructed menstruation. 
 
 Treatment. First ascertain the cause of the difficulty, and then 
 remove it. If it be a mere symptom of some other disease, that 
 should first be removed. If a primary affection, seated in the head, 
 or is from a disordered stomach, a purgative should be given, and 
 repeated occasionally. The Mandrake or May-apple, especially if 
 the brain be the seat of the complaint, will be the best for this pur- 
 pose. An occasional emetic may also be given with advantage, 
 especially if the stomach be out of order. The feet should be bathed 
 frequently, and rubbed well. Equalize the circulation, withdraw the 
 blood from the head to other parts of the body, keep the bowels 
 open, and the stomach cleansed, and the difficulty will soon disappear. 
 
 FAINTING, or swooning. 
 
 Fainting is too common and too well known to need any descrip- 
 tion. It is produced by various causes; among which may be named 
 great loss of blood, and in some persons the sight of blood; violent 
 jions of the mind; severe pain and suffering ; excessive joy; dis- 
 gusting sights; fright; excessive eating and drinking; olfensive 
 odors: impure and confined atmosphere; and intense study. It is 
 also a symptom of other diseases, particularly of the heart and brain. 
 Persons of weak and delicate constitutions are liable to it from very 
 slight causes. If it occur frequently in a person otherwise appar-. 
 
802 BLEEDIJSTG FEOM THE LUNGS. 
 
 ently healthy, and without any known cause, a diseased state of the 
 heart or brain is to be apprehended. 
 
 Treatment. A person who has fainted or swooned should be im- 
 mediately laid in a horizontal position, the clothes about the chest 
 and neck loosened, and cold water sprinkled freely in the face. If 
 the fainting has taken place in a tight or crowded room, the patient 
 should be immediately removed to where there is plenty of fresh 
 air. The hands, legs, and arms, may be freely rubbed. 
 
 Spirits of ammonia, or the salt of hartshorn, should be held to 
 the nose. The hartshorn, or " smelling-bottle," is a very good thing 
 in such cases ; and ladies who are subject to fainting spells, generally 
 carry it with them. 
 
 A teaspoonful or two of compound spirits of lavender, with some 
 spirits of hartshorn, is very good, to be taken internally. There 
 should be about four times as much lavender as hartshorn, or in 
 about that proportion. A teaspoonful of No. 6 is also good. It may 
 be diluted with a little brandy, or other spirits. But in a majority 
 of cases, pure air and a little cold water in the face, are all that will 
 be required. 
 
 Persons subject to fainting should avoid all crowded assemblies, 
 and places where the air is impure or confined. They should also 
 avoid mental excitement, and too much fatigue. And by all means 
 they should avoid tight-lacing. 
 
 BLEEDING FROM THE LUNGS. 
 
 This complaint is usually called " spitting of blood." It consists in 
 coughing up small quantities of bright red blood, sometimes quite 
 frothy, and is usually preceded and accompanied by heat and pain 
 in the chest, irritation in the wind-pipe, and more or less saltish 
 taste in the mouth. Hemorrhage from the lungs may easily be dis- 
 tinguished from that of the stomach, as in the latter case the blood 
 is vomited up, usually in large quantities, and of a much darker 
 color, and more or less mixed with the contents of the stomach; 
 whereas, the blood from the lungs is of a florid color, is thrown up in 
 small quantities, by coughing or hawking, and is more or less mixed 
 with a frothy mucus. 
 
 Causes : Bleeding from the lungs is, as a matter of course, owing 
 to a weakness of those organs, or to the tender and delicate charac- 
 ter of their structure, allowing of easy rupture of the air-cells and 
 
BLEEDIXG FROM THE LUNGS. 803 
 
 small capillaries. It may be brought on by over-exercise and violent 
 exertion, as running, jumping, wrestling, singing loud, or blowing 
 on wind instruments. Also by plethora, hectic fever, coughs, and 
 colds upon the lungs. It may also be induced by the suppression of 
 some accustomed discharge, particularly that of the menses. It most 
 usually occurs in persons with narrow chests, high shoulders, and 
 who are otherwise delicately formed, and of a sanguine temperament. 
 
 Spitting of blood is-not always to be considered a primary disease ; 
 nor is it necessarily connected with consumption. It is often only a 
 sympton of some other disease, as pleurisy, and lung fever; and in 
 some fevers, it appears as a crisis, denoting a favorable termination. 
 
 Occasionally the blood thrown up is of a dark or blackish color; 
 this, however, only shows that it has remained a longer time in some 
 of the air passages, before being thrown up. The complaint is not 
 attended with any danger, where it is not connected with consumption, 
 or where it leaves no cough or other affection of the lungs. When 
 it occurs in persons of a weak, lax fibre, and delicate constitution, it 
 is more difficult to cure. 
 
 Treatment. — One of the best and most common remedies for 
 spitting of blood, is salt. A teaspoonful should be taken, dry, and 
 repeated occasionally. This, in most all mild cases, will be found 
 sufficient, as an internal remedy. External measures should be made 
 use of, as bathing the feet in warm water frequently, and the sponge 
 bath to the whole body, warm or cold, with friction in order to 
 equalize the circulation, and thus prevent too great a determination 
 of blood to the lungs, which might cause the 'difficulty to grow worse. 
 
 A decoction or strong tea, made of the leaves of the Bugle weed, 
 (Lycopus Virginicus), is one of the best remedies known for bleeding 
 at the lungs. As much as a pint a day should be drank, cold, for 
 several days, to prevent a return of the hemorrhage. It is a very 
 good addition to use a portion of the Beth root and Juniper Berries, 
 along with the Bugle weed. 
 
 A tincture made of equal parts of the Black Cohosh root, 
 (Macrotys) and Blood root, (Sanguinaria Canadensis), is also a 
 valuable remedy, especially if there is any liability to consumption. 
 It may be taken in teaspoonful doses every three hours during the 
 day, and continued. An occasional purgative will be advisable. 
 
 In more severe cases, the patient should be kept quiet, and a 
 powder composed of one grain of Cayenne, and half a grain each of 
 Ipecac and pulverized Opium, every two or three hours, until relief 
 is obtained. Small quantities of a decoction of Black Cohosh and 
 Beth root, should also be taken at short intervals. 
 51 
 
804 BLEEDING FROM THE STOMACH. 
 
 BLEEDING FROM THE STOMACH. 
 
 This disease is generally known as vomiting of blood, and consists 
 in a discharge of blood by the mouth, usually in considerable quanti 
 ties, attended with vomiting. 
 
 Causes. — It may be caused by blows upon the region of the 
 stomach, or any thing that will produce too great a determination of 
 blood to that organ. It may also arise from ulceration of the 
 stomach. Most usually, perhaps, it arises from debility and relaxa- 
 tion of the blood-vessels of the inner coat of the stomach. It is 
 sometimes brought on by a suppression of the menses. 
 
 Bleeding from the stomach may be distinguished from that of the 
 lungs, by the discharge being preceded usually by a feeling of weight, 
 pain, and anxiety, in the stomach, and unaccompanied with cough. 
 The blood is discharged by vomiting, and in a greater quantity than 
 when it comes from the lungs. It is also of a darker color, and is 
 usually more or less mixed with the ingesta or food. 
 
 Treatment. — If the affection seems to be but slight, a few doses 
 of common table salt and vinegar, may be sufficient to suppress it. 
 Alum water may also be given. If these fail, give a strong tea of 
 the Beth root. The Bugle weed is also good — a strong tea made from 
 its leaves, to be taken cold at different times during the day. 
 
 If it arise from suppressed menstruation, measures must be taken 
 to restore that discharge. A decoction of the Yervine root should 
 be given three or four times a day ; a purgative of the Mandrake 
 root, and such means employed as will be calculated to divert the 
 blood from the stomach to the extremities and surface. Bathe the 
 feet, and promote perspiration. 
 
 BLEEDING FROM THE NOSE. 
 
 The blood-vessels which expand upon the internal surface or lining 
 membrane of the nose, are very easily ruptured ; hence an unusual 
 determination of blood to the head, will often produce bleeding at 
 the nose. Some persons are much more liable to the complaint than 
 others ; and males are more subject to it than females. 
 
 Usually the blood only flows from one side of the nose, but some- 
 times it is discharged from both, in which case it becomes more 
 alarming. 
 
BLEEDING FKOM THE URINARY ORGANS. 805 
 
 Causes. — Great heat, violent exertion, bending the bod}' with the 
 head downward, and whatever determines the blood to the head, 
 may excite bleeding at the nose. It is also often caused by picking 
 the nose. 
 
 It sometimes commences without any warning: while at other 
 times it is preceded by heaviness in the head, giddiness, flushed face, 
 itching in the nostrils ; and sometimes by cold feet, and a chilly 
 sensation all over the body. Habitual costiveness, may also be 
 regarded as a cause. 
 
 Treatment. — In all ordinary or slight cases, cold water freely 
 applied to the back of the neck, the face, and snuffed up the bleeding 
 nostril, will soon check it. Pressing externally, on the side of the 
 nose that is bleeding, with the thumb or finger, so as to compress the 
 ruptured vessels, and continuing it for a quarter of an hour or so, 
 will often stop it. 
 
 If these measures fail, take a piece of very dry and hard salt beef 
 that which has been smoked is best, and grate it into a powder, and 
 push of this up the nostril, as far as possible, until it is filled, and let 
 it remain. This never fails. 
 
 In habitual or frequent bleeding at the nose, it will be necessary to 
 give a brisk purgative, repeated occasionally, and make use of 
 measures to equalize the circulation. Keep the feet warm and the 
 head cool. 
 
 BLEEDING FROM THE URINARY ORGANS. 
 
 Sometimes, though it is not a very common occurrence, blood will 
 be passed off with the urine. If in but small quantities, it will be 
 known by clots of blood being deposited at the bottom of the cham- 
 ber, and by its staining linen a red color, by which means it may be 
 distinguished from the high colored urine, common in some diseases. 
 Voiding of bloody urine, denotes danger, particularly if it is mixed 
 with purulent matter, as it then shows that there is ulceration some- 
 where in the urinary passages. 
 
 Causes. — It is sometimes a symptom of other diseases, or may be 
 induced by external injuries, blows, bruises, or falls; by straining, 
 and lifting a heavy weight, jumping, or hard riding on horseback. 
 It may also arise from stone in the bladder, the kidney, or lodged in 
 the duct, which leads from the kidney to the bladder. It may also 
 arise from severe inflammation of the bladder. It is often caused by 
 strong, irritating, diuretic medicines. 
 
806 INFLAMMATION OF THE BEAIN. 
 
 Symptoms. — If the bleeding proceeds from the bladder, caused by 
 a stone being lodged in it, or by inflammation of that organ, it may 
 be known by a sense of heat and pain, at the bottom of the abdomen 
 or bowels, and perhaps much difficulty in making water. If it comes 
 from the kidney or urinary duct, caused by a stone, it will be attended 
 with a sharp, acute pain, and feeling of weight in the small of the 
 back, and perhaps to one side. 
 
 Treatment. — The treatment in this complaint, should consist 
 mainly in giving emollient diuretics and astringents. The specific in 
 this, and all similar diseases of the urinary organs, is the Marsh 
 Mallow. There are two kinds of the Mallow, the high and low, and 
 they grow in nearly all parts of the country. Either will do. A 
 strong decoction is to be made of the leaves, buttons, or roots, and 
 drank freely, — from a pint to a quart a clay. A decoction of Mullein 
 leaves and horse-mint, is also very good. A little horse-mint or 
 spearmint may be added to the Marsh mallow. 
 
 If calculi or stone in the kidney, or ducts, is suspected, emetics and 
 cathartics should also be given. 
 
 INFLAMMATION OF THE BRAIN. 
 
 Inflammation of the brain is of two kinds; that which affects the 
 substance of the brain itself, and that which is located in the mem- 
 branes only. It is often symptomatic of other diseases, as fevers, 
 eruptive diseases, and sudden constipation of the f bowels. 
 
 Causes : Whatever produces a great determination of blood to the 
 head may cause inflammation of the brain, or of its membranes ; as 
 fits of passion, intense study, intemperate use of ardent spirits, and 
 exposure to great heat of the sun. Fractures of the skull, blows 
 upon the head, suppressed evacuations, and the repulsion of cuta- 
 neous diseases, may also produce it. 
 
 Symptoms : Inflammation of the brain is generally attended with 
 flushed face, redness of the eyes, pain in the head, wakefulness, intol- 
 erance of light and sound, and more or less inflammatory fever. If 
 the substance of the brain is affected, there will also be delirium. 
 There is also apt to be pain in the stomach, which arises from sym- 
 pathy. The head is usually hot, and the feet cold; and the bowels 
 generally costive. The disease may prove fatal in a few days, or it 
 may continue for months. Sometimes the patient becomes quite 
 delirious, and raves in a state of complete phrensy. 
 
 Treatment: Efforts should be made to restore the blood to the. 
 
INFLAMMATION OF THE LUNGS. 807 
 
 extremities, and thus divert it from the brain. Bathe the feet in the 
 warm alkaline bath, made by adding a little saleratus, or ley, or 
 ashes, to warm water. This should be done two or three times a day. 
 Make cold applications to the head, face, and neck- — keep the head 
 cool, as well as you can, and give a brisk active cathartic, of the 
 hydra 'jor/ue kind, by which is meant purgative medicines that produce 
 watery discharges from the bowels. There is nothing better — per- 
 haps nothing so good — for this than the powdered Mandrake root 
 and cream of tartar, with a little Cayenne or cloves. Give of the 
 combined powder a teaspoonful every hour, till it operates. Jalap 
 and cream of tartar will do if you can not get the Mandrake. The 
 cathartic should be repeated every morning or evening, till the 
 patient gives evidence of being out of immediate danger. 
 
 Apply a mustard draft to the back of the neck, and a large one 
 also over the stomach and abdomen. 
 
 Some sweating powders or tincture should be given, to keep up a 
 determination to the surface, and promote general perspiration. For 
 this purpose use the tinctures of Lobelia and Blood root, and the 
 wine of Ipecac, in equal parts, to be given in teaspoonful doses about 
 once an hour. Or these three articles may be given in powder, in 
 six to ten grain doses every hour. 
 
 At night, apply mustard drafts to the feet and legs. And if there 
 is great pain in the head, and the cold applications do not relieve it, 
 apply a warm fomentation made of hops simmered in vinegar, enclosed 
 in a thin muslin, and repeat occasionally. Should the patient be very 
 restless, and unable to sleep, let him drink freely of hop-tea at night. 
 
 Cupping or leeching may be advisable; it will have a tendency to 
 relieve the vessels of the head, and produce a sort of counter-irri- 
 tation that may be beneficial. 
 
 The patient may be allowed to drink lemonade, water made acid 
 with cream of tartar, and also spearmint tea, with a little sweet spir- 
 its of nitre in it. This latter will act as a diuretic, which will prove 
 of much advantage. The Podophyllin, in three grain doses, with a 
 teaspoonful of cream of tartar, is an admirable purgative in this 
 disease. 
 
 INFLAMMATION OF THE LUNGS. 
 
 When the substance of the lungs, or the mucous membrane which 
 lines the air-cells and passages of the lungs, is the seat of the inflam- 
 mation, it is called pneumonia; when the membrane which covers or 
 
808 INFLAMMATION OF THE LUNGS. 
 
 envelops the lungs (the pleura pulmonalis), is inflamed, it is called 
 'peripneumonia. The treatment is about the same in both cases, how- 
 ever, and does not require separate descriptions. Inflammation of 
 the lungs is liable to attack all classes, and at some seasons, and in 
 certain sections of country, it is very prevalent. When it occurs 
 during the winter and early spring, it is by some called winter-fever, 
 and often proves very dangerous. 
 
 Causes : The most common cause of this disease, probably, is 
 from taking cold, which settles upon the lungs. This causes a check 
 of perspiration, which closes the capillary vessels of the skin, and de- 
 termines the blood upon the lungs. It occurs most frequently in the 
 winter season and early spring ; and persons of robust constitutions 
 and large lungs, are most subject to it. It may occur, however, and 
 sometimes does, at all seasons of the year. Persons who have had 
 a severe attack of the disease, become thereby more liable to subse- 
 quent attacks. 
 
 Symptoms: Inflammation of the lungs commences with a dull pain 
 in the chest, or in one side of it, if but one lung is affected, with 
 difficulty of breathing — especially if the patient lies upon the side 
 affected — with cough, dryness and heat of the skin, and more or less 
 thirst. At first the pulse is full, hard, strong, and very frequent ; 
 but as the disease advances it sometimes grows weak and soft, but 
 continues very frequent. The cough is usually moist, and the matter 
 spit up is a white, tough, and frothy substance, sometimes streaked 
 w T ith blood. The tongue is coated at first with a white fur. 
 
 As the disease proceeds, the face is apt to become of a dark purple, 
 the vessels of the neck become turgid and distended with blood ; the 
 breathing becomes quick, short, and very difficult, threatening suffo- 
 cation. "When death takes place, it is generally from an effusion of 
 blood into the cellular substance of the lungs, thus preventing circu- 
 lation through those organs, and also occasioning suffocation. It 
 may also prove fatal by terminating in suppuration and gangrene. 
 When suppuration has taken place, it may be known by frequent 
 slight shiverings, an abatement or absence of pain, a sense of full- 
 ness in the part. The patient can also lie on the affected side with- 
 out causing much inconvenience. 
 
 When the disease proves fatal, it is generally between the third 
 and seventh days. 
 
 Favorable Symptoms. — If in the course of the disease, a copious 
 flow of urine should set in, or a diarrhea, or profuse sweat over the 
 whole body, or even a hemorrhage from the nose, they are to be 
 regarded as highly favorable, showing that the disease has most 
 likely passed its crisis. Also a copious expectoration of thick, whitish 
 
INFLAMMATION OF THE LUNGS. 809 
 
 or yellowish matter from the lungs, is to be regarded as highly 
 favorable. 
 
 Treatment. — The treatment in all cases of inflammation of the 
 lungs, should consist mainly in emetics, diaphoretics, (or sweating 
 medicines), expectorants, with external means for aiding perspira- 
 tion and the equal distribution of the blood ; and in case the tongue 
 becomes coated, dark, brown, or yellow, cathartics that act on the 
 liver. I lay down the following as a proper course to be pursued in 
 a bad case ; which can be varied according to circumstances. 
 
 First, you may commence by letting the patient sit for half an 
 hour, with his feet and legs in warm water, and drink some warm 
 sweating teas, as the Composition powder, with a little powdered 
 Blood root added, or Pennyroyal and Sage. In the mean time, boil in 
 a large pot or kettle, a quantity of bitter herbs, as Hoarhound, 
 Tansy, Hops, Boneset, Srnartweed, Horsemint, and Peach leaves, a 
 handful of each, or of as many as you can get. Then take the vessel 
 from the fire, strip the patient, and seat him over it, with a blanket 
 thrown round his shoulders, and allowed to fall to the floor around 
 him, and outside of the chair, so as to confine the steam arising from 
 the herbs and hot water in the vessel, and at the same time allow it 
 to come in contact with his body as high as his neck. Continue this 
 for half an hour, occasionally throwing into the vessel a hot brick or 
 rock, to raise the steam ; wet the face and head with cold water, if 
 the patient feels faint, and let him continue supping a little of the 
 warm teas. 
 
 ZS"ext wipe him off quick and put him in bed, and give immediately 
 a thorough emetic, composed of equal parts powdered Lobelia seed. 
 Blood root and Ipecac. Take a large tablespoonful of the compound, 
 and pour on it a pint of hot water, stir, and let stand fifteen minutes, 
 and then commence giving it in half a teacupful every five to ten 
 minutes, until the patient has vomited thoroughly, three or four 
 times. During the intervals between vomiting, let him drink freely 
 of Pennyroyal, Sage, Composition, or Boneset tea. 
 
 After the emetic is through with, place hot bricks, or boiled corn 
 in the cars, about the patient in bed, keep him well covered, continue 
 the warm tea occasionally, with a very little of the emetic infusion 
 added, so as to keep the stomach slightly nauseated, and let him 
 sweat. After continuing this for three hours, and the patient has 
 sweat pretty well, he may be wiped dr} r and furnished with dry 
 linen, and allowed to rest or sleep. 
 
 A large mustard draft may then be placed over the chest and region 
 of the lungs, and kept on as long as the patient can bear it — an hour 
 if possible ; and he should commence taking in broken doses, some 
 
810 INFLAMMATION OF THE LUNGS. 
 
 suitable expectorant and diaphoretic. You can probably find nothing 
 better than the same emetic infusion which I have recommended, 
 given in from a half to a tablespoonful, according to the strength of 
 it. Or the same articles may be given in powder, in doses of five to 
 eight, or ten grains, repeated every hour. Or the tinctures of Lobelia 
 and Blood root, and wine of Ipecac, equal parts, may be given in 
 teaspoonful doses, once an hour. Or the Expectorant Tincture, made 
 of pulverized Lobelia seed, and Blood root, each one oz. ; Ipecac two 
 oz. ; Cayenne one half oz. ; Whisky or dilute alcohol, one quart,- — 
 digest one or two weeks ; of this, a teaspoonful every hour. 
 
 The emetics are to be repeated once in twenty-four hours ; and it 
 may be well to repeat the steaming over bitter herbs as often, or 
 employ the common vapor or steam bath. 
 
 At first the tongue will be coated with a white fur; but if it 
 changes to dark brown or yellowish, a cathartic must be given, such 
 as will act on the liver and secretions. The Anti-bilious Physic and 
 powdered Mandrake will be suitable, or three or four pills made of 
 extract Mandrake root, and poAvdered Blood root and Cayenne. This 
 is one of the best liver and anti-bilious pills in the world, and good 
 wherever an efficient and speedy cathartic is needed. Give three or 
 four of these pills, and repeat in six hours, if they do not operate. 
 The bowels should be kept in a lax state by giving one of these pills, 
 or a small quantity of the powder of Mandrake and Blood root every 
 night or morning, so as to gently act on the liver. The Podophyllin 
 may be used instead of the Mandrake. 
 
 Continue the expectorants all the while, night and day, if the case 
 is a bad one. 
 
 Should the disease assume any thing of a periodical nature, be 
 intermittent, like the ague, or intermittent fever, quinine should be 
 given. You may combine it with the expectorant, or give it in any 
 uther way, so as to give during one day about twelve grains, after 
 which omit it, for several days, or entirely, if not indicated any 
 more. 
 
 It may be well occasionally to apply a fomentation of herbs, over 
 the chest and lungs, as warm as can be borne, such as Hoarhound, 
 Catnip, Tansy, and the like ; and also repeat the mustard draft once 
 a day. But rely mainly upon emetics, nauseating expectorants, and 
 sweating. The Skunk Cabbage (root) is also a good expectorant in 
 this disease, and may be combined with the other articles, in either 
 powder, tincture, or infusion. 
 
 Bilious and Typhoid Pneumonia : Sometimes inflammation of the 
 lungs appears as an epidemic, in certain localities, during the winter 
 season, when it becomes very malignant, and is apt to assume a bil- 
 
PLEURISY. 811 
 
 ious or typhoid character. It is sometimes, in such cases, called 
 Winter-fever, and the " Cold Plague," and is very fatal, if not properly 
 treated. 
 
 In such cases, pursue the same course of treatment as the fore- 
 going, only, if possible, more thorough and vigorously. Instead of 
 the skin being hot, in this form of the disease, there is usually a 
 remarkable coldness of the surface and extremities. The feet and 
 legs should be bathed frequently in warm ley water — and the follow- 
 ing powder should be^iven, in addition to the other medicines: Take 
 pulverized Ipecac, two drachms ; pulverized Gum Camphor, two 
 drachms; salt of Hartshorn (carbonate of ammonia), two drachms; 
 pulverized Opium, one-half drachm ; triturate, or rub all together, 
 well, in a small mortar, and give at a dose about eight grains every 
 three or four hours. Or the Dover's' powders may be given instead, 
 or the Diaphoretic Poicders. (See Table of Family Medicines.) 
 
 Anti-bilious purgatives will be necessary; and if the disease 
 assumes a typhoid character, quinine and stimulants must also be 
 given. Emetics, and external application of heat, and expectorants, 
 are indispensable. If the pulse continues too frequent, give also 
 tincture Digitalis, ten to fifteen drops, three or four times a day. 
 
 Peripneumonia: If the inflammation should only be seated on 
 the external membrane of the lungs, the pleura pulmonalis, the symp- 
 toms may vary somewhat from those of inflammation of the sub- 
 stance of the lungs. The pain will generally be on one side, and will 
 be sharper and more acute, more like pleurisy. There will not be 
 that difficulty of breathing and sense of suffocation; but breathing 
 will cause more pain in the part. 
 
 If the case is not a very bad one, an emetic, a good sweat, a mus- 
 tard draft over the seat of the disease, and the use of ^N~o. 6, and the 
 tinctures of Lobelia and Macrotys (Battle root), equal parts, in tea- 
 spoonful doses once an hour, will generally be sufficient. Tincture 
 of Cayenne may be used instead of ^N~o. 6. Should it, however, be 
 severe, involving more or less the substance of the lungs, pursue a 
 similar course to that recommended for inflammation of the lungs, 
 or treat it the same as a case of pleurisy. 
 
 PLEURISY. 
 
 Pleurisy is an inflammation of the pleura, or membrane which 
 lines the internal cavity of the chest. The disease prevails most in 
 
812 EPILEPSY. 
 
 the spring season, though it may occur at any other season ; and 
 persons of a sanguine temperament, and who are much exposed to 
 vicissitudes of heat and cold, are most liable to it. 
 
 Causes : Sudden cold coming in contact with the skin or surface 
 of the body; drinking cold water when the body is heated by exer- 
 cise and in a profuse perspiration ; sleeping out of doors, or in damp 
 places; a check of perspiration from exposure to a draught of cold 
 air. Any thing that suddenly obstructs perspiration may produce 
 pleurisy. It may be caused by violent exercise, or by hard lifting. 
 The sudden striking in of small-pox, measles, or any eruption, may 
 also produce it. 
 
 Symptoms: Pleurisy, like most other forms of inflammation and 
 fever, usually commences with a chill, or chilly sensations, followed 
 by heat, thirst, and other febrile symptoms. After a few hours the 
 patient is seized with a sharp, acute pain in one side, usually in the 
 region of the short ribs, which gradually extends toward the 
 shoulder-blade, and toward the fore-part of the breast; the pain 
 increases, and sometimes becomes very violent. It may or may not 
 be attended with coughing and expectoration. The matter that is 
 coughed up is generally more or less mixed with blood. The pulse 
 is strong and vibrating, feeling like a tense cord. 
 
 Treatment. In the first place give teaspoonful doses of tincture 
 Lobelia and No. 6, equal parts, repeated every ten minutes till four 
 or five doses are taken. Ten to fifteen drops of laudanum may be 
 added to each of the first three doses. If you have not the No. 6, 
 tincture of Cayenne may be used in its stead. 
 
 The patient should bathe his feet in warm water, and drink some 
 warm tea — the best is made of the Pleurisy root, Boneset, and Blood 
 root, equal parts. This will prepare the system for an emetic, which 
 must be given by all means. No matter what the patient says, or 
 how much he may object — give an emetic. This is the " sheet-anchor " 
 in this disease. Let it be composed of Lobelia and Ipecac, given 
 along with the above-named tea. If the case is bad, make use of the 
 vapor-bath, or steaming over bitter herbs, before giving the emetic. 
 
 After the emetic place hot-bricks, rocks, or hot corn about the 
 patient in bed, and apply a mustard-plaster over the seat of the 
 inflammation. 
 
 Continue the above-named tea, or something of a similar nature, 
 occasionally giving a dose of the tincture, and keep the patient 
 sweating, if possible, twelve hours — and then give a cathartic. 
 
 Equal parts of tinctures Lobelia, Blood root, Macrotys, and Cay- 
 enne, to be given in teaspoonful doses, every hour or two, is also an 
 excellent preparation. If necessary, repeat the emetic. Pursue an 
 
INFLAMMATION OF THE STOMACH. 813 
 
 efficient coarse, and you can not fail. If the action of the heart is 
 very great, and the pulse too frequent, give also tincture Digitalis, 
 ten to iifteen drops three times a day. Do not bleed ; it is almost 
 certain to do injury. 
 
 Chronic Form. Pleurisy, not ^infrequently becomes chronic, in 
 which case the pain in the side or chest is not severe, but is a sort of 
 soreness, with oppression, and vague uneasiness; short and dry 
 cough, with difficulty in taking a full breath. The pulse is too 
 frequent, and there may benight sweats, with more or less enlarge- 
 ment of the chest. 
 
 The Treatment for chronic pleurisy should be of a milder 
 character. A mild emetic given about once a week. It should be 
 given slowly, in broken doses, and occupy fully an hour. 
 
 Bathing the lower extremities in ley or salt water daily, with 
 rubbing, should be observed. 
 
 But one of the best things is what is termed an Irritating plaster, to 
 be applied and constantly worn for some weeks, over the seat of the 
 inflammation. This may be made of Burgundy pitch, beeswax, and 
 a little rosin, all melted together, and while warm, stir in a little 
 finely powdered Blood root, May-apple root, and Poke root. Make it 
 of a consistence that it will stick to the skin ; spread it thin on a bit 
 of muslin, as large as the two hands, apply it, a little warm, and let 
 it remain for a week, and then renew, until it produces pustules, and 
 more or less of a running sore. Continue it for weeks, if necessary. 
 
 Mild hydragogue cathartics are to be used, and diuretics ; such as 
 the Mandrake, or Podophyllin, and cream tartar, with a portion 
 of Xitre or Saltpetre. The Iodide of potassa,is a great remedy in this 
 affection. Dissolve one drachm in four ounces of water, and take a 
 teaspoonful once a day. For the cough, take tinctures Macrotys and 
 Blood root, and vinegar of Squills, of each one oz.; extract Licorice, 
 one oz., dissolved in three oz. hot water; Mix the whole, and take 
 in tablespoonful doses, every one, two, or three hours, as the cough 
 may require. 
 
 INFLAMMATION OF THE STOMACH. 
 
 Inflammation of the stomach does not occur very often as an 
 independent or primary affection, but is most usually the result of, or 
 connected with some other disease. 
 
 Causes. Caustic and irritating substances taken into the stomach. 
 
814 INFLAMMATION OF THE STOMACH. 
 
 The corrosive mineral poisons, and some vegetable poisons, often 
 prove fatal, by causing inflammation of the stomach. The habitual 
 use of alcoholic drinks, sometimes produces the disease, and where 
 there is a predisposition to it, even eating to excess. Drinking large 
 quantities of cold water, is also among the causes. 
 
 It is very liable to occur in the course of some fevers, especially 
 Bilious and Yellow fevers, and sometimes during the small-pox and 
 measles. 
 
 Symptoms. In severe cases there is a burning pain in the stomach, 
 with constant nausea and vomiting, and great desire for cold drinks. 
 The pain is increased by pressure on the stomach, and by a deep 
 inspiration. The patient can not bear warm drinks — they are 
 instantly thrown up ; and even cold water if much is taken, soon 
 produces distress, by distending the stomach. 
 
 The tongue is either red at the tip and edges, with a whitish fur 
 in the middle, — or is red all over. 
 
 The bowels are always constipated, unless they are also inflamed. 
 
 The pulse is frequent, small, and corded. Breathing short and 
 hurried ; skin hot and dry, and the urine high colored. 
 
 The patient prefers to lie on his back, with his legs drawn up ; is 
 low spirited, restless, has a feeling of extreme debility, with an 
 expression of countenance indicating anxiety and distress. 
 
 If the disease continue to advance and grow worse, the tongue 
 becomes smooth, red, and dry; the skin becomes cool and pale;, 
 pulse more frequent, feeble, and thread-like ; the body becomes 
 much emaciated ; debility and restlessness increase, and delirium 
 sets in. 
 
 Hiccough, vomiting of dark colored matter, cold extremities, or a 
 complete cessation of pain, without improvement in other respects, 
 are to be regarded as fatal symptoms. 
 
 In the milder forms of the disease, of course the symptoms will be 
 of a milder character also. Instead of severe burning pain, there 
 may be but a feeling of unusual warmth and constriction in the 
 stomach, and instead of incessant vomiting, but a slight nausea, and 
 so on. 
 
 The disease varies in duration from two to six weeks, and may 
 then subside into the chronic form. Milder cases generally soon 
 yield to proper treatment ; but if neglected, may run on for weeks, 
 and then terminate in a lasting chronic disease. 
 
 Treatment. Here is a case in which it will not do to give emetics. 
 Every thing calculated to irritate the stomach, whether food, drink, 
 or medicine, must be withheld. 
 
 The bowels must be opened, and if it can not be done by giving 
 
INFLAMMATION OF THE STOMACH. 815 
 
 cathartics, it must be done by injections. Oily substances will 
 generally be retained. Equal parts of castor oil and sweet oil, with 
 a portion of magnesia, can be given, in tablespoonful doses, repeated 
 hourly till they operate, or five or six doses are taken. 
 
 I have often found the following to be an admirable preparation, 
 as a cathartic in this disease. Five or six grain doses of the Neu- 
 tralizing Physic, with half a grain of Podophyllin, and a grain of 
 Ipecac in each dose, given in a spoonful of cold water, once every 
 two hours, till six or eight doses are taken, or an operation produced. 
 To prepare the Neut. Physic, see Table of Family Medicines and 
 Kee^es. If the stomach will not retain this, omit the jSTeut. Physic, 
 and give the other two, in the quantities named, in half a spoonful of 
 cold water. 
 
 Apply a large mustard plaster over the stomach, until a powerful 
 impression is produced. It is well to make use of injections, and it 
 may be well to give from an eighth to a fourth of a grain of morphine 
 occasionally — not oftener than once in two hours. 
 
 But you must rely principally upon external applications. After 
 the mustard has been taken off, apply constantly over the stomach 
 flannel cloths, dipped in a hot infusion of hops boiled in vinegar and 
 water, or in hot water alone. Continue this for hours. Bathe the 
 feet and legs in warm ley water, and apply hot bricks to the patient 
 in bed. Repeat the mustard plaster occasionally. 
 
 Give mucilaginous drinks, as gum arabic water, and infusion of 
 slippery elm, or marsh mallow, cold, and a little lemonade. 
 
 Chronic Form. When this disease becomes chronic, the digestion 
 will be bad, with sour stomach, flatulency, heaviness and oppression 
 after eating, belchings, and more or less pain and soreness in the 
 walls of the stomach. The stomach seems to be tense, and sore to 
 the touch ; the soreness is usually confined to one spot, and is of a 
 stinging character. The appetite is more or less impaired, and there 
 is often nausea. The bowels arc generally very costive ; but some- 
 times a mucus diarrhea occurs. Ardent spirits, or stimulants of any 
 kind, taken into the stomach, produce a burning sensation, and also 
 a redness on the surface, especially the face. The tongue is usually 
 clean, or a brown fur in the middle, smooth, and of a bright*red, with 
 pimples on it somewhat like the granulations of the strawberry. 
 
 Chronic inflammation of the stomach usually results from the 
 acute form; though it is sometimes chronic from the start, and often 
 results from the use of liquors and other stimulants. 
 
 Treatment. In the treatment of this form of the disease, almost 
 everything depends upon proper diet. Nothing but the blandest 
 and least irritating diet should be used. If the disease borders on 
 
816 INFLAMMATION OF THE BOWELS. 
 
 the acute form, with slight feverish symptoms, mucilaginous articles, 
 as tapioca, sago, arrow root, gum arabic, and elm bark, and decoction 
 of barley, should be used. If there is no fever, and not much debil- 
 ity, a more nutricious diet may be used, as boiled rice, stale bread, 
 crackers, mush and milk, and gruels. Milk is an excellent thing, and 
 cases have been cured, by living on bread and milk alone for a while. 
 The addition of a little lime-water makes it still better. Alcoholic 
 and stimulating drinks, coffee, and the like, are to be avoided. 
 
 Costiveness must be prevented or overcome by the use of laxative© 
 and mild cathartics. This may often be done by the use of bread 
 made of unbolted flour. 
 
 An irritating plaster worn over the sore part of the stomach will 
 also do good. 
 
 When there is evidence of ulceration of the stomach, a pill should 
 be given twice a day, composed of three grains of extract Ryoscia- 
 mus and one grain of powdered sulphate of iron (copperas), with half 
 a grain of Ipecac, continued two or three weeks, or until relief is 
 obtained. Bathing the whole surface and rubbing with a coarse 
 towel should also be employed daily. 
 
 INFLAMMATION OF THE BOWELS. 
 
 Inflammation of the bowels is characterized by acute pains in the 
 abdomen, costiveness, more or less fever, and sometimes vomiting. 
 
 Causes. The disease may be caused by obstinate and long con- 
 tinued costiveness, by wounds and injuries to the intestines, by severe 
 colic, by eating unripe fruit, and by exposure of the lower extrem- 
 ities and abdomen to cold. 
 
 Symptoms. Burning and acute pain in the bowels, which bhoots 
 round the navel ; usually obstinate costiveness ; vomiting of bilious 
 or dark colored matter ; urine high colored ; pulse quick, hard, and 
 contracted; some fever, thirst, and great loss of strength. The 
 patient is constantly belching up wind. 
 
 Treatment. Soak the feet in warm ley water — apply warm fomen- 
 tations over the abdomen, flannel cloths dipped in hot ley water — and 
 give a large tablcspoonful of cold-pressed Castor-oil, with half as 
 much Olive oil, and half a teaspoonful of spirits turpentine, and 
 repeat it every two hours till an operation on the bowels is effected. 
 After the second or third dose is taken, it should be aided by an 
 injection of the same with a little warm milk and molasses, and a 
 
INFLAMMATION OF THE KIDNEYS. 817 
 
 teaspoonful of salt dissolved in it. If these means, after repeated 
 trials, do not succeed, give more powerful injections; a tablespoonful 
 of the Anti-bilious Physic, as much salt, a teaspoonful of Cayenne, a 
 large spoonful of lard, and a pint of hot water; add a spoonful tinc- 
 ture Lobelia, and give the whole, warm, with a large syringe, and 
 have it retained a while by external pressure. 
 
 In severe cases, it is good treatment to apply to the abdomen hot 
 fomentations made by boiling in vinegar and water such herbs as 
 hoarhound, wormwood, tansy, and hops, and inclosed in flannel or 
 muslin, to be changed and repeated often. 
 
 If the costiveness can not be overcome, put the patient in a warm 
 bath for half an hour. 
 
 Occasionally leave off the hot fomentations, and apply a large mus- 
 tard plaster over the abdomen. 
 
 After the bowels have once been opened, a tablespoonful of castor 
 and olive oil may be given once or twice a day, with fifteen or twenty 
 drops oil of turpentine in it, to keep them open. A tea of senna and 
 manna, with a teaspoonful of Epsom salts, is also good. ]No harsh or 
 drastic purgatives should be given. 
 
 If mortification should be apprehended, apply over the bowels a 
 poultice made of a decoction of the Wild Indigo (Baptista tinctoria), 
 root or leaves, and give a little of the tea or infusion of the same 
 internally, say two or three tablespoonfuls ever}" three or four hours. 
 This is one of the most powerful anti-septics known, and is good in 
 all cases of putrid affections, sore throat, and the like, both internally 
 and externally. 
 
 INFLAMMATION OF THE KIDNEYS. 
 
 This affection is characterized by pain in the region of the kid- 
 neys, shooting down toward the bladder, or lower part of the abdo- 
 men, sometimes vomiting, numbness of the thigh, high colored urine 
 and frequently discharged, constipation of the bowels, pain in the 
 small of the back and in the groin, with more or less fever. 
 
 Causes. It is often produced by the formation of stone or calculus, 
 in the kidney, but may be brought on by the use of irritating diu- 
 retic medicines, by severe exercise, riding on a rough horse, hard 
 lifting, and by cold settling upon the kidneys. 
 
 Treatment. The first thing done should be to relax the system, 
 and produce perspiration. This may be accomplished by giving an. 
 emetic, slowly, at first, of Lobelia. After which, apply over the 
 
818 INFLAMMATION OF THE BLADDER. 
 
 region of the kidneys a hot fomentation of hops, wormwood, and 
 tansy, simmered in vinegar and water, with a little bran mixed with 
 them. 
 
 Then give the following diuretic drops — sweet spirits of nitre, 2 oz. ; 
 oil of sweet almonds, 2 oz. ; spirits of turpentine, 1 oz. ; mix, and 
 give a teaspoonful every three or four hours during the day, in a cup 
 of warm spearmint tea. 
 
 Let the patient also drink freely of a decoction made of marsh 
 mallows (leaves or root) and mullein leaves — or either of them, if 
 both can not be had. The horsemint maybe added; it is a good diu- 
 retic in this complaint, and will give the decoction a more agreeable 
 flavor. 
 
 If the pain is severe, or of long standing, use the following lini- 
 ment ; oil of juniper, one-half oz. ; oil of spearmint, one-half oz. ; 
 spirits of turpentine, one oz. ; tincture of cayenne, one oz. ; laudanum, 
 one oz. ; alcohol, one-half pint; cut the oils in the alcohol first, and 
 then add the others. Bathe the small of the back, and over the 
 region of the kidneys freely with this, and. let the patient sit with 
 his back to the fire, or apply a warm iron or brick, to drive the lini- 
 ment in. 
 
 Should there be much disposition to vomit, give a little saleratus 
 in peppermint tea. A pill of opium, or forty to fifty drops of lauda- 
 num may be given occasionally, in case of excessive pain, and the 
 patient placed in a warm bath. 
 
 A purgative should be given every day, if the patient is of a costive 
 habit ; and after the urgent sj^mptoms are removed, a strengthening 
 plaster should be worn on the back for a week or two. 
 
 INFLAMMATION OF THE BLADDER. 
 
 This disease will be known by a burning pain in the region of the 
 bladder (bottom of the abdomen), frequent and painful discharges 
 of urine, an almost constant desire to make water ; hard pulse, and 
 symptoms of fever. Sometimes there is great difficulty in voiding 
 the urine, or a total stoppage ; often a frequent desire to go to stool, 
 with sickness at the stomach and vomiting. Sometimes there is a 
 discharge of mucus and blood along with the urine. 
 
 Causes. The use of acrid diuretics, as cantharides ; stricture in 
 the urethra; irritation from a stone being lodged in the bladder; 
 mechanical injury, and the usual causes- of inflammation. 
 
 Treatment. The treatment in this case must be very similar to 
 
INFLAMMATION OF THE SPLEEN. 819 
 
 that for inflammation of the kidneys. The warm hip bath — the 
 patient sitting in warm water, which extends above the hips — should 
 be employed twice a day, and the diuretic drops named for the prece 
 ding disease, should be given in spearmint or horsemint tea. Fomen- 
 tations of bitter herbs, should be applied over the lower part of the 
 abdomen. 
 
 A decoction of the marsh mallows should be drank constantly ; it is 
 a sovereign remedy in diseases of the urinary organs, and may be 
 relied upon, as a specific in this. 
 
 A purgative should be given every day. The patient must abstain 
 from every thing of an acrid or stimulating nature, both of food and 
 medicine. 
 
 In severe cases, apply a mustard plaster or blister over the region 
 of the bladder. A decoction of burdock and mullein is also good, as 
 a drink. 
 
 INFLAMMATION OF THE SPLEEN. 
 
 Acute inflammation of the spleen is characterized by heat, pain, 
 and some swelling in the left side, immediately below the ribs, with 
 more or less fever. The pain is increased by pressure. It often 
 comes on with a shivering, like that of an ague, followed by heat and 
 great thirst. It is often connected with the ague, or chills and fever, 
 and is frequently a result of that disease. It often results also from 
 the continued use of quinine. Persons of a plethoric and sanguine 
 habit of body, are most subject to it. It is also liable to become 
 chronic. 
 
 Treatment. Commence with ahydragogue cathartic, the Antibil- 
 ious physic, or Mandrake, with cream of tartar. 
 
 Make use of measures to produce perspiration, — a good sweat, if 
 possible. 
 
 Apply stimulating liniment and warm fomentations to the part. 
 
 The purgatives should be repeated every second or third day, and 
 if relief is not soon obtained, give an emetic — bathe the feet in warm 
 ley water, and apply a mustard plaster over the part. 
 
 The disease sometimes becomes chronic, in which case the spleen 
 
 becomes enlarged and hard, forming what is sometimes called an 
 
 11 ague cake." In this case apply a plaster, and renew it occasionally, 
 
 made of the yellow of eggs and salt. Give an occasional purgative, 
 
 and an emetic once a week. 
 52 
 
820 INFLAMMATION OF THE EAE EYES. 
 
 INFLAMMATION OF THE EAE— EAR ACHE. 
 
 Inflammation of the ear, producing " ear-ache," is principally 
 seated in the nerves of the ear and its membrane, and is usually 
 brought on by exposing the head to cold, or to a current of air. It 
 may be caused, however, by any exposure, as getting the feet wet, 
 check of perspiration, or cutting the hair too short in cold weather. 
 
 Treatment. Bathe the feet in warm water, and drop into the ear 
 a few drops of the following : Take equal parts of laudanum, sweet 
 oil, and honey, one part also of tincture cayenne, or No. 6, may be 
 added ; mix, and from a warm teaspoon drop into the ear five or six 
 drops, and stop the ear tight with cotton. Eepeat every hour or two. 
 
 If the pain is very great, steam the ear and side of the head over 
 bitter herbs, and apply a hop fomentation, or a poultice made 
 of roasted onions. Give also an active purgative. 
 
 An excellent remedy for ear-ache, is as follows : Take three or 
 four roasted garlics, and while hot mash, and add a tablespoonful of 
 sweet oil and as much honey, and laudanum ; press out the juice, 
 and drop of this into the ear, warm, occasionally. Onion juice 
 is also good, in place of the garlic. If matter forms in the 
 ear — if it gathers and breaks, — inject warm castile soap-suds, and 
 cleansing and healing washes, into the ear, by means of a small 
 syringe, and apply poultices. 
 
 INFLAMMATORY SORE EYES. 
 
 This affection is so well known, that it needs no description. It is 
 sometimes caused by foreign bodies getting into the eyes, or by what 
 are called "wild hairs," which grow through the eyelids. In such 
 cases, the offending cause must be removed. 
 
 Where it is caused from cold settling in the eyes, determination of 
 blood to the parts, etc., make use of measures to equalize the heat 
 and circulation of the body, to withdraw the determination of blood 
 from the head ; and apply poultices and eye washes, to allay inflam- 
 mation. 
 
 It will almost invariably be found in acute ophthalmia or inflamma- 
 tion of the eyes, that the head or forehead is too hot, and the feet and 
 extremities too cold, showing an unequal circulation. Hence the 
 feet should often be bathed in warm water ;. and cooling applications 
 may be made to the head. 
 
CHRONIC SOKE EYES. 821 
 
 Apply to the eyes a poultice made of pulverized elm bark, stirred 
 in warm milk and water. This is the best poultice that can be used. 
 The wilted leaves of Stramonium (Jimson) are also good in severe 
 cases to apply over the eyes. 
 
 Use the following cooling eye-water: Take sugar of lead, and 
 sulphate of zinc, of each half a drachm ; common salt and loaf-sugar, 
 of each one drachm, or a teaspoonful ; rain water, half a pint ; let 
 stand, shaking occasionally, two days; then strain or filter through 
 white flannel, — when it is ready for use. Wash the eyes with this, 
 two or three times a day. An excellent eye-water is also made, by 
 steeping half an ounce each of good green tea and Yellow root, 
 (Hydrastus canadensis), in a pint of boiling rain water. You may 
 add to it, a drachm of sulphate of zinc. When cold, strain through 
 white flannel. 
 
 Give an active purgative, which should be repeated every two or 
 three days. Continue the washes through the day, and the poultices 
 at night. 
 
 Chronic Sore Eyes. Where inflammation of the eyes has been 
 neglected, or has existed for a long time and become chronic, it will 
 be well to give a cathartic once or twice a week, and apply to the 
 edges and internal surface of the eye-lids, the following Ointment: 
 Take fresh (unsalted) butter, two ounces ; white wax, two drachms ; 
 melt these together in a saucer or earthen vessel (but do not make 
 very hot), and when nearly cold, stir in half a drachm each of red 
 precipitate and finely pulverized sulphate of zinc, and incorporate or 
 mix well. Apply a little of this twice a day. Either of the eye- 
 waters above named may also be used, and occasionally at night, an 
 elm poultice, if much inflammation. 
 
 The following is also an excellent remedy in chronic sore eyes : 
 Dissolve half an ounce of gum camphor, in two ounces of pure 
 Turkey oil; a few drops of alcohol must first be poured on the cam- 
 phor to make it pulverize, then (when pulverized in a mortar), add 
 the oil, and rub in the mortar till dissolved. Anoint with this, two 
 or three times a day. 
 
 Scrofulous Sore Eyes. Chronic sore eyes is very often owing to 
 a scrofulous condition of the system. In such cases, only the lids 
 will be affected ; the edges very red, and sometimes turned out, and 
 it may be ulcerated. If the affection is owing to a scrofulous dia- 
 thesis, as it is called, the above ointment should be used, and a course 
 of treatment adopted, calculated to remove the scrofulous taint from 
 the system. The following syrup should be used : Take of Yellow 
 parilla root. 2 lbs; Burdock and Yellow dock root, each 1 lb; bark 
 of the root of Bittersweet and Sassafras, each half a pound; May- 
 
822 INFLUENZA. 
 
 apple and Blood root, each about two ounces ; bruise, and boil the 
 whole in five or six gallons of water, down to one gallon ; add, while 
 hot six pounds of white sugar, strain, and bottle for use. To each pint, 
 add half a drachm of hydriodate of potash, dissolved in an ounce or 
 two of water, and take a wineglassful three times a day. It will be apt 
 to keep the bowels loose enough, and will act as a powerful alterative 
 and cleansing medicine to the whole system. 
 
 INFLUENZA. 
 
 This disease is characterized by an increased secretion of mucus 
 from the membranes of the nose, mouth, and bronchial tubes, 
 attended with sneezing, cough, thirst, fever, and loss of appetite. 
 
 Causes. It is generally epidemic, or endemic, prevailing through- 
 out a certain district, and affecting usually a large proportion of the 
 inhabitants ; hence it is supposed, in such cases, to be owing to a 
 certain peculiar condition of the atmosphere at the time. When it 
 appears in a mild form, it is not considered dangerous; but when it 
 rages as an epidemic, with highly inflammatory symptoms, and is not 
 attended to in time, unfavorable and sometimes fatal consequences 
 may result. 
 
 Symptoms. The disorder usually commences with sneezing, cough- 
 ing, and chills succeeded by heat, hoarseness, sore throat, followed 
 with pain or soreness in the lungs, and stomach. There will be 
 increased expectoration of mucus, running at the nose, pain in the 
 chest, back, shoulders, and head, especially in the forehead. The 
 eyes become red and bloodshot, and there is general debility and 
 weakness. 
 
 Treatment. Let the patient drink freely of boneset and hoar- 
 hound tea, bathe the feet two or three times a day in warm ley 
 water, and take the vapor bath once a day, and a very few days will 
 generally suffice to break it up. If there is much difficulty in expec- 
 torating, or in breathing, give occasionally a teaspoonful of tinctures 
 Lobelia, Blood root, and wine of Ipecac. 
 
 For cough and sore throat, give the following : Take a teacupful 
 of good vinegar, add half as much honey, and a heaping teaspoonful 
 of Cayenne ; simmer a few minutes over the fire, and when cold, give 
 a teaspoonful occasionally, or whenever the cough is troublesome. It 
 is a splendid remedy, and acts almost like a charm. A purgative 
 should also be given. 
 
QUINSY, OR INFLAMMATORY SORE THROAT. 823 
 
 QUINSY, OR INFLAMMATORY SORE THROAT. 
 
 This is-a disease of the tonsils and mucous membrane of the throat. 
 It is most common among young persons. 
 
 Causes. The most common causes are a sudden cold ; check of per- 
 piration ; wet feet, damp beds, moist, cold air, and the like. The 
 disease generally occurs in the spring, and sometimes, like influenza, 
 prevails as an epidemic. 
 
 Symptoms. The more common symptoms are, sore throat ; diffi- 
 culty, with pain, in swallowing ; redness and swelling in one or both 
 of the tonsils; dry throat; foul tongue; hoarseness; difficulty in 
 breathing, and more or less fever. 
 
 As the disease advances, the throat swells, and swallowing and 
 breathing become more difficult; the dryness of the throat and thirst 
 increases; the tongue swells, covered with a dark, crusty coat ; the 
 pulse is full, hard, and very frequent; hearing becomes impaired, 
 sometimes complete deafness occurs, owing to the swelling of the 
 tonsils, or as they are sometimes called, the " almonds of the ears." 
 Sometimes the throat swells so that swallowing is almost impossible, 
 and the patient is threatened with suffocation. The disease generally 
 terminates in resolution; that is, it gradually yields and goes away; 
 but it sometimes ends in suppuration, or, gathers and breaks. 
 
 Treatment. In the early stage of quinsy it is best to give an 
 emetic. Let it be of Lobelia, or Lobelia and Ipecac combined. This 
 forms the common emetic, and there is none better, nor so good. Let 
 the patient, while taking the emetic, drink warm sage tea. Sage is a 
 sort of specific in this disease. 
 
 Boil for half an hour a handful each of hops, wormwood, sage, 
 boneset, hoarhound, catnip, or at least three of these articles ; and 
 let the patient steam his throat over them, as the hot vapor rises. 
 Put some of the same in a coffee pot. with some vinegar added, and 
 let him inhale the vapor into the mouth, throat, and lungs, as warm 
 as he can bea.r. This will give immediate relief. 
 
 As an external application, make the following liniment : Take oil 
 of sassafras, sweet oil, spirits of hartshorn, spirits of camphor, oil 
 of pennyroyal, tincture of Cayenne, and spirits of turpentine, of each 
 one ounce. Bathe the neck and throat with this, frequently, and 
 apply a piece of flannel around the neck. 
 
 The following gargle is also excellent, and should be used, or some- 
 thing similar to it: Take a small handful of sage, and as much sumach 
 berries or bark; boil in three pints of water down to one ; then add 
 
824 PUTRID SORE THROAT. 
 
 a heaping teaspoonful each of pulverized alum, borax, and saltpetre, 
 strain, and sweeten with honey. Gargle the throat with this fre- 
 quently, and occasionally let the patient swallow a little of it. Indigo 
 water is also a good gargle ; so is a decoction of sage and vinegar, 
 with a little borax dissolved in it. 
 
 An old and infallible remedy, if the throat and tonsils are much 
 swollen, is to simmer a quantity of sage in a little hogs' lard, and 
 give the patient from a teaspoonful to a tablespoon ful, three or four 
 times a day, as warm as can be borne. This is also good to apply 
 externally, mixed with a roasted onion poultice. 
 
 The principal danger in this disease is from suffocation, caused by 
 swelling of the throat. 
 
 It will be well to repeat the emetic ; and if the throat is much 
 swollen, give it slow, in small doses, to relax the system; after which, 
 give in larger quantities. 
 
 Cathartics should also be given, and the feet frequently bathed in 
 warm water. 
 
 PUTRID SORE THROAT. 
 
 This disease differs from quinsy in the fact that there is not so 
 much swelling in the throat, and consequently not that difficulty in 
 swallowing. There are also cankers, sores, and ulcers in the back 
 part of the mouth and throat. It is attended., also, with more or less 
 fever, chilly sensations, hoarseness, and sometimes vomiting and 
 purging. The disease is sometimes very malignant and dangerous ; 
 the ulcers change from an ash-color to a livid, and then to a black ; 
 when, if not checked, putrid symptoms appear, followed by gangrene, 
 resulting in death in a few days. The symptoms are very similar to 
 those in malignant scarlet fever. 
 
 Causes. The cause of this disease is supposed to be a specific con- 
 tagion. At any rate it is often communicated in this way. It will 
 also arise from cold and exposure, in persons predisposed to the 
 disease. 
 
 Treatment. This is a dangerous disease; and yet, if properly 
 treated, is very easily cured. 
 
 In the early stage, give an emetic; and if the bowels are not 
 already quite loose, a cathartic also. 
 
 Bathe the throat externally frequently with No. 6, or tincture of 
 M} T rrli and Cayenne. The same liniment recommended for quinsy 
 may also be used. 
 
BRONCHITIS — ACUTE FORM. 825 
 
 The patient should frequently swallow a spoonful of itop yeast; and 
 if the pulse sinks, and the patient becomes very weak, the system 
 may be stimulated by giving also some porter, ale, or strong beer. 
 
 As a specific, take a tablespoonful of Cayenne, as much common 
 6alt, and simmer them a few minutes in a pint of water and good 
 vinegar, equal parts; when cool, strain, and give of this a tablespoon- 
 ful once an hour. 
 
 A plaster of the common rosin soap is very good to apply warm 
 on the throat. 
 
 The following gargle should also be used: Take sumach berries (or 
 the bark of root), white oak bark, red elm bark, and blackberry 
 root, a handful of each; make a strong decoction; add to a pint a 
 lump of alum the size of a walnut, and when cool, strain, and use it 
 as a gargle, and apply it to the ulcers, frequently. It is an infallible 
 remedy. 
 
 BRONCHITIS— ACUTE FORM. 
 
 This is an inflammation of the lining membrane of the bronchial 
 tubes,, or air passages. Persons who are in the habit of speaking 
 much, or singing, are very liable to it, especially in cold weather,' or 
 changeable climates. It may be either acute or chronic. The causes 
 are the same as those of inflammation of the lungs, and, where there 
 is a predisposition to it, long and loud speaking or singing may bring 
 it on. 
 
 Symptoms. Acute bronchitis usually commences with a cold, slight 
 cough, chilliness, oppression and tightness of the chest, and some 
 fever. As the disease advances, these symptoms increase, the breath- 
 ing becomes more difficult, with a sort of wheezing, and sometimes 
 hoarseness. At first the cough is dry, but after awhile there is a 
 copious secretion of tough, white mucus thrown up, which sometimes 
 changes to a yellowish or greenish color. There is usually severe 
 pain in the head; the tongue is covered with a white, mucous coat; 
 frequent pulse, and dry skin. 
 
 Treatment. Our principal reliance in the acute or inflammatory 
 form of this disease should be on emetics; and probably the best 
 that can be used here is equal parts of the tinctures of Lobelia and 
 Blood root, given in tablespoonful doses every five minutes, with 
 some pennyroyal or boneaet tea, until thorough vomiting has taken 
 place. 
 
826 INFLAMED BKEAST. 
 
 In bad cases, apply bitter herb fomentations to the breast and 
 throat, and let the patient inhale the vapor into the lungs. 
 
 Give as an expectorant and diaphoretic, a tea of pennyroyal, 
 boneset, and Sanguinaria (Blood root) ; keep the bowels open with a 
 mild purge occasionally. 
 
 Chronic Form. Bronchitis often becomes chronic, as a sequel to 
 the aciyte form, or as the result of neglecting a bad cold. It is at- 
 tended with a troublesome cough, expectoration of a whitish frothy 
 matter, loss of appetite, a quick pulse, high colored and scanty urine, 
 and other symptoms more or less similar to the acute form. 
 
 Treatment. A mild emetic, same as for the acute form, given in 
 broken doses. Eepeat once a week. 
 
 Mild cathartics, sufficient to keep the bowels in a lax condition, 
 are also proper — such as pills made of the extract of white-walnut 
 bark, with a little powdered Mandrake and Blood root; or any good 
 vegetable purgative. 
 
 Let the patient bathe his feet frequently in warm water, at least 
 every night, and use the following preparation : Take the acetic tinc- 
 ture of Sanguinaria (Blood root tinctured in vinegar), tincture of the 
 Macrotys (Black Cohosh), tincture of Balsam Tolu, and wine of Ip- 
 ecac, of each one ounce ; sweet spirits of nitre, two ounces ; mix, und 
 take from one to two teaspoonfuls three or four times a day. AloO, 
 inhale the warm vapor of herbs, as hoarhound, tansy, catnip, dog- 
 fennel, and the like, and, to effect a radical cure, apply an irritating 
 plaster to the upper part of the breast, and wear it, occasionally 
 renewing it, for several weeks. 
 
 INFLAMED BREAST. 
 
 The breasts of women are very often the seat of painful inflam- 
 mation and swelling, which not unfrequently gathers and breaks. 
 Women are most usually subject to this distressing complaint during 
 the first weeks of nursing; and it is generally caused by taking cold 
 in the breast, and by a stoppage or retention of the milk. 
 
 Treatment. The best thing I have ever known to " scatter" the 
 swelling and subdue the inflammation, if not gone too far, is the 
 application of a mink skin. A fresh one is the best; but a dry one 
 will do, by being softened in warm water. Apply it, or enough of it 
 to cover the whole breast or mammary gland, with the flesh side 
 next the breast, and continue to wear it there for some days, except 
 
st. Anthony's fire: erysipelas. 827 
 
 when removed for the child to nurse, or to discharge the milk. It 
 will sweat out the disease. It should be perfectly soft and pliant, 
 and with the fur on. 
 
 An ointment should also be applied occasionally, made by frying 
 a little of the bark of Bittersweet root and Jimson leaves in some 
 lard. 
 
 If the swelling grows worse, and is likely to gather, a poultice of 
 powdered slippery elm moistened with warm ley water should be 
 applied. When it has come to a head, so that you can see that 
 matter has formed, it should be lanced ; but it is always best to poul- 
 tice and let it break of itself. After it is open, continue the poultice, 
 and wash the ulcer with the tincture of myrrh and aloes, occasionally 
 injecting some into the opening. A decoction of wild Indigo and 
 white oak bark is also very good as a wash. When the inflammation 
 has been subdued by poulticing, heal with some good salve. 
 
 In case you wish to dry up the milk of the breast at any time, 
 apply frequently a liniment of soft soap and spirits of camphor. 
 
 ST. ANTHONY'S FIRE: ERYSIPELAS. 
 
 This disease is characterized by a shining red inflammation of the 
 parts affected, accompanied with more or less swelling, and a dis- 
 tressing irritation, with a stinging, smarting, itching, burning sen- 
 sation. The irritation is sometimes so great as to almost set the 
 patient crazy. 
 
 It is generally superficial ; that is, affecting only the skin ; and 
 most usually attacks the face, ears, and head ; sometimes only the 
 feet, hands, and legs ; at other times it may appear on the back, but 
 may spread over most of the body. It occasionally becomes deejD- 
 seated, and is aj)t to gather and break ; it is then called phlegmonous 
 erysipelas. 
 
 In the progress of the disease, after a few days, especially where 
 it is confined to the face and head, it is apt to form a number of little 
 vesicles or blisters, containing a yellowish fluid, which will some- 
 times be thin and watery, and at other times tough and sticky, 
 adhering to the parts. Sometimes, in bad cases, these vesicles will 
 run together, forming a complete mass or scab; the face will be 
 greatly swollen, the eyes perhaps closed, and the patient will suffer 
 great pain in the head, with fever, thirst, restlessness, and perhaps 
 delirium. 
 
 When it appears on other parts of the body, it is not apt to form 
 
828 st. Anthony's fire: erysipelas. 
 
 blisters; but the burning and itching will sometimes be intense and 
 excruciating. It will remain on the surface a few hours, perhaps, in 
 red, burning spots, slightly raised or swollen, and then go in and 
 disappear for a while, often rendering the patient very sick at the 
 stomach; and then perhaps appear again, and so continue for several 
 days. It is a very distressing complaint, and when it affects the 
 face and head is often dangerous. 
 
 Causes. This disease undoubtedly arises from impurities and 
 humors in the blood, caused by morbid secretions being retained in 
 the system. This state of things may be induced by derangement in 
 the function of digestion; by suppressed perspiration; and by over- 
 heating the blood. It also arises from wounds and injuries some- 
 times, and it is then called traumatic erysipelas. In some persons its 
 attacks are periodical, coming on once or twice a year ; and persons 
 who have suffered from frost-bite are apt to be troubled with it in 
 the frost-bitten parts, during the winter and spring seasons. 
 
 Treatment. There is no doubt but the digestive apparatus is 
 more or less deranged in this disease; and this derangement may be 
 the exciting cause. It is always well, then, to commence the treat- 
 ment with a pretty thorough emetic. It will do good besides clean- 
 sing the stomach, by rousing the organs of secretion and excretion 
 to a more healthy action. 
 
 If the attack seems likely to be very bad, the vapor bath, or steam 
 ing over bitter herbs, should then be employed, and a thorough sweat 
 produced. After this a purgative should be given, such as the Anti- 
 bilious Physic, with double as much magnesia. The stomach will 
 generally be found in a sour, or acid condition, and for that reason 
 an ant-acid, as magnesia, or chalk, or bicarbonate of soda, should be 
 used freely. I prefer in this case the magnesia. 
 
 The vapor bath, or steaming, is very important; where the erup- 
 tion appears more or less over the body, and there is great heat, 
 itching and pain, it will generally give immediate relief, where every 
 thing else has failed. If the disease is located about the face and 
 head, the parts affected should be steamed over a decoction of bitter 
 herbs, as catnip, tansy, boneset, hops, etc., two or three times a day. 
 And in the mean time, apply over the affected parts a poultice of 
 cranberries, made by boiling a pint or two of the berries, soft, allowing 
 plenty of juice to remain ; then take about a teacupful, juice and 
 berries, mash, and mix in a little powdered elm bark, or a little wheat 
 bran, spread thin on a cloth, and apply. Renew two or three times 
 a day. The cranberry poultice, is considered by many a specific in 
 this disease. When it affects other parts of the body, bathing with 
 the juice or decoction of cranberries may be sufficient. 
 
st. axthoxy's fire: erysipelas. 829 
 
 If you should not be able to check the disease, and vesicles or 
 blisters should form, and ulceration take place, you must poultice 
 with elm bark and hop yeast ; and it would also be well to wash the 
 ulcers with a decoction of the wild Indigo, either of the root or leaves. 
 
 Yarious washes have been recommended to be applied to the 
 affected parts, either to cool down the inflammation, or kill the 
 humor. Among the best is equal parts tinctures Lobelia, Blood root, 
 add vinegar, to be applied three or four times a day. A decoction 
 of the common Smartweed (polygonum punctatum), and also of the 
 May weed (dog fennel), is highly recommended as a wash, to be used 
 cold. As a cooling wash, a solution of borax and sugar of lead, is 
 sometimes very good — two drachms of each to a pint of rain water. 
 These washes, of course, are to be used before vesication or blister- 
 ing takes place. 
 
 The patient, during the whole treatment, should drink freely of a 
 tea made of Burdock root, Sassafras bark, and Elder flowers. 
 
 In the chronic form of the disease ; that is, where it is known to be 
 in the system, by its appearing every few months upon some parts 
 of the body, in order to eradicate it from the system, and effect a 
 permanent cure, a course of constitutional treatment must be adopted. 
 Some good cathartic pills should be taken, one or two a day, to keep 
 the bowels loose. Also the following preparation ; take of the "VYild 
 Indigo root, Blood root, and Poke root, an ounce of each, dry, or 
 double the quantity if green ; Holland gin, or good whisky, one pint ; 
 let stand a week to form a tincture. Add to it two drachms of hydri- 
 odate of potash, dissolved in an ounce of water. Of this, take a 
 teaspoonful three times a day. At the same time make a decoction 
 of Yellow dock root, bark of the Bittersweet root, Sassafras root, and 
 Elder blossoms, and take a wineglassful three or four times a day. 
 This may be made into a sirup, if preferred, by adding, when hot, a 
 pound of white sugar to each quart. Bathe the whole surface two or 
 three times a week, in weak ley water, and avoid all spirits, malt 
 liquors, coffee, and every thing of a stimulating nature. This treat- 
 ment should be pursued, for at least a month or two. 
 
 In Traumatic Erysipelas, which rises from wounds, by appear- 
 ing on the edges of the wound, and spreading from there over the 
 surface. — touch the edges occasionally, with tincture Cayenne, or No. 
 6, to excite a healthy action, and poultice with slippery elm. If 
 there is appearance of gangrene, wash with a decoction of the Wild 
 Indigo, or Smart weed, and add some yeast to the poultice. 
 
 In Phlegmonous, or deep seated erysipelas, which generally appears 
 about the thighs, or hips, rely on poultices of elm bark and weak ley, 
 and repeated purgatives and emetics. 
 
830 BLACK TONGUE EEYSIPELAS. 
 
 BLACK TONGUE ERYSIPELAS. 
 
 This is an awful disease ; but fortunately does not occur very often , 
 When it does, however, it is generally as an epidemic, and proves 
 very fatal. It usually commences with a sore throat; soon the 
 tongue, throat, and whole neck begin to swell ; the tongue and inside 
 of the mouth turn black ; the outside of the neck becomes of a livid 
 purple, in spots, which gradually change to dark green, or black, 
 when, if relief is not soon obtained, mortification closes the scene, or 
 the patient dies from suffocation. 
 
 In this disease, the most thorough and vigorous treatment must be 
 employed from the very start. Thorough emetics of Lobelia, 
 repeated often, at least once a day; frequent doses of tinctures 
 Myrrh and Cayenne, or the No. 6. Myrrh is an antiseptic (anti- 
 mortification), and Cayenne a powerful stimulant — two things highly 
 essential in this complaint. Follow the emetic with an active 
 purgative. 
 
 Bathe the neck with a liniment composed of equal parts oil Sassa- 
 fras, oil pennyroyal, spirits turpentine, and tincture Cayenne, and 
 apply to the throat and neck a hot fomentation of Smart weed and 
 Dog fennel, made by boiling a handful of each, the whole to be put 
 in a thin cloth and applied to the neck as hot as can be borne. 
 When they become cool or dry, put them back into the same vessel 
 and decoction (which should be kept hot for the purpose), and 
 apply again, and so continue. The patient should also drink a little 
 of the same decoction occasionally, as warm as he can swallow it. 
 
 In case gangrene or mortification is threatened, apply to the neck 
 a strong ley poultice made with elm bark or bran, with a teacupful 
 of hop "yeast. The patient should also swallow a tablespoonful 
 of yeast every little while. After poulticing for a couple of hours, 
 change to the fomentations again, and so alternate. If you have, or 
 can get the Wild Indigo, let the patient take a tablespoonful of a 
 decoction of it once in two or three hours ; and also add some to the 
 poultice, and wash the neck with it occasionally. Pursue the above 
 course, in the most efficient manner, and you will seldom fail, if you 
 begin in time. Under the regular, slow, old school treatment, four 
 out of every five with this disease will die. The disease generally 
 occurs in the winter season ; hence you will see the propriety of 
 laying in a stock of medicines — of herbs and roots, at the proper 
 season — not only for this disease, but for others as well. 
 
CHOLERA MORBUS. 831 
 
 CHOLERA MORBUS. 
 
 This disease is characterized by vomiting and purging, with gri- 
 ping, pain and cramps in the stomach and bowels. It prevails gen- 
 erally during hot weather. The discharges from the bowels are at 
 first thin and watery, but after a little while they become more 
 bilious; the retching, vomiting, purging and pain, become more 
 severe and frequent, and during the intervals, there is great sickness 
 and distress in the stomach ; sometimes there are cramps in the 
 muscles of the abdomen and extremities. There is great thirst, and 
 desire for cold water ; but nearly every thing taken into the stomach 
 is thrown up in a very short time. As the disease advances, the pulse 
 becomes small and feeble, the extremities cold, countenance pale, 
 expressive of great distress, a cold sweat breaks out, succeeded by 
 great prostration. 
 
 Causes. Cholera morbus is more common some years than others, 
 prevailing sometimes as an epidemic, and seems to be owing to some 
 peculiar poison or acid generated in the system. When the tendency 
 to the disease exists, the use of indigestible and irritating food and 
 drinks, unripe fruit, or even ripe fruits that contain acid, or soon run 
 into a state of fermentation, vegetables, green corn, and the like, will 
 often bring it on. At such times, when the disease is known to be 
 prevailing, the daily use of antacids, especially of a little weak 
 white ley, will generally neutralize the poison acid in the stomach, 
 and prevent the disease. 
 
 Treatment. There is of course great irritability of the stomach, 
 the patient throwing up nearly every thing he swallows. A very 
 good thing to settle the stomach as well as to check the purging, in 
 this disease, is the following domestic preparation : Take ground black 
 pepper, a tablespoonful ; as much table salt ; half a tumblerful of 
 warm water, and as much good cider vinegar. Give of this, a table- 
 spoonful (to an adult), every minute or two, stirring the mixture 
 each time, till the whole is taken. The first tumblerful may be 
 vomited up : if so, repeat the dose. It will seldom be vomited the 
 second time. This is also an admirable remedy in Cholera. It may 
 be relied on in Cholera morbus, and in genuine Cholera — if taken at 
 the commencement; and, I have cured Cholera with it, alone, when 
 the patients have been in a state of collapse. 
 
 A tablespoonful of black pepper boiled in half a pint of milk, and 
 given gradually in small doses, will sometimes quiet the stomach ; so 
 will peppermint tea with a little saleratus dissolved in it. But if all 
 efforts of this kind fail, give an emetic of Lobelia and Ipecac. After 
 
832 CHOLERA MORBUS. 
 
 which, as soon as the stomach is sufficiently quieted, give the Neutral- 
 izing powder, either in the form of powder, or in a liquid state. If in 
 powder, about an even teaspoonful to an adult, every half hour, or 
 hour, if in liquid, take an ounce of the powder, and add half a pint of 
 boiling water, sweeten with loaf sugar (and you may add a little good 
 brandy), and give a tablespoonful once an hour. This is to be con- 
 tinued till it acts upon the bowels, and the discharges are changed in 
 color and consistence, after which it can be given less frequent. 
 
 At the same time the feet and legs should be bathed in warm ley 
 water, — after which a mustard plaster should be applied over the 
 stomach. It is a good plan also, to apply a warm fomentation of 
 hops and vinegar to the bowels, or cloths dipped in the decoction of 
 the same. 
 
 In making an infusion of the Neutralizing powder, as directed, it 
 may be improved by adding to it a dozen powdered cloves, and a little 
 cinnamon bark. These are both good astringents, and are also calcu- 
 lated to quiet the stomach. If there is much pain in the bowels, 
 thirty or forty drops of laudanum may be given also (to an adult), 
 and repeated in an hour or two if necessary. 
 
 Endeavor to produce and keep up a perspiration, by the use of 
 sweating teas ; the Diaphoretic powders (see Table of Family Medi- 
 cines), and the employment of hot bricks, or external heat, about the 
 patient. 
 
 After the urgent symptoms have been allayed, and sufficient of the 
 Neutralizing physic has been taken to act upon the bowels, you may 
 give something more astringent. A strong decoction of burnt corn is 
 very good. Parched corn, ground in a coffee mill, and boiled in milk, 
 or in water, is a very good diet. So is parched or browned rice, and 
 then boiled soft. A strong decoction of the Blackberry root may be 
 made, to which some cloves and cinnamon have been added, and the 
 patient take half a teacupful, two or three times a day. Burnt Ehu- 
 barb, is also a splendid remedy in this and all bowel complaints. To 
 prepare it, burn an ounce or two of powdered Khubarb on a shovel, 
 or in an iron vessel, till it is quite black, stirring it the while, and 
 give of this to a grown person, from a half to dn even teaspoonful 
 three or four times a day. You may combine with it half as much of 
 the Diaphoretic powder. And after the first twenty-four hours, if the 
 patient is improving, or the discharges from the bowels are pretty 
 much checked, it would be well to add also to each dose, one-fourth 
 of a grain each of Podophyllin, and Sanguinin, and one half 
 grain of Leptandrin, until five or six doses have been taken. This 
 will excite a healthy action of the liver and secretions, and prevent 
 a sudden constipation of the bowels, which must be avoided, or 
 
CHOLERA INFANTUM. 833 
 
 inflammation may take place. A grain or two of Ipecac, may be 
 added to each dose, instead of the Diaphoretic powder. 
 
 Cholera Infantum. When this disease affects children, which it 
 often does during the summer months, it is usually called Summer 
 Complaint, or Cholera Infantum. There is generally not so much 
 Bickness at the stomach ; but the discharges from the bowels are fre- 
 quent, and usually of a watery, greenish, or white frothy character. 
 Sometimes, if neglected, it will run into dj'sentery, or bloody flux. 
 
 The Treatment should be about the same as directed for cholera 
 morbus, varying it according to age and circumstances. Rely prin- 
 cipally on the Neutralizing Physic, made into an infusion or syrup, 
 and given freely. After giving this for a couple of days, give also a 
 strong tea, or decoction of blackberry root, strawberry leaves and 
 root, cherry-tree bark, cinnamon and cloves, sweetened with white 
 sugar. The Geranium root (called alum root, crow -foot, etc.), is also 
 an excellent remedy in this complaint. An ounce of it, bruised or 
 powdered, may be boiled in a pint of sweet milk, and given three or 
 four times a day, half a teacupful at a time. The burnt Ebubarb 
 may also be given in small doses, with a little sirup or molasses. 
 But no matter what else is given, give occasionally of the Neutral- 
 izing Physic. Attend well to the skin ; bathe the child twice a day 
 in warm saleratus water, or weak ley, and rub the surface well, so as 
 to promote, if possible, a healthy action in the vessels of the skin. 
 Let the diet be light — as rice, boiled milk, with a little flour stirred 
 in it, and the like. 
 
 If the disease assumes the form of dysentery or flux, which will be 
 known by there being more or less blood mixed with the discharges. 
 and they will be small in quantity and more frequent — give the fol- 
 lowing: Take Podophyllin, two grains; Leptandrin, four grains; 
 Ipecac, four grains; white sugar, twenty grains; triturate the whole 
 well in a small mortar, till thoroughly mixed : divide into eight 
 equal powders, and to a child from two to four years old give one 
 every three hours till four powders are taken ; from four to six years 
 old. six of the powders, in the same way; over six years, all of them; 
 and under two years, two of the powders, divided into four doses. 
 They may be given in a little water, in a spoon. After these have 
 been taken, which will operate freely on the bowels, give the Neu- 
 tralizing Physic, and, if necessary, injections of cold water, and apply 
 cloths dipped in cold water, to the lower bowels and abdomen. A dose 
 of castor oil, with a few drops of spirits of turpentine, may also be 
 given. 
 
834 MILK SICKNESS. 
 
 MILK SICKNESS. 
 
 This is a peculiar disease, confined to certain districts of country 
 in the West and South. It is called milk sickness, from the fact that 
 it is generally, if not always, acquired from eating the milk, butter, 
 and cheese, which have been obtained from cows infected with some 
 peculiar poison, which they obtain either from drinking the water or 
 cropping the herbage in the infected districts. What this poison is, 
 no one as yet has been able to demonstrate. Some think it exists in 
 some undiscovered vegetable or plant; while others believe it to be 
 a mineral poison, existing either in the water in certain localities, or 
 in the earth, from whence it rises in the form of a vapor during the 
 night, and settles upon the grass which the cattle eat. My opinion 
 is that the latter theory is the true one; but then it is only an opinion, 
 for there is nothing certain known as to the real cause. 
 
 An attack of the disease is sometimes preceded for a few days by 
 a feeling of languor, lassitude, and general weakness, with a foul 
 tongue and very offensive breath ; but it very often comes on sud- 
 denly, and is characterized by severe vomiting, great thirst, and 
 burning at the pit of the stomach, and obstinate costiveness. It is 
 very difficult to cure, and often proves fatal. 
 
 Treatment. Prompt and efficient measures are required to cure 
 this disease. The most important object to be effected is an action 
 upon the bowels. The most obstinate constipation generally exists, 
 and it will require the most active and powerful measures to over- 
 come it. 
 
 In the early stage of the disease it is best to give an emetic; and 
 when I say " emetic," I always mean Lobelia and Ipecac. This will 
 have a tendency to settle the stomach for a while, so that it may 
 retain the cathartic medicine. There is often no better way — and 
 none so good — to settle the stomach and allay vomiting, than to give 
 a thorough emetic. 
 
 Next give some active, quick cathartic. There is probably nothing 
 better than the Anti-bilious Physic, with a little cream of tartar. 
 Apply at the same time a large mustard-plaster over the stomach; 
 and in half an hour after giving the physic, give a powerful injec- 
 tion, relaxant and cathartic, composed of a tablespoonful of the Anti- 
 bilious Physic, as much salt, and a teaspoonful of the emetic powder, 
 to which add near a pint of hot water, and as soon as cool enough 
 give it by means of a large syringe, and require the patient to retain 
 it as long as possible. If this does not move the bowels within an 
 
BILIOUS AND CRAMP COLIC. 835 
 
 hour after giving the physic, repeat the dose, following it with 
 another injection. Should these measures fail after repeated trials — 
 which they seldom do — give ten drops of croton oil — repeat the dose 
 every hour, and at the same time rub a teaspoonful of the oil upon 
 the abdomen, over the region of the bowels. You need not be afraid 
 to use the croton oil in this disease. A whole bottle has been given 
 in a single case, without producing any deleterious effects. But the 
 Anti-bilious Physic, or Jalap and Senna, will in most cases be suffi- 
 cient, with proper injections. 
 
 The bowels, when once opened, must be kept open, by occasional 
 doses of the Physic ; and an attempt should then be made to sweat 
 the patient. The vapor bath, with proper diaphoretic teas, and the 
 use of hot bricks, should be employed. If you can keep the bowels 
 open for two days, and give the patient a good sweat, you will cure 
 your case. 
 
 BILIOUS AND CRAMP COLIC. 
 
 Bilious colic, sometimes also called Cramp colic, is characterized 
 by excruciating pain in the region of the navel, thirst, feverish symp- 
 toms, vomiting of bilious matter, and costiveness. 
 
 The attack generally commences with a bitter taste in the mouth, 
 followed by vomiting of a yellow greenish matter. The bowels are 
 constipated; little or no discharge of urine; the pain about the 
 navel will sometimes shift from place to place; a sort of hoarseness 
 usually attends the patient throughout the disease, and more or less 
 fever. Sometimes there are cramps in the stomach and limbs. 
 
 Treatment. In two important respects — vomiting and costiveness 
 
 Bilious colic very much resembles the Milk sickness; and there- 
 fore is to be treated in a very similar manner. Endeavor to allay 
 the irritability of the stomach, by giving in small and frequent doses 
 peppermint tea, with a heaping teaspoonful of saleratus dissolved in 
 a half pint of it. Apply over the stomach and bowels a large mus- 
 tard plaster, wet with vinegar — first bathing the abdomen with spirits 
 of turpentine. If this does not stop the vomiting, give an emetic. 
 
 As soon as the stomach will retain medicine, commence giving 
 omething to move the bowels ; either the Anti-bilious Phj^sic, or the 
 following, which in this case is one of the best : Take Epsom salts, 
 eight ounces ; muriatic acid, two drachms, or two teaspoonfuls ; boil- 
 ing water, one pint; after it is cool, add half an ounce essence of 
 peppermint and as much essence of anise, to give it a flavor and make 
 53 
 
836 painters' colic. 
 
 it more palatable : Dose, a tablespoonful every half hour till it 
 operates, or the whole is taken. 
 
 After the mustard has been on as long as it can be borne, remove 
 it and apply constantly to the abdomen, flannel or other cloths, dipped 
 in hot water. This will have a soothing and relaxing effect. 
 
 If the costiveness is obstinate, and the medicine does not take 
 effect, active injections must be given, such as the Anti-bilious 
 Physic, emetic powder, salt, and a little Cayenne, with warm water 
 and hogs' lard. The bowels once open, keep them so, and produce 
 perspiration. 
 
 An excellent remedy in this disease, highly prized by some physi- 
 cians, is a saturated tincture of green walnuts, made by slicing the 
 walnuts when green, and adding enough whisky or dilute alcohol to 
 cover them, and let them digest a week or two. Dose a teaspoonful 
 every half hour, till relief is obtained. 
 
 PAINTERS' COLIC. 
 
 This disease differs somewhat from other species of colic, being 
 more violent, the costiveness more obstinate, and attended with more 
 or less paralysis of the bowels and muscles of the abdomen. It is 
 generally caused by inhaling the vapors arising from the different 
 preparations of lead, or from handling them : painters are most 
 liable to its attacks, hence the name of Painters' Colic. It is also 
 called Lead Colic, or Colica Pictonum. 
 
 The disease usually commences gradually, with pain in the stomach, 
 which extends downward into the bowels, centering about the navel, 
 and, in the more violent stages, shooting off from there toward the 
 sides of the abdomen, accompanied with spasms in the muscles and 
 intestines. There is usually sickness at the stomach, some vomiting, 
 thirst, anxiety, quick contracted pulse, pallid countenance, with the 
 most obstinate costiveness. As the pain increases, the muscles of 
 the abdomen' become contracted into knots, and very painful to the 
 touch ; the intestines seem also to be contracted, or so paralyzed that 
 nothing will pass them. There is great danger in this disease of 
 inflammation of the bowels, which soon runs into gangrene, and 
 destroys the patient. 
 
 Treatment. The treatment in this form of colic, should be very 
 similar to the bilious form. The first thing to be done, is to overcome 
 the constipation of the bowels. If there is vomiting, give medicines 
 to allay it. Then make use of strong purgatives, with hot fomenta- 
 
RETENTION OF URINE. 837 
 
 tions to the bowels. Narcotics and relaxants are also indicated, to 
 relieve the pain, and overcome the spasms. As a narcotic and ano- 
 dyne, use the extract of Hyosciamus ; take twenty grains, form into 
 six pills ; give one every two hours. At the same time give the 
 Anti-bilious Physic, and aid the operation with purgative, stimulating 
 and relaxing injections. A portion of the physic, with a little salt, 
 a teaspoonful of tincture or powder of Lobelia, and hot water, may 
 be used as the injection, to be repeated according to the urgency of 
 the case. Sometimes it will be well to add a little Cayenne to it. 
 Apply hot fomentations to the bowels, and if the physic does not 
 operate in two or three hours, give the Croton oil, three or four drops 
 at a time, in a spoonful of Castor-oil, or a little milk, and repeat 
 every two hours. Also rub a little of the Croton oil on the abdomen, 
 over the bowels. In other respects, treat the same as a severe case 
 of bilious colic. It is sometimes well to put the patient into a warm 
 bath, for half an hour, or even longer, in order to relax the muscular 
 system, and overcome the spasm of the intestines. After you have 
 got an operation on the bowels, you may give the following pills : 
 Extract Hyosciamus, forty grains ; Ipecac, twenty grains ; pulver- 
 ized Opium, ten grains ; Podophyllin-, ten grains ; make into twenty 
 pills, and give one every three or four hours. 
 
 .RETENTION OF URINE. 
 
 From various causes, as inflammation of the neck of the bladder, 
 of the prostate gland, from the effects of gravel, stricture of the 
 urethra, and the like, the urine is liable to be retained in the bladder, 
 or perhaps in some other of the urinary organs, either partially or 
 wholly, and thereby causing great distress. 
 
 Treatment. The following will generally be found sufficient in 
 all ordinary cases : Make a pint of strong Spearmint tea, add to it 
 half a gill of good Holland gin. and an ounce of spirits of Nitre ; let 
 the patient drink the whole of this, at three or four times within an 
 hour. Repeat the same within the next two hours, if the first is not 
 sufficient. Or take essence Spearmint, essence Juniper, and spirits 
 of Nitre, of each one ounce; give a tablespoonful every half hour 
 till relief is obtained. If there is much pain and suffering, add 
 twenty drops of laudanum to each dose, for three or four times. 
 
 At the same time let the patient sit over the hot vapor of bitter 
 herbs, with a blanket around the waist or shoulders, so that the steam 
 may be confined to the lower part of the abdomen and region of the 
 
838 INCONTINENCE OF UKINE. 
 
 bladder. After which let him go to bed, and apply a hot fomenta- 
 tion of the herbs, or cloths dipped in the water of the same, to the 
 lower abdomen, as hot as can be borne, renewing often. Continue 
 giving one or the other of the preparations I have recommended. 
 Or if you can not get them give freely of a strong tea of watermelon 
 seeds, or if not these, of pumpkin or cucumber seeds. 
 
 This course will generally succeed in a few hours, at most. But 
 if it fails, put the patient in a hot bath, or as warm as cau be borne, 
 for ten, fifteen, or thirty minutes. This, with the use of proper 
 diuretics, as spearmint, spirits nitre, a tea of melon seeds, cleavers, 
 and the like, can hardly ever fail. Opium, or laudanum should 
 always be given, if there is much pain. 
 
 Browned or parched egg-shells, finely powdered, and given in half 
 teaspoonful doses every hour, is said to be a specific. 
 
 If owing to severe stricture, or stone lodged in the neck of the 
 bladder, all these and similar measures fail — which they will not do 
 once in a hundred cases* — a catheter must be introduced ; in which 
 case it will be best to send for a physician, or some one who under- 
 stands using the instrument. 
 
 Should there be any inflammation or soreness in the parts, give 
 for a few days a decoction of Marsh mallow and Mullein, and pursue 
 a course similar to that recommended for inflammation of the bladder. 
 
 INCONTINENCE OF URINE. 
 
 By incontinence of urine, is meant an inability to retain it, or an 
 involuntary discharge of it. The difficulty mostly occurs in children ; 
 but sometimes adults are troubled with it. It usually occurs at night, 
 during sleep. There is also sometimes a constant disposition to void 
 the urine, every few minutes, owing to slight inflammation or irrita- 
 tion of the bladder or urethra. 
 
 Treatment. Where the difficulty is not dependent on the cause 
 just stated, it is usually owing to a lax and debilitated condition of 
 the parts, and must be treated with tonics and astringents, such as 
 act more or less on the urinary organs. 
 
 Take the muriated tincture of Iron, one ounce ; tincture of Canthar- 
 ides, half an ounce ; mix, and to a child give three drops for each 
 year of its age, three times a day, and let it drink of a cold decoction 
 several times a day, made of Cherry-tree bark, Bayberry bark, and 
 Dandelion root. 
 
GEAVEL. 839 
 
 Proper attention should be paid, to the skin. The difficulty is often 
 owing to checked perspiration, or an unhealthy condition of the 
 perspiratory function. The cold bath, or washing the patient in cold 
 water, should be employed morning and evening, and the patient, if 
 a child, should be made to void the urine just before going to bed. 
 The difficulty is often owing wholly to a neglect of this habit, and 
 consequently, to the carelessness of parents and those who have 
 charge of the young. 
 
 In all ordinary cases of incontinence of urine, whether in young 
 or old, the tincture of cantharides will generally be found sufficient. 
 To an adult, it should be given in ten to fifteen drops twice a day, 
 and to children less in proportion to age. 
 
 GRAVEL. 
 
 This disease is caused by a collection of sand, or the formation of 
 stone, or calculous substances, in some of the urinary organs, as the 
 kidneys, ureters, or bladder. 
 
 The agents which form the gravel or stone, are no doubt, originally 
 contained in what we eat and drink. When the system is in a 
 healthy state, and all the functions are duly performed, these calculous 
 substances pass off by the proper secretions ; but when, owing to 
 debility of the urinary organs, especially the kidneys, there is an 
 excess of what is called uric acid in the 8} T stem, a chemical union 
 takes place between it and the calculous particles, thus forming stone, 
 or larger particles, until sometimes these formations become too large 
 to pass off through the urinary ducts, and the consequence is, the 
 difficulty or disease known as gravel. The calculous body may lodge 
 in the kidneys, or in the ureters ; or it may pass down into the 
 bladder, and if not destroyed or removed, will give rise to inflamma- 
 tion in the part, and other distressing symptoms. 
 
 Symptoms. One of the leading symptoms in this disease, is a fre- 
 quent desire to void the urine. This is especially the case when the 
 gravel or stone is in the bladder. There is great irritation about the 
 neck of the bladder, which sometimes extends along the urethra. 
 
 If the stone is lodged in the kidney, there will be a fixed pain in 
 the small of the back, or region of the kidney ; sometimes acute and 
 severe. The severest pain, however, is generally experienced when 
 the stone is passing down from the kidney through the ureters to the 
 bladder, especially if it become lodged in its passage — so severe 
 
840 GRAVEL. 
 
 sometimes as to occasion fainting and convulsions. There is pain in 
 the loins, a numbness in the thigh on the side affected, often nausea 
 and vomiting, and suppression or retention of urine. The urine will 
 be of a brown red color, caused by a deposition of sand of that color, 
 which will settle at the bottom of the vessel — by which you may 
 readily distinguish the disease from mere inflammation of the 
 kidneys, or bladder. When the gravel or stone is lodged in the 
 bladder, there will be pain in that organ, sometimes very distressing, 
 accompanied with more or less inflammation, and an itching along 
 the urethra. When the person is voiding urine, the stream will some- 
 times be suddenly stopped for a spell, caused by the stone closing the 
 passage at the neck of the bladder. 
 
 Treatment. A fit of the gravel, particularly if the urine is 
 retained, or voided with difficulty, is to be treated the same as 
 directed for Eetention of Urine. If the pain is severe, as is generally 
 the case, give first of all an opiate j to a grown person, from forty to 
 sixty drops of laudanum ; and then make use of the measures recom- 
 mended for retention of urine ; suitable diuretics, warm fomentations, 
 and if need be, the warm bath. 
 
 As soon as the urgent symptoms have been relieved, a hydragogue 
 cathartic should be given ; the Anti-bilious Physic, or Podophyllin, 
 with cream of tartar. The patient should then take such remedies 
 as are calculated to destroy or dissolve the stone, and counteract the 
 tendency in the system to its formation. There are numerous reme- 
 dies recommended for this purpose. Among the best I know of, is 
 the following : Take half a pound of the root of Queen of the 
 Meadow (which may generally be had at a Botanic drug store), and 
 half as much Horsemint ; make a strong decoction by boiling two 
 gallons of water down to two quarts ; strain and add half an ounce 
 powdered Nitre (saltpetre) and one ounce Carbonate of soda. Take 
 of this half a teacupful three or four times a day. Also, take half 
 an ounce of Castile soap, and twenty drops oil of Juniper ; make into 
 sixty pills, and take two three times a day. 
 
 The juice of red onions is said to be a solvent for the stone. A 
 gill, or half a teacupful, is to be drank morning and evening, for 
 three days. 
 
 If there is inflammation of the bladder or kidneys, adapt the 
 treatment to the case, as recommended under those complaints. 
 
 There is an herb which grows in some parts of the West, perhaps 
 generally called Gravel root, which is said to be a specific in this dis- 
 ease, when used freely in the form of decoction. I am not acquainted 
 with it, but doubt not that it possesses valuable properties. 
 
EXCESSIVE FLOW OF URINE — DIABETES. 841 
 
 EXCESSIVE FLOW OF URINE— DIABETES. 
 
 This disease is characterized by frequent discharges of large quan- 
 tities of urine. It is usually attended with costiveness, voracious, or 
 increased appetite, and yet with great debility, emaciation, and more 
 or less hectic fever. The urine is generally sweet, containing a large 
 quantity of saccharine matter, or sugar. The quantity of urine is 
 often enormous, being greater sometimes than both the food and 
 drink taken into the stomach ! Patients have been known, in bad 
 cases, to pass three or four gallons of urine in twenty-four hours ! 
 
 Causes. The causes of this disease are not well understood. 
 There seems in some persons to be a hereditary predisposition to it. 
 It is probably owing mainly to a perverted or diseased action of the 
 kidneys. There appears to be a preponderance of saccharine matter 
 in the system, or a disposition to its formation, and a deficiency of 
 counteracting agents. Where a predisposition to the disease exists, 
 it may be induced by various causes — as exposure to cold and damp 
 air, a poor diet, venereal excesses, continued use of mercury, the ex- 
 cessive use of sugar, and such vegetables as readily form saccharine 
 matter ; anxiety, grief; and various diseases, as rheumatism, gout, 
 retrocession of cutaneous eruptions, etc. 
 
 Symptoms. The most striking symptom, especially in the earlier 
 stages of the disease, is an increase in the quantity of urine, accom- 
 panied, as a matter of course, with a frequent desire to pass it ; the 
 patient being often compelled to rise for that purpose two or three 
 times, or oftener, during the night. The disease is apt to come on 
 very insidiously and gradually, and may progress for months with- 
 out exciting much notice, until other symptoms begin to succeed. 
 
 The appetite is usually much greater than in health, sometimes 
 voracious ; while digestion is generally imperfect. There is apt to 
 be uneasiness in the stomach after meals, with flatulence, sour belch- 
 ings, and irregularity in the bowels. 
 
 Great thirst is a never-failing attendant. The patient wants to 
 drink nearly all the time, and this fact often attracts his attention 
 before he is aware of the true nature of his condition. 
 
 Perspiration is very imperfect, or totally suppressed; the skin is 
 dry and harsh ; the gums often redj swollen, and sometimes ulcer- 
 ated. The tongue is white and foul in the center, with red edges; 
 the mouth dry and parched, and the taste vitiated. 
 
 As the disease progresses, the patient complains of pain and weak- 
 ness in the loins, and region of the kidneys, followed with general 
 
842 EXCESSIVE FLOW OF URINE — DIABETES. 
 
 debility, swelling of the legs and feet, emaciation, hectic fever, cold 
 feet, sense of weight at the pit of the stomach, difficulty in breath- 
 ing, easily fatigued, with a tendency to sleep, general languor, and 
 depression of spirits. The disease, if not checked, may prove fatal 
 in five or six weeks ; but it usually runs longer, sometimes for sev- 
 eral years, before it wears out the constitution. 
 
 Treatment. Eestorative medicines constitute the principal agents 
 to be used in this disease. The following compound should be used : 
 Take Beth root, Black Cohosh root, Geranium root, and Cherry-tree 
 bark, say four ounces of each ; let the whole be powdered and well 
 mixed ; then take of the compound about half an ounce, pour on it 
 a pint of boiling water, stir, and when cold, drink that quantity 
 during each day, at intervals. Continue this throughout the treat- 
 ment, or till the whole is taken. 
 
 The following pills should also be taken, to act on the liver, skin, 
 and secretions: 
 
 Podophyllin, , , 10 grains. 
 
 Sanguinin, 20 do. 
 
 Cayenne, 40 do. 
 
 Ipecac, 20 do. 
 
 Make into 40 pills, with extract of Dandelion, and take one night 
 and morning. 
 
 Attend well to the skin : sponge the body all over every night, 
 with the warm alkaline or saleratus bath, and rub well. A strength- 
 ening plaster should be worn on the back, over the kidneys. 
 
 The following restorative bitters may also be used : Gentian, Spike- 
 nard, and Colombo roots, Chamomile flowers, Balm of Gilead buds, 
 and Peruvian bark — of each one ounce ; powder or bruise all, and 
 cover with three half-pints of boiling water ; when cool, add a quart 
 of good Holland gin, and take half a wineglassful three times a day. 
 If there are feverish symptoms, take a dose — ten grains to half a 
 teaspoonful — of the Diaphoretic powders at night. 
 
 If the patient does not improve under this treatment. in a couple 
 of weeks, give also an emetic once or twice a week, an active purga- 
 tive of Mandrake and Cream of tartar, and three pills night and 
 morning, composed of Cayenne and Quinine, each 30 grains ; extract 
 of Dandelion, one drachm ; make into 40 pills. After these are 
 taken continue the previous treatment. 
 
 Proper diet is an important matter. This should consist princi- 
 pally of fresh meats; beef is the best. Little or no vegetables; 
 avoid as far as possible every thing from which sugar can be ex- 
 tracted — and drink as little as possible. 
 
scurvy. 843 
 
 SCURVY. 
 
 This disease appears to consist in a vitiated state of the humors 
 or fluids of the system, tending to ulceration and decomposition of 
 the solid parts. 
 
 Causes. Scurvy, on land, prevails mostly in northern latitudes, 
 in low marshy districts, or near where there is a great deal of stag- 
 nant water, and is caused probably by cold, moist air. It is also 
 occasioned by long continued and constant use of salted provisions, 
 salt and smoked meats, to the exclusion of vegetables ; hence the 
 reason of its prevailing so much among sailors. It may also proceed 
 from the suppression of accustomed discharges, as the menses; and 
 from depressing passions. Neglect of cleanliness, confined air, un- 
 wholesome food, want of exercise, and any thing that tends to weaken 
 the system, or vitiate the fluids, may cause it. 
 
 Symptoms. Generally the first symptoms are softening, ulceration, 
 and bleeding of the gums, attended with an offensive breath, and 
 perhaps frequent bleeding at the nose. There will also be a feeling 
 of weariness, shortness of breath, and fatigue, after a little exertion. 
 As the disease advances, there will probably be swelling of the limbs, 
 or a wasting away, and yellowish, or livid spots will appear on the 
 skin, or scaly eruptions. The face is generally pale, or of a leaden 
 color. Finally other symptoms come on, as decay and looseness of 
 the teeth; hemorrhages of blood from different parts of the body; 
 obstinate ulcers; scaly eruptions all over the body; pains in the 
 breast and bones; hectic fever; and the patient is carried off by 
 dysentery, dropsy, or mortification. 
 
 Treatment. The only certain way of curing this disease is to 
 reverse, as far as possible, that state or combination of things which 
 produces it. Change the habits, locality, and diet of the patient. If 
 it is thought to proceed from a sedentary life, or depressing passions, 
 the patient should take daily exercise in the open air, or engage in 
 some out-door employment, and be placed amid associations calcu- 
 lated to divert the mind and inspire cheerfulness. If the disease has 
 been brought on by the long use of stale and salted provisions, the 
 proper remedy will be a diet consisting mainly of fresh vegetables. 
 fresh bread, milk, cider, and vegetable acids. If fresh vegetables 
 can not be had, then pickled vegetables are the next best. Sour 
 Krout is an admirable remed}'. As a drink, butter-milk, and the 
 whey of sour milk, are good. Cider vinegar is also of service, and 
 should be mixed with most of the food. 
 
844 RICKETS, OR CURVATURE OF THE SPINE. 
 
 Besides the diet, particular symptoms and conditions will require 
 particular treatment. For sore and ulcerated gums, use the compound 
 tincture of Aloes and Myrrh, as a wash ; or take Gum Myrrh, Aloes, 
 and extract Licorice, of each half an ounce ; pulverize, and add four 
 ounces or a teacupful of hot water, stir, and when cold put the whole 
 in a bottle, and add half a pint of good brandy ; let stand four or five 
 days, shaking occasionally, and then strain through flannel, and use 
 this as a wash to the gums and ulcers of the mouth and throat, three 
 or four times a day. 
 
 If there is diarrhea, or dysentery, use the Neutralizing Physic, 
 and other remedies suitable to that condition. If constipation, laxa- 
 tive medicines ; if pains in the bowels, fomentations, emollient poul- 
 tices, and anodynes, or opiates: if oppression in the chest and diffi- 
 culty of breathing, mustard plasters, and relaxing expectorants ; if 
 pains or contractions in the limbs, swelling of the joints, etc., steam 
 over bitter herbs, and use stimulating and emollient liniments, with 
 friction. If the skin becomes affected, with spots, scabs or scales, 
 wash the whole surface once a day with a water made acid with 
 vinegar or a little muriatic acid ; if ulcers form, apply a poultice of 
 yeast and elm bark, and heal with the green, or other good salve. 
 
 It will be well also for the patient to drink from a half to a pint 
 daily of a decoction of such articles as Burdock, Yellow parilla, Marsh 
 mallow, and Dandelion root. 
 
 RICKETS, OR CURVATURE OF THE SPINE. 
 
 This is a peculiar disease, seated principally in the bones, called 
 sometimes Disease of the Spine, and is owing to a deficiency of earthy 
 deposit in the formation and growth of the bones. It usually occurs 
 in children of a scrofulous constitution. Owing to the soft condition 
 of the bones, they are often not able to support the body, and more 
 or less deformity will occur ; it may be only a slight curvature in the 
 bones of the legs or in the back-bone ; but in bad cases, the deformity 
 is sometimes so great as to change the whole figure and appearance 
 of the person; the head becomes enlarged; the ribs too straight or 
 too much curved; the breast-bone rises or projects outward, and the 
 spine or back-bone will have two or three curves, shortening the 
 body to near one half its proper length, and otherwise distorting 
 its general appearance. The abdomen is sometimes greatly enlarged. 
 The skin and flesh become flabby, the body wastes away, and the 
 teeth become loose and drop out. 
 
LOCK-JAW — TETANUS. 845 
 
 Treatment. This disease is to be treated in the main as a case of 
 scrofula. If it is neglected long, it will be difficult or impossible to 
 prevent deformity ; but if proper treatment is commenced early, this 
 may be prevented. 
 
 The patient should be bathed or washed twice a day with salt and 
 water, and rubbed well, commencing at first with the water slightly 
 warm, gradually using colder each day, till it may be used quite cold. 
 Stimulating liniments should be applied to the spine and the joints, 
 once or twice a day, such as Linseed oil, oil Sassafras, oil Hemlock, 
 tincture Cayenne, and Gum Camphor, of each one ounce, or equal 
 parts. 
 
 It is also well to bathe the surface occasionally with astringent 
 tonics, as a decoction of White oak and Dogwood bark. 
 
 The patient must also take some good alterative and anti-scrofulous 
 remedy, such as a decoction or syrup made of the following : Yellow 
 dock root, one pound; Bittersweet, bark of root, and Yellow parilla 
 root, of each, half a pound; Blue flag root, one-fourth of a pound 
 and Blood root, two ounces; boil in two gallons of water down to 
 two quarts, strain, and while hot, add three pounces of white sugar, 
 and when cold, add one ounce of oil of Winter-green, cut in half a 
 pint of alcohol. Give of this from a tablespoonful to half a wine- 
 glassful three times a day, according to the age of the patient. If 
 less than two years old, a teaspoonful will do for a dose. 
 
 The patient should take frequent exercise in the open air; wear 
 loose clothes ; use a nutricious diet ; and, what is very important, be 
 made to carry something heavy on the head several times every day, 
 if nothing but a block of wood, or a stone. This is calculated to give 
 exercise and action to the muscles of the back, and to the spine itself, 
 and will, if continued, in a majority of cases prevent curvature of 
 the spine, and in many cases where the curvature is but slight, will 
 counteract and cure it. 
 
 LOCK-JAW— TETANUS. 
 
 This is a dangerous affection, and consists in a contraction of a 
 part or the whole of the muscles of the body ; but more especially 
 the muscles of the jaws. 
 
 Causes. It is almost invariably caused by wounds or injuries of 
 the tendonous portions of body ; though sometimes it will arise from 
 any wound, especially in warm climates ; and occasionally from other 
 causes. Punctured wounds, that is, such as are made with a pointed 
 
846 LOCK-JAW — TETANUS. 
 
 instrument, as a nail, are the most likely to induce lock-jaw; and 
 wounds in the bottom of the feet, or palms of the hands, where the 
 tendons are most numerous, are the most liable to bring it on. 
 Piercing the foot with a nail, by treading on it, is very apt to result 
 in lock-jaw, particularly if the wound is allowed to heal and close 
 at the surface before it has healed from the bottom. Any wound that 
 injures a tendon, and is allowed to heal at the surface speedily, may 
 induce the disease. 
 
 Symptoms. Lock-jaw sometimes makes its attack suddenly, very 
 soon after the injury; but more usually comes on gradually, begin- 
 ing with a slight stiffness in the back part of the neck, which in- 
 creases, rendering it difficult and painful to move the head. Next 
 there will be pain and stiffness at the root of the tongue, rendering 
 it difficult to swallow; tightness across the chest, and jDain in the 
 diaphragm, or just above the pit of the stomach, shooting through to 
 the back. Next a stiffness is felt in the muscles of the jaws, and 
 they soon become locked, so that it may be impossible to open the 
 mouth. There may or may not be contraction and stiffness in the 
 limbs and other parts of the body. 
 
 Treatment. First, as to preventing its occurrence. No wound, 
 where we have reason to believe the tendons have been injured, 
 especially in the bottom of the foot or palm of the hand, should be 
 allowed to close up and heal immediately; and particularly if it has 
 been made by a nail or other pointed instrument. If it is, it will be 
 almost sure to induce tetanus. Such wounds should be immediately 
 laid open with a sharp instrument or knife, and some caustic potash, 
 or lunar caustic applied, to produce a running sore; and then poultice. 
 Probably the best plan, where, for instance, a nail or pointed instru- 
 ment has been run into the bottom of the foot, is to immediately 
 open the wound a little at the surface with the point of a sharp pen- 
 knife or lancet, and push into it a small piece of nitrate of silver 
 (lunar caustic), about the size of a grain of wheat, or even larger, as 
 far as it will go, or a fourth to a half inch, and allow it to remain, 
 putting a little shoe-wax plaster, or a bandage over it. It will smart 
 and burn, but it should be allowed to remain till it dissolves and pro- 
 duces a sore. Then poultice, and keep the wound oj>en and running, 
 till it heals from the bottom, and there will be no danger. Where 
 the wound is large, incised, or lacerated ; that is, produced by cut- 
 ting or tearing, wash it, and inject into it a solution of nitrate of 
 silver, of the strength of about ten grains to an ounce of water. The 
 best poultice is made of weak ley and powdered elm bark. The 
 wound may also be washed with strong ley, or a solution of vegetable 
 caustic. 
 
SMALL-POX — VARIOLA. 847 
 
 Second. If lock-jaw has set in, or given symptoms of its ap- 
 proach, give Lobelia and Cayenne. Bring the patient as soon as 
 possible under the influence of Lobelia. To break the attack and 
 produce relaxation of the muscles, give strong tinctures of Lobelia 
 and Cayenne, two parts of the first and one of the latter, in table- 
 spooDful doses. If the jaws are set, and can not be pried open, open 
 the lips, and pour it down by the side of the teeth, then close the 
 lips, and it will find its way into the mouth and throat, and will 
 eventually overcome the spasm. Repeat this preparation until re- 
 laxation is produced ; and in severe cases, give injections of Lobelia, 
 Cayenne, and Laudanum. 
 
 As soon as the spasm is overcome, the patient should be steamed 
 over bitter herbs, or the vapor bath, and kept under the influence of 
 Lobelia. He should also drink freely of a decoction of the Nervine, 
 or Lady-slip per root. 
 
 It is also proper to give a Lobelia emetic, and occasionally a dose 
 of Laudanum. But rely upon the Lobelia; it is the best and safest 
 anti-spasmodic known. 
 
 SMALL-POX— VARIOLA. 
 
 This disease is too well known to need a particular description. It 
 is always caused, or communicated by contagion ; that is, caught 
 from others who have it. It is usually divided by medical writers 
 into two kinds, the distinct and the confluent; but they are both the 
 same disease, in different degrees of severity. The distinct form is 
 the mildest, where the pustules or scabs are fewer, distinct from each 
 other, and do not run together. On the other hand, it is said to be 
 confluent when the pustules, especially on the face, hands, and arms, 
 run together and form one continuous scab, and of course is much 
 more virulent and dangerous. 
 
 When the virus or contagion has once been taken into the system, 
 the disease can not be prevented; but it maybe greatly modified, 
 both by immediate vaccination, and by a course of diet and prepara- 
 tion of the system. It is, therefore, well to understand something 
 of the premonitory symptoms. 
 
 As soon as it is known that a person has been exposed to the dis- 
 ease, he should be vaccinated, even though he has been vaccinated 
 before. Vaccination will often modify the disease, if done at any 
 time before the appearance of the eruption on the surface. The 
 patient should also be put on light diet, should purge frequently, and 
 
848 SMALL-POX VARIOLA. 
 
 drink freely of sassafras tea, in order to thin the blood, and reduce 
 the system, all of which is calculated to render the disease lighter, 
 when it does come. 
 
 As a general thing, persons have the disease but once; it is very 
 contagious, however, and most persons that are exposed to it, if not 
 previously vaccinated, will take it. ^Occasionally an individual is 
 met with that seems entirely unsusceptible of taking it, though ex- 
 posed to it ever so much ; a few cases have also been known of per- 
 sons having the disease the second time. 
 
 Premonitory, or First Symptoms. Small-pox commences first 
 with chilly sensations, alternating with flashes of heat, and great 
 pain in the small of the back; with pain in the head, soreness of the 
 throat, dislike to motion, nausea, and perhaps vomiting, thirst, and 
 stupor. The disease approaches very much like an attack of the 
 ague, or chills and fever. The fever becomes more continuous, and 
 on the third or fourth day the eruption appears on the face, neck 
 and breast, in small spots like flea-bites, which increase for the next 
 four or five days ; during which time the eruption appears more or 
 less over the whole body. It is always worse on the face, and some- 
 times the eye-lids become so much swollen as to be entirely closed, 
 producing complete blindness for the time. About the eighth day 
 the process of suppuration, or formation of matter in the pustules, 
 is complete ; and about the eleventh, the inflammation subsides, and 
 the pustules begin to decline and dry up, and finally scale off, and 
 disappear about the fourteenth or fifteenth day. 
 
 Treatment. I suppose that in most cases of small-pox, a physi- 
 cian will be called. Yet I have no doubt that there are many old 
 ladies in the country, and some not so old, as well as non-professional 
 men, who can treat a case of small-pox as well as half the physicians. 
 It is a disease which requires mild treatment and simple remedies. 
 
 In the first stage, before the appearance of the eruption, you may 
 not be able to tell whether it is small-pox or some other febrile 
 disease ; but the treatment should be about the same in either 
 case. 
 
 Bathe the feet well in warm ley wafer, and if there is sickness at 
 the stomach, there is nothing better to allay it perhaps, than frequent 
 sups of warm spearmint or peppermint tea, with a little saleratus 
 dissolved in it. After bathing the feet as I have directed, — and it 
 will be well if you have washed the body all over with the same, or 
 with warm saleratus water — and if the nausea and vomiting are suffi- 
 ciently allayed, give a purgative. There is nothing better than the 
 Anti-bilious Physic. 
 
 After the bowels have been cleansed by the action of the Physic, 
 
SMALL-POX — VARIOLA. 849 
 
 should there be any sickness at the stomach, or vomiting, give a mild 
 emetic of Lobelia and Ipecac, or Ipecac alone, with Catnip tea. 
 
 Attention must now be paid to the skin. Such medicines must be 
 given as will act gently upon the skin and cutaneous vessels, but not 
 enough to produce copious or profuse perspiration. And this action 
 must be kept up, moderately, throughout the whole course of the 
 disease. 
 
 As a lea. which should be drank constantly, or at short intervals, 
 there is nothing better perhaps, than an infusion made of about two 
 parts of Catnip and one of Saffron — to be drank warm. It acts 
 gently upon the skin, produces a slight determination to the surface, 
 and will assist nature to throw out the eruption. A little Sassafras 
 bark is also a valuable addition to it. 
 
 The feet should be bathed for twenty or thirty minutes at a time 
 in ley water, as hot as can be borne, and the whole surface washed 
 with the same two or three times a day, previous to the appearance 
 of the eruption ; and it may be continued once or twice a day after 
 the eruption has appeared, until vesication or scabbing has taken 
 place. It is especially well to bathe and wash the bodj T with warm 
 water, if there is much fever and heat, notwithstanding the eruption ; 
 and a little saleratus, or common ley, should always be added to the 
 water; it helps to open the pores and keep the skin cleansed, by 
 removing the oily, sebaceous matter from the surface. 
 
 If there is great pain in the head, bathe it with vinegar and water, 
 and apply mustard plasters to the bottom of the feet, and the ankles. 
 
 To aid in removing the phlegm and mucus from the throat and 
 bronchial tubes, and for sore-throat, give occasionally a teaspoonful 
 or two of the Expectorant tincture (See Table of Family Medicines), 
 and also use as a gargle a decoction of sage, with honey and borax. 
 
 In bad cases, where there is a tendency to putrescency, the patient 
 should take half a teacupful of hop yeast three or four times a day; 
 and if there is great prostration, debility, and sinking, a little Quinine 
 or Peruvian bark should be given, in some whe} T , or buttermilk. 
 
 The DiapJioretic powders may be given in eight or ten grain doses, 
 two or three times in twenty-four hours, if there is much restlessness; 
 especially at night should a dose be given. 
 
 As a common drink, or infusion to be used all the while — previous 
 to the full eruption, as a sudorific, that is, to act gently on the skin, 
 — there is probably nothing better than a tea made of Sassafras bark 
 and Catnip. It should be taken warm, and a teacupful or two as 
 often as three or four times a day. It is especially good in bringing 
 out the eruption. A little saffron may be added to it, if convenient : and 
 if the Catnip can not be had, use Saffron and Sassafras. 
 
850 SMALL-POX — YAKIOLA. 
 
 After the eruption has appeared, the above infusion may be left 
 off, and the following used. Take, say an ounce of the powdered 
 root of the Macrotys (Black cohosh), to a pint of boiling water, and 
 give of the infusion one or two tablespoonfuls every three hours, 
 warm. This should be continued, with very little other medicine, 
 through the. second stage, or till the pustules begin to dry up, and 
 decline, and the patient begins to grow better. The Macrotys, or 
 Black cohosh, called also Eattle root, is an important remedy in small- 
 pox. The patient should be kept under the influence of it, from the 
 first appearance of the eruption, until he becomes convalescent and 
 out of danger. It keeps the eruption to the surface, prevents a retro- 
 cession or going in, and will bring out the eruption again, in case it has 
 gone in. The infusion of the root is perhaps the best form in which 
 to use it ; but if the root can not be had, the concentrated preparation, 
 called Macrotin, may be used in closes of a half, to a whole grain, 
 given three or four times a day. Or the tincture of the root may be 
 used in teasj)Oonful doses, once in three or four hours. 
 
 The bowels, of course, are to be kept open and in a lax condition ; 
 but no harsh or active purgative must be given. The best thing for 
 this purjDose is about two tablespoonfuls of sweet oil, to be taken every 
 night at bedtime, or a tablespoonful of sweet oil, and as much of the 
 Neutralizing cordial. 
 
 Should there be symptoms of Pneumonia, that is, should the lungs 
 become affected, as sometimes happens, give an emetic of Lobelia, 
 Blood root and Ipecac ; and keep the patient afterward under the 
 influence of the emetic, by giving occasionally teaspoonful doses of 
 equal parts of tinctures of Macrotys, Lobelia and Blood root; or the 
 same articles may be given in infusion, in tablespoonful doses. 
 
 If the face swells much, and there is much suffering on this account, 
 bathe it frequently with warm milk and water, and keep it well 
 lubricated with sweet oil. And to prevent pitting, that is, to prevent 
 the face, and other parts from being marked by the pox, cover the parts 
 with small pieces of silk, moistened with pure sweet, or olive oil, and 
 keep the room as dark as possible. Exclude the light entirely, if you 
 can, most of the time. Attend strictly to these directions, and you 
 may prevent pitting entirely, even in the worst of cases. It will also 
 be necessary, sometimes, to tie or confine the patient's hands, or he 
 may injure his face. 
 
 Pursue the foregoing course of treatment, and you will succeed in 
 nearly every case, I care not how bad it may be. Eely upon the 
 Macrotys: it is nearly a specific in this disease. By its use the secon- 
 dary fever , which is so much to be dreaded, and which is often so very 
 dangerous, in the worst forms of the disease, may generally be pre- 
 
SALIVATIOX — MERCURIAL DISEASE. 851 
 
 vented, or very much modified. The patient will also convalesce, 
 and gain his strength much more rapidly, after the disease has 
 parsed off, where this article has been freely used. 
 
 Sometimes, in the confluent form of the disease, the bowels become 
 affected with a putrescent diarrhea, tending to gangrene and morti- 
 fication. In such cases give powdered charcoal and nitre, or salt- 
 petre, a tablespoonful of the former and half a tcaspoonful of the 
 latter, at a time, three or four times a day ; also, plenty of hop yeast, 
 and occasionally a dose of sweet oil and spirits of turpentine. 
 
 In case the eruption should recede, or strike in, at any time during 
 the second stage, give the Macrotys freely, in larger doses, and 
 put the patient into a warm bath. The tincture of the Iris Yersa- 
 color (Blue Flag), is also good in such cases, given in teaspoonful 
 doses, every two or three hours. 
 
 Regimen. The patient should be kept cool, and as easy as pos- 
 sible. The diet of course should be light, such as corn-meal gruel, 
 buttermilk and water, mush and buttermilk, roasted apples, lemon- 
 ade, toast and water, and the like. The room should be kept well 
 cleansed and aired, the linen and bed-clothes changed often, and all 
 noise and disturbance, as far as possible, prevented. 
 
 Varioloid. This is a modified form of small-pox, modified by the 
 influence of vaccination. It is generally mild, and without danger, 
 and is to be treated the same as a case of genuine small-pox, only 
 that the treatment should be graduated according to the mildness or 
 severity- of the symptoms. Sometimes the disease is very mild, 
 requiring scarcely any treatment; at other times it approaches very 
 nearly to a genuine case of small-pox, and requires a full course of 
 treatment. 
 
 SALIVATION— MERCURIAL DISEASE. 
 
 This disease is caused by the use of Mercury in some form or 
 other; most usually as Calomel; and next perhaps in the form of 
 Blue Pill. It is too common, and too many have had painful experi- 
 ence from it, to need any description, more than to say that it con- 
 sists, in its primary effects, in a very sore mouth — sometimes, in bad 
 cases, attended with looseness and falling out of the teeth, swelling 
 of the tongue, ulceration of the throat, gums, and cheeks, and a pro- 
 fuse discharge of saliva or spittle. In its secondary, or constitutional 
 effects, the bones become affected and painful, and the patient suffers 
 more or less with what is termed Mercurial Rheumatism, and a gen- 
 eral debility and wasting away of the flesh, or emaciation. . 
 54 
 
852 NURSING SORE MOUTH. 
 
 Treatment. As soon as a person finds that he is salivated from 
 the use of Calomel or other preparation of Mercury, he should of 
 course stop taking it (if he has not already done so), and commence 
 taking sulphur and cream of tartar — two parts of sulphur to one 
 part of cream tartar, mixed in a little molasses or honey, so as to 
 form it into a kind of paste. A full teaspoonful of this should be 
 taken two or three times a day, or sufficient to operate slightly on 
 the bowels. Sulphur or powdered brimstone, should be used freely 
 in the mouth, so that it may come in contact with the parts affected. 
 
 In addition to this, if there is ulceration of the gums or mouth, 
 sprinkle occasionally a little powdered red chalk, or red keel, as it is 
 usually called, on and into the sores. It may generally bo had at a 
 drug-store. It is the best absorbent and remedy in such cases I have 
 ever found. 
 
 Cooling and healing gargles should also be used. The following is 
 good : Take about an ounce each of Sage, Privet leaves, and Yellow 
 root (Golden seal), and make a pint of decoction by boiling a little 
 while; then strain and add a teaspoonful of burnt alum, and as much 
 borax, and gargle and wash the mouth often with it. 
 
 In order to eradicate the mercury from the system, or where it has 
 become constitutional, producing mercurial rheumatism, and pains 
 in the bones, some powerful alterative should be taken, such as 
 a strong decoction of the roots of Burdock, Blue Flag, and Yellow 
 Parilla; about one pound of the Flag to two pounds each of the other 
 two; and to every quart of the decoction add a drachm of Iodide of 
 Potassium. Take a wineglassful three times a day, and continue its 
 use for several weeks. Keep the bowels open with a pill taken once 
 or twice a day, made of extract of Mandrake and powdered Blood 
 root, or half-grain doses each of Podophyllin and Sanguinin. 
 
 NURSING SORE MOUTH. 
 
 This is a disease which sometimes affects women during the period 
 of nursing, or suckling of the infant. It consists in a cankerous sore 
 mouth; the cankers or sores having a white grayish appearance. 
 They appear on the inside of the mouth and cheeks, and sometimes 
 the disease extends down the throat, even to the stomach and bowels. 
 It is a disease of the mucous membrane, which lines the mouth, 
 throat, and alimentary canal, and is mostly confined to mothers 
 while nursing. The child is also generally affected with it, the 
 disease resembles very much what is known as the thrush. It some- 
 
GOITRE — BIG-NECK. 853 
 
 times appears during the latter months of pregnancy; and I have 
 known a few cases where it did not seem to have any connection with 
 either pregnancy or nursing. In such instances the disease has 
 probably been caught from others, or has existed in the system a 
 oner Avhile, and become constitutional. 
 
 o 
 
 Causes. The disease is most probably owing to improper treatment 
 during or immediately after confinement — impurities that should 
 have been purged from the system, having been allowed to remain 
 and become mixed with the blood and other fluids of the system. 
 
 Treatment. The best remedy that I have ever found — and I have 
 never known it to fail — is the Iodide of Potossa, or Hydriodate of Pot- 
 ash, as it is sometimes called. Take two drachms of this and put it 
 into a small glass bottle, and add four ounces of rain water, and take 
 a teaspoonful twice a day. This quantity will generally be sufficient 
 to cure the case ; but if it is not, a second bottle should be taken, 
 in the same way. 
 
 Astringent and cleansing gargles should be used, such as recom- 
 mended for mercurial sore-mouth, or salivation; or a decoction of 
 JBayberry bark, Yellow root, and Sumach berries (or bark), with a 
 little burnt alum and borax added. In case there is a diarrhea, as 
 there will be if the disease extends to the stomach and bowels, the 
 patient may also take two or three times a day a tablespoonful of 
 this decoction, and once in two or three days a dose of the Neutral- 
 izing Physic. 
 
 If the patient is nursing, the child should be weaned, as it is almost 
 impossible to effect a cure while it continues to nurse. If it has the 
 disease also, the same remedies may be given it, in properly reduced 
 quantities. 
 
 GOITRE— BIG-NECK. 
 
 This is an enlargement of the thyroid gland, which is situated in 
 front of the neck, or wind-pipe. The affection is also called Bronchocele, 
 and in common language. Big-neck, and sometimes Derbj'shire-neck. 
 It only affects females — girls and women — and is not to be considered 
 dangerous, though it is often troublesome, and sometimes greatly dis- 
 figures the neck, on which account it is very much detested by those 
 who are troubled with it. There is no particular cause that can be 
 assigned for it, any more than it seems to be hereditary or constitu- 
 tional in some families. 
 
 Its cure is very difficult, slow and tedious, and perhaps can never 
 
854 TETTER, OR SALT RHEUM. 
 
 be entirely removed by medical treatment; though it may generally 
 be greatly relieved. 
 
 Treatment. The chief reliance is upon external applications, in 
 the form of washes and ointments. The best I have ever found for this 
 purpose is made as follows : Take Iodide of Potassium, one drachm ; 
 Iodine, ten grains; simple cerate, or lard, one and a half ounces; 
 mix the whole well into an ointment, and rub a little on the enlarge- 
 ment once or twice a day, and wear a flannel round the neck. The 
 ointment, owing to the Iodine, will color the neck for the time being; 
 but this may be endured for the sake of the good it will do. The 
 color will gradually disappear after ceasing to use the ointment. It 
 should be continued, however, for several weeks, or at least until the 
 quantity named has been used. If it should produce excoriation or 
 soreness of the skin, omit it for a few days. 
 
 At the same time the neck should be washed once or twice a day 
 in strong salt water. The patient may also take the same articles 
 used in the ointment, in the following way : Take Iodide of Potassa, 
 one drachm; add half an ounce, or about two tablespoonfuls of water, 
 to dissolve it; then add to it one ounce of tincture of Iodine; com- 
 mence by taking ten drops of this at a dose, once a day, increasing 
 one drop every day until you get to twenty; and then continue a 
 that till the whole is taken. It can be taken in sweetened water, or 
 any other medium desired. Small doses of Mandrake, Blood root 
 and the Iris, or Blue Flag, may also be taken, once a day, sufficient 
 only to keep the bowels slightly loose, and to act on the glandular 
 system. They may be taken either in pills, powders, or tincture ; or 
 the Podophyllin, Sanguinin, and Iridin may be used, being preferable 
 on account of the smallness of the dose. In this case, take about 
 half a grain of each once a day, combined with as much pulverized 
 white sugar. 
 
 TETTER, OR SALT RHEUM. 
 
 This is an inveterate and very troublesome eruption, or " breaking 
 out," which appears on different parts of the body, but most com- 
 monly on the backs of the hands, or on the face. It appears usually 
 in very small vesicles, which break and discharge a thin, corrosive, 
 and irritating fluid, attended with severe itching. Sometimes scabs 
 form upon the affected parts, which, after a time, dry up and scale 
 off, or disappear, to be succeeded by others. The affection is too 
 common and too well known to need any further description. It may 
 
POISOX FROM THE WILD IVY. 855 
 
 be proper to state, however, that there are several kinds of tetter, as 
 the dry fetter, which is the most common and simplest form of the dis- 
 ease ; the pustulous variety, which appears at first in the form of sep- 
 arate pustules, which gradually run together and form clusters: the 
 miliary tetter, which appears indiscriminately over the body, but most 
 usually on the breast, or about the groins and scrotum ; and the eat- 
 ing, or corroding tetter, which appears usually in the form of small and 
 painful ulcerations, which run together and collect into larger spots, 
 accompanied with more or less inflammation, and discharge large 
 quantities of thin, watery matter. The treatment in either variety, 
 however, should be about the same, except that for the mild or dry 
 form, nothing but external applications will be required; while in 
 the others it may also be necessary to make use of some alterative 
 or constitutional treatment. 
 
 TpcEatmext. In the first place, wash the part affected with the 
 following : Take an ounce or two each of Yellow dock root and Blood 
 root, mash or bruise, and put to them half a pint of alcohol and as 
 much good vinegar ; let stand a week or two to digest. This should 
 be applied once or twice a day, and the following ointment applied 
 as often: Take fresh butter, four ounces; Yenice turpentine, one 
 ounce, and Red Precipitate (Red Oxide of Mercury), three drachms; 
 mix the whole together well, and apply a little to the part affected, 
 once or twice a day, after washing with the tincture I have named. 
 This ointment will cure any tetter, even without the use of any thing 
 It will also cure Ringworm, and any kind of Itch. 
 
 The following is also a valuable remedy for tetter and ringworm : 
 Take equal parts, say one ounce each of tinctures Lobelia, Cayenne, 
 and Stramonium (Jimson) seeds, and Oil of Amber; mix, and wash 
 the parts two or three times a day with it. 
 
 In case it is necessary to use an alterative, to purify the blood, 
 make a strong decoction of the roots of Burdock, Yellow dock, Yel- 
 low parilla. and Sassafras bark, and to each pint of it add one drachm 
 of Iodide of Potassa: Dose, a wineglassful, morning and evening. 
 
 POISOX FROM THE WILD IVY. 
 
 The poison Rhus, or Wild Ivy, commonly called Poison Yine, grows 
 very common in some parts of the Western country, and some people 
 are very liable to become poisoned with it, whenever it comes in con- 
 tact with them. Many persons are entirely unsusceptible to its poi- 
 son, and can even handle it without experiencing any evil effects from 
 
856 SNAKE BITE. 
 
 it whatever ; while others are so susceptible to its influence that they 
 will be affected by it by merely coming into its immediate vicinity, 
 especially while the dew is on and the air moist; and if they touch it, 
 are sure to be poisoned. It most usually affects the hands and face, 
 and in severe cases resembles a bad case of erysipelas, swelling the 
 face very much, even to the closing up of the eyes; blisters raise 
 upon the skin, from which a thin, yellowish fluid exudes, and the 
 patient suffers very much. It may extend to any other part of the 
 body with which the poison is brought in contact. Cases have been 
 known where it has disfigured the face worse than small-pox does, 
 and partially destroyed the eyes, and even produced death. 
 
 Treatment. I regard sweet, or olive oil, as an antidote to this, as 
 well as to most vegetable and animal poisons. It is to be taken freely, 
 internally, from a half to a pint, or more, in a day. If the case is a 
 bad one, let the patient take about two ounces at a time, every two 
 hours, till at least a pint has been taken. At the same time bathe 
 the face, hands, and parts affected, with sweet oil, and cover with 
 bits of silk or thin muslin. 
 
 The bowels are apt to be costive, and if the oil does not. operate 
 within twelve hours after commencing to take it, give a dose of the 
 Anti-bilious Physic, or a grain or two of Podophyllin, with a little 
 cream of tartar. 
 
 Kepeat the oir next day, and the next, if thought necessary, or 
 until the disease and swelling begin to recede and give way. There 
 is no danger in the sweet oil ; it may be taken freely, even to a quart 
 a day; and may be relied on as an infallible remedy. 
 
 If ulcers or sores form, wash them out with a strong solution of 
 potash. Get a little -pure potash, and moisten it with just enough 
 water to dissolve it, and drop a little of this into the sores, and wash 
 the surface with it, by means of a brush or feather. If there is much 
 swelling, or inflammation and pain, apply a poultice of elm and sweet 
 milk. Keep the bowels loose, and occasionally give a dose of the 
 Diaphoretic powders, to keep up a determination to the surface. But 
 rely on the sweet oil. 
 
 SNAKE BITE. 
 
 The symptoms attending the bite of the venomous reptiles, as the 
 rattlesnake, the moccasin, and the copper-head, are such as not to be 
 easily mistaken, and generally commence to exhibit themselves very 
 soon after the bite. They are nausea and vomiting; swelling.com- 
 
SNAKE BITE. 857 
 
 mencing in the part bitten, and extending more or less rapidly over 
 the whole body; full, strong, excited pulse; the eyes become blood- 
 shot; sometimes there is bleeding from the nose, mouth, and ears; 
 and, in extreme cases, a bloody sweat breaks out; great pain all 
 through the body, and extreme suffering. These are the symptoms 
 of a bad case. Some persons seem to be much less susceptible to the 
 poison than others. In such the symptoms approach more gradually; 
 and if the bite has been in the foot or hand, the swelling may not 
 extend beyond the limb that is bitten. But the bite of the more 
 venomous snakes, such as I have named, is always to be regarded as 
 dangerous. 
 
 Treatment. The first thing, if it can be done immediately after 
 the bite, should be to draw a cord tightly around the leg or arm fif 
 the bite has been on either), a short distance above the place bitten. 
 The cord or ligature should be drawn tight enough to prevent the 
 blood from circulating in the veins, which will tend to check absorp- 
 tion, and prevent the poison from passing into the system. Then 
 bruise two or three onions, and mix with them a handful of salt, 
 and apply this over and around the part bitten, first scarifying or 
 enlarging the wound with a sharp instrument, or penknife. It would 
 also be well to open a vein near the bite, or at least below the liga- 
 ture or cord, so as to let out as much of the poisoned blood as pos- 
 sible. This you can readily see is highly important. The blood 
 which has been stopped by the ligature has of necessity become 
 charged with the poison, by absorption ; hence if it is allowed to 
 pass into the body, as it would do as soon as the ligature was re- 
 moved, it would poison the whole circulation. Let it out if you can, 
 but do not remove the ligature, so long as the patient can bear it, 
 unless you see that the swelling has extended above and beyond it. 
 In that case the ligature can do no more good. Continue the onions 
 and salt, renewing them often. The juice and bruised leaves of the 
 common yard plantain are also good to apply to the bite. 
 
 Internally, give the patient all the whisky he, can drink- -by which 
 I mean all he can hold! From a quart to a gallon should be drunk in 
 six or eight hours. You need have no fears of making the patient 
 drunk. You may fill him with whisky, and then let him swim in it, 
 and it will not make him drunk, so long as the poison of the snake 
 remains in the system. This is about the only thing that whisky is 
 really good for. It is a complete antidote to snake bite, if taken 
 freely, and may be relied on in any and all cases. It should be drunk 
 like water, for a few hours, and continued at short intervals, until 
 the patient gives signs of intoxication, when the quantity should 
 gradually be diminished, as the disease is now beginning to recede. 
 
858 HYDROPHOBIA. 
 
 Keep him "under the influence of liquor," however, till you are sure 
 he is out of danger. 
 
 The patient should also take a gill of sweet, or olive oil, once every 
 two hours, until four or five doses are taken. It will hasten the 
 cure, and also act on the bowels. The oil may also be rubbed over 
 the swollen parts of the body. As soon as the swelling begins to go 
 down, and the patient seems to be out of danger, or past the worst, 
 give an active purge of Anti-bilious Physic and Mandrake, or Podo 
 phyllin, and follow it with a large dose of sweet oil. You may rely 
 on whisky and sweet oil to cure any snake bite; or the bite or sting 
 of any reptile or insect. 
 
 HYDROPHOBIA. 
 
 I will omit all preliminary remarks, as to the character, cause, 
 and symptoms of this terrible and always to be dreaded affection, 
 and proceed directly to tell you what to do in order to prevent, and 
 to cure it. Every body, I presume, knows that hydrophobia is mad- 
 ness, caused by the bite of a mad dog, or other rabid animal, while 
 laboring under the disease. 
 
 Preventive Treatment. Immediately, or as soon as possible, 
 after the bite of an animal suspected to be rabid, the wound should 
 be washed and cleansed out with a liquid called Aqua Ammonia, which 
 can always be had at any drug store. If this can not be done imme- 
 diately, on account of having to send a great distance for the Ammo- 
 nia, the next best thing is strong ley, or a strong solution of saleratus. 
 The next thing to be done after cleansing with either of these arti- 
 cles, is to cut out the wound; that is, cut out with a sharp instrument 
 the flesh around the wound, so as to take out the entire wound. 
 After this is done, encourage bleeding, if it does not bleed freely 
 without, by the application of a cupping-glass; that is, by cupping the 
 wound. Care should be taken, of course, not to wound an artery in 
 cutting. A skillful physician or surgeon should perform the oper- 
 ation, if one can be had in time. 
 
 After the wound has been cut out, and has bled freely for a while, 
 wash it out again with the aqua ammonia, and then cauterize the 
 whole wound with the potassa fusa, or caustic potash, and apply a 
 poultice of elm and yeast ; and thus bring on suppuration as soon as 
 possible, and keep up a running sore all the while. 
 
 As soon as convenient, say within twelve hours, give the patient a 
 thorough emetic of Lobelia, Ipecac, and Blood root, equal parts, and 
 
HYDROPHOBIA. 859 
 
 follow it with an active hydragogue purgative, say of equal parts 
 Anti-bilious Physic, powdered Mandrake, and cream of tartar ; or 
 three grains of Podophyllin may be used instead of the Mandrake. 
 The emetic and purgative are to be repeated once a week — and of- 
 tener, if the patient should manifest any hydrophobic symptoms. 
 
 "Next, procure a quantity of the common gray ash bark (sometimes 
 called black ash), and of the scull-cap (scutelaria lateriaflora), an 
 herb which grows plentifully in some parts of the West, and can 
 generally be had at any Botanic drug-store, or of an Eclectic physi- 
 cian. Of these make a strong infusion — two parts of the ash bark 
 to one of the scull-cap — of which the patient is to drink about a pint 
 a day, cold. He can take, say a gill, four or five times a day. If the 
 scull-cap can not be had, use the ash bark alone. Continue this 
 course for forty days, should no symptoms of the disease aj^pear; and 
 after that the emetics may be repeated once in two weeks, and a less 
 quantity of the infusion taken. The bowels, however, must be kept 
 open and loose all the while. Never allow the patient to become costive. 
 Some laxative and alterative pills should be taken every day, or 
 every other day, such as Podophyllin, Sanguinin, Leptandrin, and 
 Iridin, 20 grains of each, made into 40 pills, with extract of Dande- 
 lion, and take one pill a day. 
 
 The wound is to be kept open, and a running discharge kept up, 
 during the whole course of treatment; whenever it begins to heal, 
 apply the vegetable caustic, or caustic potash, and continue to poultice. 
 
 And now, if you are sure the patient was bitten by a mad dog, or 
 animal under the influence of hydrophobia, this course of treatment 
 should be continued for at least three months, gradually lessening 
 the quantity of the infusion, after the first forty days, to a half-pint 
 or gill a day ; and occasionally it may be omitted for a few days at a 
 time. It is better, however, to drink a quart every day for a whole 
 year than to die with the hydrophobia. 
 
 About the thirteenth to the fifteenth day there usually appears 
 under the patient's tongue, it is said, several small pustules, contain- 
 ing a yellowish watery fluid. This is about the period when the first 
 paroxysms are apt to make their appearance, and the pustules on the 
 under surface of the tongue are not only regarded as among the pre- 
 monitory symptoms, but as containing the virus, or peculiar poison, 
 which causes the disease; and it is believed that if they are opened 
 as soon as they appear, or before the poison is absorbed, and thor- 
 oughly cleansed, the disease will be prevented. They should, there- 
 fore, be looked for from about the twelfth day, and as soon as discov- 
 ered, should be punctured, and the mouth washed out with some 
 strong alkaline solution, as potash, saleratus, or aqua ammonia. 
 
860 HYDROPHOBIA. 
 
 I recollect very well that, when I was quite a boy, there were for 
 several seasons in succession, a great many mad dogs in our neigh- 
 borhood, and that I used to hear it said that there was in the under 
 side of a dog's tongue a little something in the shape of a worm, and 
 called "the worm in the tongue," the removal of which, it was said, 
 was an infallible preventive to the disease, though the dog might be 
 bitten ever so many times afterward, by a mad dog. I also know 
 that a great many persons performed the operation upon their dogs 
 of removing "the worm," and I never knew of any such ever having 
 the hydrophobia. I know there are medical writers and physicians 
 who deny and ridicule all this about "the worm in the tongue," and 
 even the appearance of the pustules under the tongue; but it is prob- 
 ably upon the same grounds that many persons deny a great many 
 other things — simply because they do not understand them, or see 
 how they can be true. 
 
 The foregoing measures, if thoroughly carried out, it is believed 
 will prevent the development of the disease, and completely eradi- 
 cate the virus from the system. In every case, so far as known, 
 where this course has been followed, it has been successful, even in 
 instances where other persons bitten by the same dog, and not sub- 
 jected to this treatment, have died of the disease. 
 
 Treatment for Hydrophobia. "Where the disease has developed 
 itself, and paroxysms have actually appeared, the first thing to be 
 done after properly confining the patient (if that should be neces- 
 sary), should be to put him under the influence of Lobelia. The com- 
 pound tincture, or what is called Thomson's Third Preparation, is 
 perhaps the best ; but if you have not this, the strong, saturated 
 tincture of the Lobelia seed, two parts, to one part tincture of Cay- 
 enne, will do. Give it freely, in tablespoonful doses, every few min- 
 utes, even to the extent of producing what was formerly called the 
 " alarming symptoms." There are no symptoms that can be pro- 
 duced by Lobelia so " alarming " as those of hydrophobia. Apply 
 drafts of mustard and Cayenne, moistened with vinegar, to the feet 
 and legs, first applying spirits of turpentine. Make use of powerful 
 counter-irritation along the whole course of the spine, by the appli- 
 cation of strong stimulating liniments. 
 
 If the original wound has been allowed to heal, it must be cauter- 
 ized with caustic potash, and a poultice applied, so as to get up and 
 keep up a discharge from it. 
 
 As soon as practicable, submit the patient to the vapor, or alco- ' 
 holic bath. The latter is probably the best, and is produced in the 
 following way : Strip the patient and seat him in a chair, with a 
 blanket thrown around the shoulders, and allowed to fall to the floor, 
 
HYDROPHOBIA. 861 
 
 outside of the chair; place under the chair, on the floor, a saucer or 
 vessel with alcohol in it, and set it on fire, and let it burn. If it burns 
 too rapidly, add a little water to the alcohol, or some whisk}'. When 
 it burns out, add more alcohol, and continue it till you have produced 
 a copious perspiration. Continue it at least half an hour. At the 
 same time, commencing a little while previous to the hot bath, it might 
 be well for the patient to take small doses of aqua ammonia, and con- 
 tinue it during the bath. Professor King, of the Eclectic College of 
 Cincinnati, recommends the ammonia very highly in such cases. You 
 may combine it with equal parts each of tinctures Lobelia and Cay- 
 enne, and give of the compound in teasj:>oonful doses every five min- 
 utes, in a little scull-cap, Lady-slipper, or ginger tea. 
 
 If the patient can not sit up to take the bath, he must be confined 
 in bed, and hot bricks or rocks wrapped in cloths wet with vinegar 
 and water, placed about him, so as to get up an external heat in this 
 way. giving him at the same time the Lobelia, Cayenne, and ammonia. 
 Produce, if possible, a thorough sweat; the ammonia will tend greatly 
 to aid the process, as well as to counteract the poison, and drive it 
 out of the system through the skin. 
 
 The patient should be kept well under the influence of Lobelia for 
 at least twenty-four hours, and whenever there are signs of a relapse, 
 increase the quantity. If the patient can not swallow, give it by 
 injection, in the form of an infusion of the seed or herb. The am- 
 monia may also be continued, in small quantities, say a teaspoonful 
 once every hour or two. 
 
 As soon as the effects of the paroxysm have passed off, or you have 
 got a complete intermission, commence giving the preparation men- 
 tioned as a preventive — the infusion of gray ash bark and scull- cap. 
 If you can not get the scull-cap, use the Lady-slipper root, and if not 
 that, the bark alone. Continue the infusion throughout, and resort 
 to the Lobelia every time there is the least return of the symptoms. 
 Keep the bowels regular, and the skin open and active by repeated 
 washings and friction. 
 
 A number of well marked cases of hydrophobia have been cured 
 by this plan. Indeed, so far as I can learn, there has never been a 
 failure. Do not conclude, therefore, that hydrophobia is incurable. 
 
 The Mad Stone. I have never had any experience with what is 
 called the Mad Stone, but have always heard of its uniform success. 
 No means calculated to prevent this terrible disease should be left 
 untried. I would therefore recommend that whenever this cele- 
 brated stone or talisman can be found, it should be tried. Make use 
 of it first, wherever convenient, and then pursue the course I have 
 recommended as preventive treatment. 
 
862 "WOUNDS AND INJURIES. 
 
 WOUNDS AND INJURIES. 
 
 Wounds are divided into several kinds, according to the instru- 
 ments or agents, generally, by which they are made ; as, 1st, Incised 
 w T ounds, which are made with a sharp-cutting instrument — a com- 
 mon cut, or incision with a knife, is an incised wound. 2d, Punctured 
 wounds, which are made with a pointed instrument; as a needle, a 
 nail, or a bayonet. Sometimes a wound is both punctured and in- 
 cised, as when made with a dirk, which both punctures and cuts. 3d, 
 Lacerated wounds, as when done with a rough or dull instrument, as 
 a saw, or stone, or when torn and lacerated. 4th, Contused wounds, 
 which means simply Incises, the skin not being severed or broken, 
 but the parts beneath becoming black or blue; in other words, 
 "blood-shot." 5th, Gun-shot wounds, made by a ball discharged from 
 a gun or pistol. Besides these, there are what are called Poisoned 
 wounds, such as are occasioned by the bite of snakes, and other 
 poisonous reptiles. 
 
 Treatment of Wounds. The first thing to be done in the treat- 
 ment of a wound, especially where blood-vessels are severed and ther 
 is much hemorrhage, is to stop the bleeding. If the bleeding is bu 
 slight, or there is no artery severed, the free application of cold wate. 
 may be sufficient to check it; or salt and water, or a solution of alum 
 in water. If these fail, and the wound is open or lacerated, sprinkle 
 on a portion of powdered burnt copperas ; to make which, burn upon 
 a hot iron shovel a portion of copperas, until it decomposes and be- 
 comes dry and of a red color; then pulverize it, and it is ready for 
 use. It forms an excellent styptic for such purposes. After sprink- 
 ling on a quantity of this, enough to thinly cover the surface of the 
 wound, or the parts of it from which the hemorrhage proceeds, place 
 over it a pleget, or bunch of lint or cotton, or a bit of old muslin 
 folded, and apply a bandage. 
 
 If an artery has been severed, which you will know by the blood 
 being of a bright red color, and coming out in jets or spurts, caused 
 by the pulsations of the heart, the only certain way to stop it is to 
 tie the artery. If you can not do this, and the bleeding is very pro- 
 fuse, you must send for a physician. If the wound is upon either 
 of the extremities, you can stop the flow of arterial blood, for the 
 time being, and until a physician can be brought, by tying a cord 
 tightly around the leg or the arm, as the case may be, so that it be 
 above the knee or the elbow, as well as above the wound. There 
 being but a single bone in the thigh and in the upper arm, you can, 
 
WOUXDS AND INJURIES. 863 
 
 if you make your ligature tight enough, stop the flow of arterial 
 blood entirely, in the parts below it. But if the wound is in some 
 other part of the bod}', as on the trunk, the head, or neck, and the 
 j)atient is likely to bleed to death, if the hemorrhage is not soon 
 stopped, you must look for the artery, get hold of it, and tie it. This 
 you can generally do, if you will but try sufficiently. Wash out the 
 wound with cold water, and then watch for the place where the light 
 red Hood spurts out ; get hold of the artery either with a pair of for- 
 ceps, or tweezers, or with your fingers ; if you do not succeed the 
 first time, keep trying till you do ; draw it out a little, and have 
 some one to tie it with a silk or flax thread, which you will leave long 
 enough for the ends to hang out of the wound, by which the thread 
 can be drawn out when the artery sloughs off and the wound is suf- 
 ficiently healed. If a large vein is severed, instead of an artery, the 
 blood will be of a dark purple color, and will flow out in a steady 
 stream. If you can not stop it by other means, it must be tied, the 
 same as an artery. 
 
 Having succeeded in stopping the hemorrhage, and having re- 
 moved any extraneous or foreign substances that may have been in 
 the wound, as splinters, dirt, sand, or any thing of the sort, you will 
 proceed to bring the lips or edges of the wound together, so that it 
 may heal, if possible, by what is called the first intention; that is, with- 
 out suppuration or the formation of matter. This can generally be 
 done in incised wounds. For this purpose you will need what is 
 called adhesive plaster, which may be had at any drug store. Cut it 
 in strips from a quarter of an inch to an inch in width, according to 
 the size of the wound, and long enough to reach over each side far 
 enough to adhere well to the sound skin and hold the lip's of the 
 wound together. Bring the edges of the wound together carefully 
 and as close as you can ; warm the strips of plaster a little, and stick 
 them on, across the wound, leaving a little space between each to 
 allow any fluid to escape that may run from the wound. Place over 
 the straps a bunch of lint, or cotton, or compress of muslin, and over 
 this a bandage. 
 
 Medication. Many physicians and surgeons recommend nothing 
 to be applied to a fresh wound, in the way of medication, but cold 
 water. In a majority of cases perhaps this will be all that is neces- 
 sary, except that a little tincture of Arnica might be added to the 
 water, with advantage, in the proportion of thirty drops to a pint of 
 water, and then pour the water from one vessel into another, several 
 times, to mix them well. "With this moisten the pleget or compress 
 three or four times a day. The Arnica, however, is more suited to 
 contused and lacerated than to incised wounds. One of the best prepa- 
 
864 WOUNDS AND INJURIES. 
 
 rations, if not the very best, that I have ever found for fresh wounds, 
 is equal parts of tinctures of aloes and opium. Pour on to or into 
 the wound a little of this twice a day, and keep the compress moist- 
 ened with cold water, and it will be all the treatment necessary, 
 unless suppuration takes place. 
 
 Punctured Wounds, if very deep, should not be allowed to heal at 
 the surface very speedily, and consequently should not be closed up 
 with adhesive plaster. They are very apt to become inflamed and 
 suppurate, and may lead to very serious consequences, if allowed to 
 heal by the first intention at the surface. If you have reason to be- 
 lieve that tendons are injured by the wound, treat it as directed 
 under the head of Lock-jaw. If the wound is of a serious nature 
 and there is threatened inflammation, active Ifydragogue purgatives 
 will be necessary, as the Anti-bilious Physic and cream of tartar, and 
 the patient may also take a dose of laudanum or opium occasionally. 
 
 Lacerated Wounds hardly ever heal by the first intention. There 
 is one favorable circumstance about lacerated wounds, however; they 
 are not apt to bleed so much as incised wounds. You can generally 
 stop the hemorrhage sufficiently by the application of cold water, or 
 a solution of alum or salt, or at any rate by the use of the styptic 
 powder I have named. You should, however, do all ^ou can to pre- 
 vent inflammation, or make it as light as possible. After you have 
 checked the hemorrhage and cleansed the wound, bring the parts 
 and edges together as well as you can, and retain them by means of 
 strips of adhesive plaster, and, if necessary, sutures, or stitches with 
 a needle and thread; and then, in order to the process of healing by 
 the first intention and to prevent inflammation, wash the whole wound 
 with a solution of nitrate of silver, about the strength of ten grains to 
 an ounce of water ; and continue to apply a little of this once a day, 
 by pouring it into the wound, and once a day the tinctures of aloes 
 and opium — using one, say in the morning, and the other in the even- 
 ing. I consider the nitrate of silver the best and most certain anti- 
 inflammatory agent known. Any incised wound, I care not how 
 large it may be, and almost any lacerated wound, if not too badly 
 mangled, may be made to heal by the first intention: that is, without 
 inflammation and suppuration, by the judicious use of this article in 
 solution. It may sometimes be well to use it at first as strong as 
 twenty grains to the ounce of water, gradually reducing in after 
 applications. I first learned this of old Dr. Gourrier, who lives on 
 the coast about one hundred miles above New Orleans, and who was 
 for fifteen years a surgeon in the army under Bonaparte. 
 
 Contused Wounds. The best application that can be made to 
 wounds of this character, which are in plain language nothing but 
 
WOUNDS AND INJURIES. ' 865 
 
 bruises, more or less severe, is the tincture of Arnica in cold water, 
 in the proportion of thirty or forty drops (not more) to a pint of 
 water. It is a Homeopathic remedy, and a very valuable one, and 
 can generally be had at drug stores. A little of the tincture should 
 always be kept on hand by ever}' family. Keep the wound wet with 
 this, by wetting the compress several times a day with the water 
 containing the Arnica, and if the wound is extensive, or there are 
 any internal bruises, let the patient take a spoonful two or three 
 times a day of the same dilution, or of one containing ten drops of 
 the tincture to a tumbler of water. A purgative may also be neces- 
 sary, in case of internal injury. 
 
 In case of a gun-shot wound, if it is a bad one, or the ball has 
 lodged in the body or part, of course it will be necessary to have a 
 physician or surgeon. If the ball has passed through, and the wound 
 is not- serious, it can be treated as any other punctured or lacerated 
 wound. 
 
 As to Poisoned wounds, I have already given, under the proper 
 head, the treatment for snake bites. For the bites of other reptiles, 
 and stings of insects, as spiders, scorpions, and the like, sweet oil is 
 the remedy, to be taken internally, in quantities proportioned to the 
 severity of the case, and applied externally. The application to the 
 part of aqua ammonia is good for the sting of the wasj), hornet, bee, 
 yellow-jacket, and the like. So also is the juice of the common yard 
 plantain. Indigo and vinegar is also said to be good. 
 
 Wounds of the Head. These are usually more dangerous than 
 wounds on other parts, because the brain is liable to be injured. In 
 treating a wound of the scalp or head, the hair should first be shaved 
 off, then remove extraneous and foreign substances, if any in the 
 wound, stop the bleeding, and bring the divided parts together as 
 well as you can, and confine them with strips of the adhesive or 
 sticking-plaster. If the skull is fractured, and some portion of the 
 bone depressed upon the brain, it should be raised, if possible. If 3*011 
 can not do it, send for a physician. Treat as directed for incised and 
 other wounds. If danger of inflammation of the brain, give active 
 cathartics, make cooling applications to the head, and bathe the feet 
 in warm water. 
 
 Concussion of the Brain. In concussion of the brain, which is 
 caused 03* blows on the head, or falling with the head upon a hard 
 substance, causing stupor, insensibility, and perhaps vomiting, bleed- 
 ing at the nose, etc., give active cathartics and purgative injections, 
 with cooling applications to the head ; bathe the feet in warm water, 
 and then apply mustard to them, over the stomach and between the 
 shoulders. Do not bleed the patient. 
 
866 WOUNDS AND INJURIES. 
 
 Wounds of Joints. When a joint is wounded, as the knee, for 
 instance, the limb should be placed in that position which will best 
 allow the edges of the wound to come together; and then all motion 
 or use of the joint, for the time, must be avoided. In other respects 
 treat as other wounds. If there is much discharge of the synovial 
 fluid, in other words the joint-water, you should endeavor to check it 
 the same as if it were hemorrhage of blood, by the application of 
 astringent liquids, or a little of the red styptic powder, or burnt 
 copperas. If swelling and inflammation, apply the elm poultice, and 
 heal with the Black or All-healing Salve. 
 
 Proud Flesh. Sometimes in wounds that do not heal by the first 
 intention, but inflame and suppurate, and become a running sore, 
 there will occur a fungous growth, called usually " proud flesh," which 
 will prevent the wound from healing. When this is the case, 
 sprinkle on this fungus portion a little powdered burnt alum, or 
 Blood root, a few times, and if these should fail to remove it, use the 
 vegetable caustic, or caustic potash. Then poultice, and use the 
 Black or some other good healing salve. 
 
 Fractures and Dislocations. In all cases of fractures of bones 
 or dislocations of joints, unless there is some one present or near by 
 who sufficiently understands the mechanism of the human frame 
 and is fully competent to the task of managing the case, a physiciai 
 should be sent for at once. The friends or persons present, should 
 in the mean time, make use of such measures as the urgency of the 
 case seems to require. If the injury is a compound fracture, by which 
 is meant that not only the bone is broken, but that the skin and flesh 
 are also separated and torn, so that the ends of the bones, perhaps pro- 
 ject, and there is much bleeding, proper efforts, such as have already 
 been indicated for the purpose, should be made to check it, and if 
 need be, take up and tie an artery or vein. If the patient suffers 
 much pain, he might also take a dose of laudanum and a little spirits. 
 
 In case of a dislocation, if there is no one present that can reduce 
 it — that is, put the head of the bone back again into its place — and 
 there is likely to be swelling of the part — and there always is more 
 or less — there should be constant applications made to the part of 
 warm water, as hot as can be borne, by means of cloths, until the 
 the physician arrives. This will prevent the swelling, and keep the 
 parts in a relaxed condition, both of which are highly necessary. 
 And if the parts have swollen much, the free application of hot 
 water will reduce it, and relax the muscles, so that the reduction, or 
 replacing of the bone, can much more easily be effected. 
 
ULCERS AND OLD SORES. 867 
 
 ULCERS AND OLD SORES. 
 
 Medical writers usually divide ulcers into several kinds, 1st, the 
 Healthy: 2d, the Irritable; 3d, the Indolent; 4th, the Varicose; and 
 5th, Specif. c. The Healthy ulcer, if it is proper to call it an ulcer at 
 all, is one that heals up by healthy suppuration and granulation, 
 without difficulty, such as usually results from wounds that do not 
 heal by the first intention. Should it not heal thus readily and heal- 
 thily, it becomes an ulcer belonging to one of the other classes. The 
 Healthy ulcer (See Treatment of "Wounds), seldom requires any thing 
 more than poulticing and the use of some good healing salve. 
 
 The specific ulcer is such as attends a particular or specific disease, 
 as Syphilis, Scrofula, and the like, which you will find properly 
 treated of under the diseases to which they belong. It therefore 
 remains for me to speak particularly of the remaining three kinds. 
 
 The Irritable Ulcer. You have an ulcer, no matter where; it 
 may be on the hand, the foot, or the leg, or any where else. It is 
 very sore to the touch, tender, and easily made to bleed. It is of a 
 red, or dark purplish appearance, discharges but little matter, and 
 that of a thin, watery, or bloody character, and it may be very corro- 
 ding and fetid. The granulations in it are spongy and imperfect, 
 and of a dark red hue. The ulcer is bounded by a sharp, overhang- 
 ing or shelving edge, sometimes ragged, or what is called serrated, 
 that is, like fine saw-teeth. The parts around the ulcer are red and 
 swollen, and usually hard. This is an Irritable ulcer. 
 
 Treatment. The treatment should be of the most soothing and 
 emollient kind. Warm fomentations ; warm poultices ; and soothing 
 applications. One of the best is the carrot poultice. If the irrita- 
 bility is very great, the poultice should be moistened with the infu- 
 sion of Lobelia herb, or a little laudanum. Fomentations of hops 
 and poppy leaves is excellent. Continue such applications till the 
 soreness and inflammatory tendency are removed. Sometimes dry 
 applications will be found to have a better effect than moist ; such as 
 sprinkling on common flour, or pulverized chalk or magnesia. These 
 may be used for a few days, in alternation with poultices and fomen- 
 tations. Do not compress or bandage very tightly. 
 
 If there are constitutional symptoms, such as thirst, chilliness, and 
 feverish symptoms, nervous prostration, and irritability, the general 
 system must be attended to. If the skin is dry and harsh, the alka- 
 line bath, that is, sponging and washing the whole body with w^arm 
 water, in which a little saleratus has been dissolved, should be 
 employed once or twice a day. If the bowels are disposed to be cos- 
 55 
 
868 ULCERS AXD OLD SORES. 
 
 tivc, mild cathartics must be given ; and it may be well to give an 
 occasional emetic, and make use of means to produce a healthy per- 
 spiration and action of the skin. 
 
 When the irritability and pain have been removed from the nicer, 
 change your applications to simple dressings, such as some good 
 healing salve or ointment. The Black or All-healing Salve is very 
 good. 
 
 "The Indolent Ulcer. This is the most common ulcer to be met 
 with, and is exactly the reverse of the Irritable ulcer, in almost every 
 respect. The edges of the sore are everted instead of inverted ; that is 
 they turn out, instead of hang over, and are rounded, thick, glassy, 
 and quite regular. The granulations in the ulcer, instead of being 
 red and sensitive, are quite insensible to the touch, and of a dull pale 
 appearance, and are generally located at the bottom of the excava- 
 tion or sore, being, in short, of a fungous appearance and character. 
 The secretion or matter, instead of being thin and watery, is thick, 
 of a yellowish color, and adheres quite firmly to the base of the ulcer. 
 
 Indolent ulcers are often very difficult to cure. They occur most 
 frequently on the lower extremities, about the legs and ankles, and 
 are often er to be met with in males than females. 
 
 Treatment. The treatment of this class of ulcers, like the symp- 
 toms, is the very opposite of that of the Irritable ulcer. Stimulating 
 applications are to be made, the first effort being to change the sore 
 from its sluggish, indolent character to a healthy activity. 
 
 If there is fungous or callous growth in it, apply the powdered 
 vegetable caustic, or powdered Blood root; sprinkle it on freely, and 
 cover with a plaster of salve, or a poultice. This course will in a day 
 or two, loosen the pus, or matter in the ulcer, so that it may be 
 washed out clean. Wash out with a strong solution of saleratus, and 
 occasionally with a solution of Nitrate, of silver, about the strength of 
 twenty grains to an ounce of water. Apply it with a feather. If the 
 edges are hard and swollen, touch them with the Lunar caustic, and it 
 may be well to scarify them a little with a sharp instrument ; after 
 which apply warm fomentations or poultices. By the free applica- 
 tion of caustics, either in powder or solution, or both, once or twice a 
 day, and softening poultices, you will effect such a change in the 
 character of the ulcer, that in the course of a few days it will most 
 likely assume a healthy appearance and begin to heal. 
 
 If it becomes irritable and inflames, apply emollient poultices, the 
 carrot or elm poultice, till the inflammation and irritability are 
 reduced. 
 
 The next step will be to heal up with proper salves. One of the 
 best I have ever used in such cases is the Green salve, made as follows : 
 
ULCERS AXD OLD SORES; 869 
 
 Take Rosin, Beeswax, and Lard, of each one ounce ; Verdigris, one 
 
 drachm, ground in oil ; mix all together, and stir till cold. Dress 
 twice a day with this ; and each time wash out the ulcer with a lotion 
 composed of equal parts of tinctures of Myrrh, Aloes, and Blood 
 root. If any fungous, or proud flesh appears, sprinkle on the 
 powdered Blood root, or burnt alum, or vegetable caustic, and occa- 
 sionally wash out with a solution of Nitrate of silver. And in very 
 indolent cases, it may be well to apply occasionally a rag wet with 
 the solution of Nitrate of silver, carefully protecting the sound parts 
 around the ulcer. Leave this on for a few hours, and then apply the 
 salve. The worst ulcers of this kind may readily be made to heal, 
 by the free use of Nitrate of silver in solution, even when every thing 
 else seems to fail. 
 
 It may be necessary to apply the caustic potash occasionally to the 
 edges of the ulcer, or to touch them with a piece of the lunar caustic. 
 
 The Black Salve may be used instead of the Green, or in alter- 
 nation with it, using one a few days, and then the other. One of the 
 best poultices in these cases, is made of a decoction of the Wild Indigo 
 root, thickened with a little powdered elm bark. If tendency to 
 gangrene or mortification, sprinkle on freely of powdered charcoal, 
 and add yeast to the poultice. To touch the edges of the ulcer occa- 
 sionally with a lotion of Oil Amber and tinctures Blood root and 
 Cayenne, equal parts, is sometimes very good to make them heal. 
 
 Constitutional treatment should not be neglected. Bathe the sur- 
 face frequently; keep the bowels in proper condition, with laxative 
 and alterative medicine, occasionall}' giving an active cathartic. It 
 may also be well, in ulcers of long standing especially, to take some- 
 thing to purify the blood, and the general system, such as a syrup or 
 decoction of Burdock. Yellow dock, Yellow parilla, and Sassafras roots. 
 Elder flowers, and Cherry-tree bark. To each pint add one drachm of 
 Iodide of Potassa, and take a winegiassful two or three times a da}'. 
 
 The Varicose L t lcer. This class of ulcers almost invariably 
 occurs on the lower extremities, generally about the ankle and sides 
 of the leg. There is always a varicose or swollen condition of the veins 
 in the part, hence the name. In other respects the ulcers may be 
 either irritable or indolent. They are usually very tender to the 
 touch, and often very painful when the part is exercised. Nearly all 
 the small veins in the vicinity are involved, and the bluish red color 
 of the sore extends to some distance around. The leg will often be 
 greatly swollen or enlarged, mainly on account of the engorged state 
 of the veins. 
 
 Treatment. If the ulcer be of the Irritable or the Indolent char- 
 acter, treat it accordingly. The only peculiaritv of treatment called 
 
870 ULCERS AND OLD SORES. 
 
 for is for the engorged and enfeebled state of the veins in the part 
 affected. For this use astringent and tonic washes, as a decoction of 
 White oak bark, with some alum dissolved in it; also tinctures of 
 Nutgall and Catechu. If the ulcers appear to be indolent, use also 
 tinctures of Cayenne, Myrrh, and Oil Amber, as a wash. It will be 
 well also to submit the limb, or the part affected, once or twice a day 
 to a steaming over bitter herbs. This is very important, and will 
 have an excellent effect. 
 
 In addition to this, and what is perhaps of the greatest impor- 
 tance, apply what is called a roller ; that is a compression or band- 
 age, by means of a long strip of muslin, about two or three inches 
 wide. Let it be long enough to wrap the foot and leg from the toes 
 to the knee, or above the swelling. Begin at the toes, and wind 
 round, drawing pretty tight, so as to compress as much as can be 
 borne, and continue winding till you get above the swelling, allow- 
 ing the edges of the roller or bandage to overlap each other a little. 
 Remove it at least every morning and evening, to wash and dress 
 the ulceis, and, if need be, foment or steam over bitter herbs, and 
 then apply again, each time drawing the roller a little tighter. This 
 will reduce the swelling and the engorgement of the vessels, and in 
 the course of a few days the ulcers may be in a condition to com- 
 mence healing. Occasionally it may be necessary to poultice ; but 
 at all other times continue the bandage, and heal with salve and the 
 proper washes. If the edges of the sores are hard, and will not 
 heal, scarify them and apply stimulants and astringents, and occas- 
 ionally a little caustic. 
 
 It is very common to meet with cases of this kind, called "Old 
 Sore Legs," originating from fever, or from drinking whisky, or from 
 injuries to the part, which have been neglected. In all such cases, 
 you can succeed in effecting a cure, if you will pursue the above 
 course, rigidly, and for a sufficient length of time. Make use of the 
 bitter herb fomentations, the astringent and stimulating washes, and 
 the roller compress, and you will succeed. 
 
 The constitutional treatment should be more or less such as recom- 
 mended in case of the other kinds of ulcers. ' 
 
 Black Salve.' \For directions to, make this salve, see "All-heal- 
 ing Salve," page 74&. The Ked Lead and ^amphor must be added. 
 
TABLE OF 
 FAMILY MEDICINES, 
 
 With Directions for Preparing and Using Them. 
 
 ANTIBILIOUS PHYSIC. 
 
 This is probably the best and safest cathartic or purgative known. It is preferable 
 to any of the articles usually given as purgatives, being more speedy in its operation, 
 and always free from any danger or deleterious effects. It may be given in all cases 
 where a purgative is needed, and to persons of all ages. 
 
 Preparation. Take pulverized Jalap, 4 oz. ; finely pulverized Senna, 8 oz. ; pulver- 
 ized Cloves. I oz. ; mix well, and sift through a fine sieve. The materials should all be 
 of the best quality. 
 
 Dose. For a grown person, from one to two drachms, or from an even to a heaping 
 teaspoonful, given in a little warm water, which may be sweetened, and if preferred, a 
 little brandy or spirits added, grated nutmeg, and the like, to render it palatable and 
 agreeable. Children from six to twelve years of age, may take from one- third to one 
 half as much, and under six, one third, one fourth, or less, according to age. When it 
 is desired to have it operate quick, a few grains of Cayenne should be added to it, and 
 a teaspoonful or two pf Cream of tartar. In all cases of Dropsy, nflammations, and 
 Congestions, the Cream of tartar should be added, as it causes copious watery dischar- 
 ges, thereby reducing the fluids of the system. It may also be improved in such cases, 
 by combining with it about an equal part of the powdered Mandrake, or if the Podo- 
 phyllin is preferred, two or three grains of it to the dose, for a grown person. 
 
 NEUTRALIZING POWDER. 
 
 Preparation. Take of the best pulverized Rhubarb, and Saleratus, each say one 
 ounce : pulverized Peppermint leaves, half an ounce ; let each be finely pulverized, then 
 mix, and pass through a fine sieve. 
 
 Dos-. When given in substance, from ten or fifteen grains to a teaspoonful, is a dose 
 for a grown person, repeated several times during the day. If it is given as often as once 
 an hour, ten to twenty gra ; ns is enough at a time. It is used for Dysentery, Diarrhea, 
 nn<\ Summer Complaints, and it is generally well to combine with it a little of the 
 Diaphoretic Powder, say five or six grains to each dose. A favorite prescription of 
 mine in Dysentery, is Neutralizing Powder, 20 grains, Diaphoretic Powder, 5 grains, 
 Leptandrin, 1 grain, — to be given once every two hours, till six, eight, or ten doses are 
 taken. 
 
 Wfcn you wish to give it in liquid form, or in syrup, and it is generally best to do 
 so for children — take say a heaping tablespoonful of the compound, add half a pint of 
 boiling water, simmer a few minutes, and when cool, strain, and sweeten with loaf 
 sugar, and give it in doses of a teaspoonful to a tablespoonful, repeated every half hour, 
 or hour, according to the urgency of the case. 
 
 This is on* of the best preparations known for Dysentery, Diarrhea, Summer Com- 
 plaint in children, and the like. Every family should keep a supply of it on hand, 
 especially during the summer or sickly season. 
 
 871 
 
872 FAMILY MEDICINES. 
 
 ALTERATIVE, OR LIVER POWDERS. 
 
 Take Podophyllin, and Sanguinin, of each, 10 grains; Leptandrin, 20 grains ; White 
 sugar, 40 grains ; triturate, or rub the whole together well in a small mortar, and 
 divide into 40 powders, and take one night and morning; if they operate much on the 
 bowels, take but one a day. 
 
 Uses. Valuable in Liver Complaint, Torpidity of the Liver, and as an Alterative, to 
 act on the secretions of the system generally. A complete substitute for Blue Pill, an 
 free from any danger. 
 
 COMPOSITION POWDER. 
 
 Preparation. Take Bayberry one pound, good Ginger one half pound, Cayenne and 
 Cloves, of each one ounce ; the whole to be finely pulverized and well mixed. 
 
 Uses. To be made into a tea, and drunk freely, in the proportion of a large tablespoonful 
 to a pint of boiling water. It may be sweetened if preferred. Valuable in colds, and 
 where you wish to produce perspiration. Also good to take before taking an emetic, to 
 prepare the system, and wherever a Diaphoretic or, sweating tea is needed. It is the 
 original Thompsonian Composition Powder. 
 
 DIAPHORETIC POWDER. 
 
 Preparation. Take of pulverized Opium, 30 grains, or half a drachm : pulverized 
 Gum Camphor, two drachms ; Ipecac, one drachm ; Cream of tartar, one half ounce ; 
 mix, and triturate well in a mortar. 
 
 Dose. Ten grains to half a teaspoonful, once in three or four hours. It is valuable 
 as a sweating powder, good in Fevers, Dysentery, and wherever an Anodyne and Dio- 
 phoretic are needed. When to be given as often as once in two or three hours, and to 
 be continued a good while, it should be given in small doses, of from five to ten grains. 
 It acts gently on the skin,, and promotes perspiration without increasing the heat of 
 the body. 
 
 EMETIC POWDER. 
 
 For all ordinary purposes, equal parts of powdered Lobelia seed, or herb, and Ipecac, 
 are sufficient. In some cases, however, particularly where the Lungs are affected, as 
 in Pneumonia or Lung Fever, it is best to combine a portion of the Blood root. Thus : 
 Take pulverized Lobelia seed and Ipecac, of each, two ounces ; pulverized Blood root, 
 one ounce ; mix. 
 
 Use. In either case, when you wish to give an emetic, take a heaping tablespoonful 
 of the compound, pour on it near a pint of hot water (but not quite hot enough to 
 scald) , stir it, and let it steep a few minutes ; then, the patient having already pre- 
 pared for it by drinking a pint or more of Composition, Pennyroyal, or Boneset tea, 
 commence giving the emetic infusion in half teacupfuls, every two or three minutes, 
 till all is taken, or he has vomited two or three times thoroughly. If one portion does 
 not produce thorough or sufficient vomiting, prepare another, and continue in larger 
 doses, till it does. Between each time of vomiting, a little tea should be drunk ; and 
 at the close, the patient should take some gruel, and remain quiet for an hour or two 
 
FAMILY MEDICINES. 873 
 
 COMPOUND SPICE BITTERS. 
 
 Preparation. Take Poplar bark, Bayberry, Yellow root (Golden Seal), of each four 
 ounces : Colombo and Bitter root (Indian hemp), of each two ounces ; Cloves and Race 
 Ginger, of each one ounce ; Cayenne, half an ounce ; all to be finely powdered and 
 then mixed; to which, add as much finely powdered loaf sugar as the whole of the 
 others, and pass the whole through a fine sieve. 
 
 Dose. A teaspoonful in a little water, warm or cold, or a little wine, or any thing 
 else preferred. This is an excellent bitter for weak stomach, dyspepsia, loss of appe- 
 tite, general debility, and wherever a tonic and restorative bitter is needed. It is very 
 convenient and pleasant to take. 
 
 IMPROVED NO. 6, OR COMPOUND TINCTURE OF MYRRH. 
 
 Preparation. Take best gum Myrrh, six ounces ; Cayenne, Balsam of Fir, and Nut- 
 megs, of each one ounce; good Brandy, two quarts; bruise the solid articles, and let 
 stand two weeks to digest, shaking once or twice every day ; then strain or filter. Or 
 it may be made for immediate use, by putting the whole in a stone jug, and placing 
 this in a warm sand bath, or in a vessel of boiling water, for twenty-four hours, 
 shaking frequently, 
 
 Dose. A teaspoonful is an ordinary dose for a grown person. Good in colic, pain,-* 
 in the stomach and bowels, diarrhea, headache, sick stomach, and wherever a powerful 
 t-timulant is indicated. It is also valuable as a wash or external application, for 
 sprains, bruises, and foul ulcers, and old sores. It is a preparation that no family 
 should be without. 
 
 ANTISPASMODIC TINCTURE. 
 
 Preparation. Take Lobelia seeds, pulverized, 4 ounces; Ladyslipper root, powdered, 
 4 ounces ; Cayenne, 2 ounces ; diluted Alcohol (diluted with half as much water as 
 Alcohol), one quart. Djgest two weeks, shaking frequently, then strain or filter. 
 
 Dose. From a teaspoonful to a tables poonful, according to urgency of symptoms. 
 Valuable in spasms, convulsions, fits, lock-jaw, suspended animation from drowning, 
 lightning, falls, or any other cause, and in all violent attacks of disease. The dose* 
 should be repeated every five, ten, or twenty minutes. 
 
 EXPECTORANT TINCTURE. 
 
 Preparation. Take pulverized Lobelia (seed or herb), powdered Blood root, and 
 powdered Rattle root (Black Cohosh), of each three ounces; Alcohol and good Vinegar, 
 of each one pint ; digest for ten days or two weeks, then strain or filter, and add four- 
 ounces each of wine of Ipecac, and tincture Balsam of Tolu, and one ounce strong 
 essence of Anise. A portion of honey may be added, if preferred. 
 
 Do>k. One to two teaspoonfuls, repeated as often as circumstances require. Highly 
 useful as an expectorant in coughs, colds, and all affections of the lungs. A similar 
 preparation may be made, by combining equal parts of tinctures Lobelia, Blood root. 
 Rattle root. Balsam Tolu, and wine or syrup of Ipecac. 
 
 CATHARTIC AND ANTIBILIOUS PILLS. 
 
 Preparation. Take Podophyllin, one drachm ; pure Cayenne, one drachm ; Bangui 
 nin, one half drachm ; Ipecac, one half a drachm ; soft extract of Mandrake, enough 
 to form a pill mass ; make into 60 pills. This is the best pill T have ever used, as a 
 
874 FAMILY MEDICINES. 
 
 cathartic and Liver pill, and to act on the secretions generally. As a cathartic, the 
 dose is from two to four pills, for a grown person, and as an alterative and substitute 
 for Blue Mass, one pill once a day, or every other day. 
 
 DR. JORDAN'S CHOLERA REMEDY. 
 
 I am about to give you my Great Cholera Remedy. I see no reason why it should 
 not be made public. I first discovered and used it with great success in the Cincinnati 
 Cholera Hospital, in the summer of 1849, when the disease raged so terribly in that 
 city, and throughout our whole country. Since then, I have given the recipe to a num- 
 ber of my friends, who have prepared and used the medicine, not only in Cholera, but 
 in all bowel diseases, who generally, I believe, esteem it very highly. I doubt very 
 much if there is a preparation or medicine known, equal to it in Cholera, Cholera Mor 
 bus, or any form of Diarrhea, or that may be so confidently relied upon. The recipe is 
 well worth the price of this book, to any family that will prepare and keep the medi- 
 cine, and use it when indicated. It is prepared as follows : 
 
 Take Gum Guaiacum, 2 oz., 
 
 Prickly Ash Berries, 2 oz., 
 
 Cloves, 2 oz , 
 
 Cinnamon Bark, , 2 oz., 
 
 Gum Camphor, 1 oz., 
 
 Gum Kino, £ oz., 
 
 BestFrench Brandy, 1 Quart. 
 
 Reduce all the articles to a coarse powder, and digest in the brandy ten days or two 
 weeks, shaking the vessel well two or three times a day, so that the ingredients may 
 be kept loose, and not allowed to become impacted at the bottom ; after which, strain 
 and press out. Then take — 
 
 Oil Anise, 2 drachms, 
 
 Oil Peppermint, 2 drachms, 
 
 Good Alcohol, 4 ounces. 
 
 Cut the Oils in the Alcohol thoroughly, by shaking well, and then add the whole to 
 the other, when it is ready for use. 
 
 Dose. From one to two teaspoonfuls every five, ten, fifteen or thirty minutes, accord- 
 ing to the urgency of the symptoms. In Cholera, it should be given frequently, and if 
 there is nausea and vomiting, small doses are preferable — a single teaspoonful every five 
 or ten minutes, till urgent symptoms are checked ; then give it less frequent. It should 
 always be given alone, unmixed or undiluted with any thing else, In ordinary diarrhea, 
 a dose of one or two teaspoonfuls taken once an hour, will be sufficient. It is al3o an 
 excellent remedy for colic, or pains in the stomach or bowels, and will generally settle 
 the stomach very soon in case of nausea and vomiting. It may be regarded as a stan- 
 dard remedy, and should always be kept in the house. 
 
 It may be made for immediate use, by submitting to a gentle heat for a few hours. 
 In this oase Alcohol may be used instead of Brandy. Take one quart of Alcohol, dilute 
 it with one pint of water, put it in a stone jug with the ingredients first named, and 
 boil the jug in a vessel of hot water for two or three hours, leaving a little opening at 
 the mouth, for the steam to escape. It must also be shaken or stirred frequently. 
 When cool, strain, press out, and add the oils, cut in Alcohol as directed. It is 
 best, in making it in this way, to submit to but a gentle heat, hardly to the boiling 
 point, and occupy at least twenty-four hours in the process. 
 
 The Prickly Ash is an essential ingredient, and must not be omitted. If you can not 
 get the berries, use double the quantity of the inner bark of the toee. 
 
GENERAL INDEX. 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Abdomen 685 
 
 Ablution 688 
 
 Abortion 438, 685 
 
 Abscess 685 
 
 Absorbent 685 
 
 Accouchement 685 
 
 Acetate of Lead 685 
 
 Acid ." 685 
 
 Nitric 710 
 
 Actual Cautery 685 
 
 Acupuncture 686 
 
 Adhesive Plaster 686 
 
 Adult Age 687 
 
 Adversity 102 
 
 Advice to the Unmarried 119 
 
 Affection 61, 687 
 
 Affusion 687 
 
 After-Birth 424 
 
 Pains 454 
 
 Agrimony 616 
 
 Ague and Fever 203 j 
 
 Ague-Cake — see Inflam'n of Spleen, 819 
 
 Albumen 688 
 
 Alder, Black 629 
 
 Alkali 689 
 
 All-Healing Salve 744 
 
 Almond Oil 690 
 
 Aloe, Common 671 
 
 Socotorine 672 
 
 American, Wine of. 673 
 
 Alterative, or Liver Powders 872 
 
 Amaurosis 690 
 
 American Sarsaparilla 618 
 
 Ammoniac, Gum 702 
 
 Amputation 688 
 
 Anasarca 690 
 
 Anchylosis 600 
 
 Aneurism 688 
 
 Anger 65 
 
 Angina Pectoris 690 
 
 Animal Magnetism 345 
 
 Ani Prolapsus 687 
 
 Anise-Seed 629 
 
 Anodvne 690 
 
 — Head Pills 757 
 
 Liniment 766 
 
 Antacid Mixture 762 
 
 Anthelmintics 690 
 
 Anti-bilious and Head-Ache Pills.... 757 
 
 Physic 871 
 
 Anti-bilious and Cathartic Pills 873 
 
 Pills, Lee's 754 ! 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Anti-Dyspeptic Pills 762 
 
 Antispasmodic 691 
 
 Tincture 873 
 
 Mixture 760 
 
 Antidote for Arsenic 742 
 
 for Poison 753 
 
 for Poison of Insects 865 
 
 for Strychnine 751 
 
 Antimony 691 
 
 Anus 686 
 
 Apoplex} r 787 
 
 Appetite, poor 732 
 
 Arabic, Gum 702 
 
 Arsenic, Antidote for 742 
 
 Ascarides 691 
 
 Ascites 691 
 
 Assafcetida 669, 690 
 
 Asthma 398, 691 
 
 Astringent Drops 761 
 
 Auscultation 691 
 
 Avarice '. 96 
 
 Avoid, in eating and drinking .... 269 
 
 Axilla 691 
 
 Azote, or Nitrogen Gas 710 
 
 Bayberry 646 
 
 Baldness, to prevent 729 
 
 Balm 616 
 
 of Gilead 618 
 
 Balmony 647 
 
 Balsam, Canada 628 
 
 Copavia 691 
 
 Barberry 640 
 
 Basilican Ointment 692 
 
 Bath, Cold 189 
 
 Warm 195 
 
 Beer, Jews' 763 
 
 Bene Leaves 340, 656 
 
 Beth Root 621 
 
 Bilious or Remittent Fever 210 
 
 and Cramp Colic 835 
 
 Pneumonia 810 
 
 Bind Weed, or Scammony 655 
 
 Bismuth, Oxide of 692 
 
 Bitter Sweet 679 
 
 Bitters, Spice 873 
 
 Big Neck— Goitre 853 
 
 Bite of Insects 865 
 
 Snakes 856 
 
 : Mad Dog 858 
 
 Blackberry Syrup 74"> 
 
 Black Cohosh 642 
 
 Pitch 721 
 
 875 
 
876 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Blade Pepper 
 
 Snakeroot 
 
 Wash 
 
 Bleeding from the Lungs... 802, 732, 
 
 ■ Stomach 
 
 Nose 
 
 Urinary Organs .. 
 
 Wounds, to stop... 
 
 Blessed Thistle 
 
 Blisters 865, 
 
 Bladder, Inflammation of 
 
 Black-tongue Erysipelas 
 
 Blue Flag 
 
 Vitriol 
 
 Boils 692, 729, 
 
 Boneset 
 
 Borage — Common 
 
 Borax 
 
 Bowel Complaint 
 
 Brain, Inflammation of 
 
 Concussion of 
 
 Breast, Inflamed 
 
 Bronchitis 673, 750, 
 
 — Croton Oil in 
 
 Bowels, Inflammation of 
 
 Bronchocele — Goitre 
 
 Breath, Bad, to improve 693, 
 
 Brimstone 
 
 Bubo, Treatment of 
 
 Bugle Weed 
 
 Burdock 
 
 Burgundy Pitch 
 
 Burns and Scalds 741, 749, 
 
 Burnt Rhubarb in Diarrhea, 344, 730, 
 
 Burnt Cork in Diarrhea 
 
 Butternut 
 
 Calamus 
 
 Catalepsy — Trance 
 
 Calomel 
 
 Camphor 738, 
 
 Laurel 
 
 Canada Balsam 
 
 Cancer 370, 731, 737, 
 
 Ca.ker 
 
 Carbon 
 
 Carminative 
 
 Caraway Seeds 
 
 Castor Oil 
 
 - made Palatable 
 
 Cathartic 
 
 Mixture 
 
 and Rheumatic Pills... 
 and Anti-bilious Pills. 
 
 Catnip . 
 Caustic 
 
 Cayenne 
 
 Lunar. 
 
 Tincture of 
 
 Cedar 
 
 Centaury 
 
 Chalk Mixture 
 
 Chalybeate Pills for Leucorrhea. 
 Water 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 644 
 
 642 
 764 
 748 
 804 
 804 
 805 
 862 
 618 
 692 
 818 
 830 
 623 
 692 
 733 
 675 
 614 
 692 
 337 
 806 
 865 
 826 
 825 
 726 
 816 
 853 
 745 
 716 
 598 
 632 
 668 
 693 
 767 
 832 
 344 
 632 
 616 
 797 
 698 
 694 
 682 
 628 
 748 
 748 
 695 
 695 
 618 
 695 
 742 
 695 
 760 
 758 
 873 
 629 
 695 
 707 
 643 
 733 
 631 
 619 
 729 
 747 
 747 
 
 Chamomile. 
 
 Wild 
 
 Chancre 
 
 Charity 
 
 G&eerfulness 
 
 'hevry, Wild 
 
 Cordial 
 
 Chest and Lungs 
 
 Chicken-pox 
 
 Child-birth, or Labor 
 
 Children, Diseases of 497, 
 
 Chloride of Zinc. 
 
 Chloroform 
 
 Liniment 
 
 Cholera 
 
 Dr. Jordan's Remedy 
 
 Mixture 
 
 Morbus 743, 748, 
 
 . Infantum 524, 
 
 Chordee 
 
 Cinnamon Tree 
 
 Cities, Health of 
 
 Chorea — St. Vitus' Dance 
 
 Chronic Sore Eyes 
 
 Bronchitis 
 
 Cleanliness 
 
 Cleavers 
 
 Clover, Sweet 
 
 Cobweb 
 
 Coffee, Palpitation of the Heart from, 
 
 Cold Bath 
 
 Colic 335, 749, 743, 
 
 in Children •.. 
 
 Bilious and Cramp 
 
 Painters' 
 
 Cold and Damp Weather 
 
 • Plague 
 
 Water 
 
 Water, Imprudent use of 
 
 Colds and Coughs.... 292. 725, 729, 
 
 Collyrium— Eye Water 766, 
 
 Colombo 
 
 Comfrey 
 
 Complaint. Liver 
 
 Bowel 
 
 Compound Decoction of Sarsaparilla, 
 
 Tincture of Myrrh 
 
 Composition Powder 
 
 Concussion of the Brain 
 
 Constipation of the Bowels 
 
 Consumption.... 293, 726, 733, 737, 
 
 Convulsions, or Fits 
 
 Tincture for 
 
 Cork, Burnt, in Diarrhea 
 
 Corn Poppy 
 
 Cordial, Cherry 
 
 for Diarrhea 
 
 Neutralizing 
 
 Corseting, or Tight Lacing 
 
 Costiveness 
 
 Cough Lozenges 
 
 Mixture 730. 731. 758, 
 
 Pills 
 
 PAGE, 
 
 <;42 
 642 
 695 
 98 
 72 
 627 
 765 
 278 
 746 
 410 
 518 
 721 
 721 
 767 
 312 
 874 
 746 
 831 
 833 
 696 
 682 
 308 
 791 
 821 
 826 
 499 
 619 
 618 
 722 
 304 
 189 
 740 
 525 
 835 
 836 
 288 
 811 
 753 
 754 
 732 
 821 
 630 
 625 
 379 
 337 
 735 
 873 
 872 
 865 
 336 
 745 
 534 
 873 
 344 
 669 
 765 
 761 
 765 
 281 
 748 
 730 
 763 
 753 
 
INDEX. 
 
 877 
 
 Coughs, Plaster for 743 
 
 Cramp, Spasmodic Tincture for, 747, S73 
 
 Coli '. 835 
 
 in the Stomach 743 
 
 Crane's Bill 633 
 
 n Oil . 616, 696 
 
 ,u Bronchitis 726 
 
 Ci up. 7)51, 732, 737, 741, 746 
 
 C, ibs 617,659 
 
 Cm mire of the Spine— Rickets 844 
 
 Da;. ■ and Cold Weather 28S 
 
 Deafness 738 
 
 Di th, Bread of 151 
 
 Death, Foal Air 752 
 
 Decoction 697 
 
 Compound of Sarsaparilla. 735 
 
 of Tar .' 763 
 
 Delirium Tremens 697, 750, 754 
 
 75 
 
 Elecampane Drops.. 
 Elixir Proprietatus 
 Vitriol 
 
 Worm 
 
 Elm. Slippery 
 
 Emetic 
 
 Powder 
 
 Drops . 
 
 Des] i 
 
 Devi] s Bit 
 
 Diabetes 
 
 Diaphoretic 
 
 Powder 
 
 Diarrhea 342. 729, 732, 
 
 Cordial 761. 
 
 Diet and KuMing of Children 
 
 Directions for Midwives 
 
 Disease, Remarks on 
 
 Diseases of Children 479, 
 
 Women 
 
 of the Heart 
 
 Dislocations and Fractures 
 
 Dittany, Mountain 
 
 Diuretic Drops 
 
 Mixture 
 
 Pills 
 
 Dog Wood 
 
 — - Fennel — Wild Chamomile. 
 
 Dover's Powders 
 
 of Medicine 
 
 Table of 
 
 a, Dysenteric 
 
 Diuretic 
 
 Emmenagogue 
 
 Rheumatic , 
 
 Dropsy 384, 
 
 Dress of Children ..... 
 
 Dragon's Claw 
 
 Dry Measure 
 
 Dwarf Elder 
 
 Dysentery 
 
 Cure for 
 
 Use of Ice in 
 
 Compound for 
 
 Pills, Richardson's 
 
 Dyspepsia 254, 
 
 eptic, or White Ley 
 
 Ear- Ache'. 698, 731, 
 
 Far. Inflammation of 
 
 Early Rising 
 
 Eat. Drink, and Avoid, what to 
 
 Elder 
 
 Elecampane 
 
 623 
 841 
 697 
 872 
 738 
 765 
 486 
 415 
 15 
 518 
 405 
 397 
 866 
 616 
 727 
 764 
 727 
 636 
 642 
 698 
 769 
 771 
 762 
 727 
 763 
 759 
 743 
 494 
 628 
 769 
 625 
 337 
 738 
 341 
 761 
 762 
 739 
 764 
 820 
 820 
 172 
 269 
 622 
 662 
 
 Enema 
 
 Epispastic ; 
 
 Epsom Salts , 
 
 Epilepsy — or Falling Fits 
 
 Ergot. 
 
 Erysipelas — St. Anthonys Fire. 
 
 Black Tongue 
 
 Etherization 
 
 Exercise in the Open Air.. 
 
 on Horseback 
 
 Excessive Flow of Urine — Diabetes.. 
 Expectorant 
 
 Tincture 
 
 Extract of Sarsaparilla 736, 
 
 Eyes, Inflammation of 
 
 Eye-Water 727. 741. 766, 767. 
 
 Ointment 
 
 Falling of the Womb 
 
 Family Medicines, Table of 
 
 Family Medicine, a valuable 
 
 Physic 760, 
 
 Fainting, or Swooning 
 
 Fear , 
 
 Feather Few ...,.,* 
 
 Felon, or Whitlow 732. 
 
 Female Breast, Inflamed 
 
 Fennel Seed 
 
 Fern, Sweet 
 
 Male 
 
 Fever Few 620, 791, 
 
 Fevers, in general 
 
 Fever, Intermittent, or Fever and 
 
 Ague 
 
 Fever, Inflammatory 
 
 Nervous, or Typhoid 
 
 Scarlet.! 250, 
 
 Winter, or Lung Fever... 808. 
 
 Yellow 
 
 Prognosis of. 
 
 Five-Finger 
 
 Flag. Sweet 
 
 Blue 
 
 Flaxseed Tea 
 
 Flea-Bane 
 
 Flesh. Proud 
 
 Flooding 
 
 Flux, Bloody 
 
 Forgiveness 
 
 For the perusal of Mothers 
 
 Foul-Air Death 
 
 Fractures and Dislocations 
 
 Galbanum 
 
 Gall, Beef's 332, 
 
 Galling of Infants .. 
 
 763 
 698 
 699 
 746 
 623 
 699 
 872 
 699 
 703 
 700 
 700 
 700 
 794 
 700 
 827 
 830 
 700 
 273 
 276 
 841 
 701 
 873 
 735 
 820 
 821 
 821 
 448 
 871 
 744 
 871 
 801 
 63 
 616 
 740 
 826 
 616 
 61S 
 641 
 793 
 201 
 
 203 
 2137 
 218 
 542 
 811 
 225 
 242 
 621 
 616 
 623 
 735 
 617 
 86fi 
 443 
 337 
 92 
 466 
 752 
 
 HfiP, 
 701 
 722 
 521 
 
878 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Galvanism 
 
 Gargle : 
 
 for the Mouth or Throat 
 
 for Syphilitic Sore Throat 
 
 for Putrid Sore Throat 
 
 Garlic 651, 
 
 for Ear-Ache 
 
 Gas, Nitrogen 
 
 Gath's Perfection 
 
 Gentian 
 
 Gestation, Influence of the Mind du- 
 ring 
 
 Giddiness — Vertigo 
 
 Ginger GIG, 645, 
 
 Syrup and Tea 645, 
 
 and Chamomile Tincture 
 
 Gilead, Palm of. 
 
 Goitre — Big Neck 
 
 Golden Red 
 
 Gold Thread 
 
 Gonorrhea 
 
 Mixture for 764, 
 
 Gravel . 
 
 Green Salve 
 
 Grief 
 
 Ground Ivy 
 
 Grape Vine, common 
 
 Grapes, American, List of. 
 
 Growth of the Hair increased 
 
 Gum Ammoniac 
 
 Arabic 
 
 Guaiacum 
 
 Kino 
 
 Sweet, use of 
 
 Gutta Percha 
 
 Hair, Human 
 
 Wash, economical 
 
 Hazel Witch 
 
 Head, Wounds of 
 
 Head-Ache 
 
 Pills 
 
 Health 
 
 of Cities 
 
 Heart, Disease of 
 
 Palpitation of. 733, 
 
 Hemorrhage, from the Lungs 
 
 from the Stomach 
 
 from the Nose 
 
 from the Urinary Or- 
 
 641. 
 
 gans 
 
 Hemp, Indian 
 
 Hemlock 
 
 Hemorrhoids, Tiles 
 
 Hives, Syrup for 702, 727, 
 
 Hoarhound 
 
 Hoarseness 293, 725, 
 
 Hollyhock 
 
 Hooping Cough 535, 727, 732, 
 
 Hops ; 633, 703, 
 
 Hope 
 
 Horseback Exercise 
 
 Horse Mint 
 
 Radish 616, 703. 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 354 
 701 
 766 
 733 
 825 
 616 
 820 
 710 
 661 
 633 
 
 460 
 801 
 722 
 649 
 650 
 618 
 853 
 619 
 637 
 605 
 765 
 839 
 868 
 85 
 620 
 656 
 658 
 729 
 702 
 702 
 701 
 706 
 340 
 683 
 366 
 755 
 633 
 865 
 746 
 757 
 166 
 308 
 397 
 755 
 802 
 804 
 804 
 
 805 
 703 
 627 
 555 
 741 
 630 
 737 
 618 
 763 
 734 
 67 
 276 
 618 
 738 
 
 PAGE, 
 
 Hot and Cold Water 739 
 
 How to get Rich < 162 
 
 Husbands, to 141 
 
 Hydragogue 703 
 
 Hydrophobia 748, 858 
 
 Hydriodate of Potash 722 
 
 in Chronic Rheumatism.. 756 
 
 Hyssop 616 
 
 Hysterics — Hysteria 799 
 
 Ice, use of, in Dysentery 341 
 
 Iceland Moss 620 
 
 Indian Hemp 641, 703 
 
 Physic i 704 
 
 Turnip 641 
 
 Indigestion 731 
 
 Indigo, Wild 640 
 
 Infidel, and Infidelity 79 
 
 Inflammation of the Brain 806 
 
 of the Lungs 807 
 
 of the Pleura 811 
 
 of the Stomach 813 
 
 of the Liver — Liver 
 
 Complaint 379 
 
 of the Bowels 816 
 
 of the Kidneys.. 733, 817 
 
 of the Bladtter 818 
 
 of the Spleen 819 
 
 of the Ear 820 
 
 of the Eyes 820 
 
 Inflammatory Fever 237 
 
 Sore Throat 823 
 
 Inflamed Breast 826 
 
 Influenza 822 
 
 Influence of the Mind on the Body ... 41 
 
 during Gestation 460 
 
 of Tobacco 359 
 
 Incontinence of Urine 838 
 
 Incised AYounds 862 
 
 Indolent Ulcers 868 
 
 Injuries and Wounds 862 
 
 Irritable Ulcers 867 
 
 Intemperance Ill 
 
 Intermittent Fever 203 
 
 Iodide of Potassa 704 
 
 in Chronic Pleurisy 813 
 
 Iodine 704. 72G 
 
 Ointment 726J 854 
 
 Ipecac — Ipecacuanha 637, 705 
 
 Wild '... 624 
 
 Iron, Cyanuret of 696 
 
 Rust 706 
 
 Itch 733, 750, 763 
 
 Ivy, Ground 620 
 
 Jaundice 392, 733, 749, 767 
 
 Jalap 638 
 
 Jealousy 88 
 
 Joy 89 
 
 Juniper Berries 631, 706 
 
 Kidneys, Inflammation of 733, 817 
 
 Kindness 106 
 
 King's Evil— Scrofula 376 
 
 Kino, Gum 706 
 
 Labor, or Child-birth 410 
 
INDEX. 
 
 PAGE, 
 
 Lac Sulphur Liniment 767 
 
 Laudanum 706 
 
 Laurel, Camphor 682 
 
 Lavender 669 
 
 Lacerated Wounds 864 
 
 Lead, Sugar of 716 
 
 Lee's Anti-bilious Pills 754 
 
 Lemonade i 785 
 
 Leucorrhea 452 
 
 Pills for 747 
 
 Life Everlasting 616 
 
 Life Root 616 
 
 Lilies, Sirup of 654 
 
 Lily, Sword 615 
 
 Tiger, or Orange 654 
 
 White Pond 648 
 
 Liniment 744 
 
 Anodyne 766 
 
 Chloroform 767 
 
 Lac Sulphur 767 
 
 for Rheumatism 332 
 
 Liquid Measure 769 
 
 Licorice 706 
 
 Liver Complaint 379 
 
 Inflammation of 340 
 
 Liverwort....* 632 
 
 Liver, or Alterative Powders, 872 
 
 Lobelia Inflata 664 
 
 Tincture of. how prepared... 667 
 
 Shrubby...'. 612 
 
 Lock-jaw — Tetanus.. ... 740, 845 
 
 Love 44 
 
 Lungs, Bleeding from 802, 732, 748 
 
 — Inflammation of 807 
 
 and Chest 278 
 
 Lunar Caustic 707 
 
 Mad Dog Bite 858 
 
 Mad Stone 861 
 
 Macrotys 642, 850 
 
 Magnesia 707 
 
 Magnetism. Animal 345 
 
 Magnolia Tree 660 
 
 Management of Children 510 
 
 Mandrake — May Apple 627 
 
 Marsh Mallows 638 
 
 Rosemary 617, 649 
 
 Measles « 550 
 
 Medical Terms Explained 635 
 
 Medicine, a valuable Family 744 
 
 Doses pf 769 
 
 Rules to administer 768 
 
 Measure instead of Weigh, 768 
 
 Medicines, Table of Family 871 
 
 Memory, Pleasures and Pains of 146 
 
 Menses, or Monthly Sickness 431 
 
 Mercurial Disease — Salivation 851 
 
 Ointment 707 
 
 Midwifery 410 
 
 Midwives, Directions for 415 
 
 Milk Sickness 834 
 
 Weed, or Silk Weed 639 
 
 Scab 523 
 
 Mint, Horse 618 
 
 879 
 
 Mint, Mountain. 
 
 Pepper.... 
 
 Spear 
 
 Mindererus, Spirits of. 
 
 Miscarriage 
 
 Mixture, Alterative and Tonic 
 
 Antispasmodic 
 
 Antacid 
 
 Cathartic 
 
 Chalk 
 
 Cholera 
 
 Cough 729, 731, 
 
 Diuretic 
 
 : Gonorrhea 
 
 Iron 
 
 Rheumatic 
 
 Tonic 
 
 r58, 
 
 Monthly Sickness, or Menses... 
 
 Morphine 
 
 Mortification 
 
 of the Bowels 
 
 in Black Tongue. 
 
 Moss, Iceland 
 
 Mouth, Nursing Sore. 
 
 Sore 
 
 Gargle for 
 
 ?34, 
 
 ...... 766, 852, 
 
 Mothers, for the Perusal of 
 
 Mother's Affection 
 
 Motherwort 
 
 Mountain Dittany 
 
 Mint 
 
 Mullein 
 
 Mugwort 
 
 Mumps 
 
 Mustard Seed 708, 
 
 Myrrh 
 
 Narcotics 
 
 Nettle 
 
 Nerve Ointment 
 
 Nervous Diseases 
 
 Causes of 
 
 709, 
 
 or Typhus Fever 
 
 Neuralgia 563, 709, 
 
 Neutralizing Powder or Physic 
 
 Cordial 
 
 Nightmare 
 
 Night Sweats 
 
 Nitre, and Nitric Acid 
 
 Nitrogen Gas 
 
 Nose, Bleeding from 
 
 Number Six. or Hot Drops . 
 
 Improved 
 
 Nursing Sore Mouth 
 
 of Infants 
 
 Nutmeg Tree 
 
 Oil Almond 
 
 Cod-Liver 
 
 Ointment, for Sore Eyes. 
 
 Basilicon 
 
 Iodine 
 
 Mercurial 
 
 Nerve 
 
 Pile 
 
 306. 
 
 302, 
 
 r26« 
 
 747, 
 
 617 
 630 
 628 
 715 
 438 
 759 
 760 
 762 
 760 
 729 
 746 
 763 
 764 
 764 
 760 
 759 
 764 
 431 
 708 
 750 
 817 
 830 
 620 
 852 
 749 
 853 
 466 
 
 61 
 620 
 616 
 617 
 621 
 708 
 541 
 735 
 709 
 709 
 674 
 743 
 563 
 572 
 218 
 723 
 871 
 765 
 709 
 733 
 710 
 710 
 804 
 743 
 873 
 852 
 486 
 653 
 690 
 306 
 821 
 692 
 854 
 707 
 743 
 
 766 
 
880 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Olive, or Sweet Oil,.- Antidote to Poi- 
 sons 856, 
 
 Opodeldoc 
 
 Opium 
 
 Orange, or Tiger Lily 
 
 Oxide of Bismuth 
 
 Palpitation of the Heart 733, 
 
 Palsy — Paralysis 
 
 Painters' Colic .\ 
 
 Paregoric 712, 
 
 Parents, to *.. 
 
 Parsley 
 
 Wild 
 
 Pasque Flower '.. 
 
 Passions, of the 
 
 Pennyroyal 
 
 Peony, Common 
 
 Pepper, Black 
 
 Cayenne 
 
 Tincture of 
 
 650, 
 
 Peppermint 
 
 Peruvian Bark 
 
 Peripneumonia 
 
 Piles 555, 729, 747, 
 
 Ointment for 747, 
 
 Pills, Anodyne Head 
 
 Antidyspeptic 
 
 Cathartic and Antibilious 
 
 for Leucorrhea 
 
 Cough 730, 
 
 for Dysentery 
 
 Head-Ache and Antibilious 
 
 Lee's Antibilious 
 
 Rheumatic 757, 
 
 Physic 
 
 Pitch, Burgundy 
 
 Black 
 
 Physic, Antibilious 
 
 Plantain , 
 
 Water 
 
 Pleasures and Pains of Memorj- 
 
 Pleurisy » 
 
 Chronic 
 
 Pleurisy Root 
 
 Poison, Antidotes for 744, 753, 
 
 of Reptiles and Insects 
 
 Veg. and Poison Vine... 746, 
 
 from Snake-bites 739, 
 
 Poisoned Wounds 
 
 Pneumonia — Inflammation of the 
 
 Lungs 
 
 Pneumonia- Bilious and Typhoid 
 
 Poly Pody 
 
 Poor Appetite 
 
 Poplar Bark 
 
 Poppy 
 
 Potash, Iodide of 
 
 Hydriodate of. 722, 
 
 in Rheumatism.... 
 
 Poultice 712, 
 
 Poultices, Various kinds of 734, 
 
 Powder, Composition 
 
 Diaphoretic 
 
 865 
 744 
 711 
 
 654 
 692 
 755 
 789 
 836 
 744 
 552 
 615 
 617 
 618 
 41 
 624 
 674 
 644 
 643 
 733 
 630 
 637 
 811 
 748 
 766 
 757 
 762 
 873 
 747 
 758 
 762 
 757 
 754 
 758 
 758 
 693 
 721 
 871 
 626 
 615 
 146 
 811 
 813 
 642 
 755 
 865 
 856 
 857 
 865 
 
 807 
 
 810 
 
 622 
 
 732 
 
 631 
 
 712 
 
 704 
 
 734 
 
 756 
 
 742 i 
 
 735 | 
 
 872 ' 
 
 872 ; 
 
 Powder, Dovers' 
 
 Emetic 
 
 Neutralizing 
 
 = Styptic, to stop Bleeding 
 
 Powders, Alterative and Liver 
 
 Pox, or Syphilis 
 
 Practical Receipts 725, 
 
 Prec pitate, Red 
 
 Pregnancy, Signs of 
 
 Vomiting during 
 
 Prickly Ash 622, 
 
 Prognosis of Fevers 
 
 Proud Flesh 
 
 Prunes 
 
 Punctured Wounds 
 
 Pure Air 
 
 Purgative, of Salts and Senna 
 
 an Active 
 
 Valuable 
 
 Putrid Sore Throat 
 
 Queen's Delight 
 
 Quinine 
 
 Quinsy 
 
 Radish, Horse 616, 703. 
 
 Raspberry Bush 
 
 Rattlesnake Bite 739, 
 
 Red Drop 
 
 Precipitate ,... 
 
 Gum of Infants 
 
 Religion 
 
 Remarks on Disease 
 
 Remedy for Cholei-a, Dr. Jordan's 
 
 Retention of Urine 
 
 — of the Meconium 
 
 Remittent Fever 
 
 Rich, how to get 
 
 Rickets 
 
 Ringworm 729, 781, 
 
 Rheumatism 329, 
 
 Rheumatic Compounds 739, 
 
 Tincture 
 
 Pills 757, 
 
 Rhubarb 680, 
 
 Burt, in Diarrhea 344, 
 
 Rose W r illow 
 
 Rules to Administer Medicine 
 
 Sage 
 
 Salivation from Mercury 
 
 Saltpetre — Nitre 
 
 Salt Rheum 
 
 Salts, Epsom 
 
 Salt, Medical Use of. 
 
 in Cholera 
 
 Salve, Black, or All-Healing. 
 
 Green . 
 
 624, 
 
 Sarsaparilla, American 
 
 Compound Decoction of.. 
 
 Extract to make 
 
 Sassafras 630, 
 
 Savine 
 
 Scalds and Burns 741, 
 
 Scammony 
 
 Scarlet Fever 250, 542, 
 
 PAGB. 
 
 698 
 872 
 871 
 862 
 872 
 587 
 871 
 713 
 426 
 430 
 874 
 242 
 866 
 712 
 864 
 501 
 754 
 754 
 871 
 824 
 724 
 713 
 823 
 738 
 678 
 856 
 760 
 713 
 522 
 50 
 15 
 874 
 837 
 519 
 210 
 162 
 844 
 753 
 739 
 759 
 744 
 758 
 713 
 832 
 636 
 768 
 823 
 851 
 714 
 854 
 700 
 342 
 831 
 744 
 868 
 618 
 735 
 736 
 849 
 670 
 760 
 655 
 736 
 
 
INDEX. 
 
 881 
 
 Sciatica 
 
 Scull-Cap 859, 621, 
 
 Scrofula 
 
 Scrofulous Sore Eyes 
 
 Scurvy 
 
 Seneca Snakeroot < 
 
 Senna 
 
 Shortness of Breath 
 
 Sick-Stomach, or Milk Sickness 
 
 Silk, or Milk Weed 
 
 Sleep 
 
 of Infants 
 
 Slippery Elm. 
 
 Poultice. 
 
 Small-Pox 
 
 Smart Weed 
 
 Snake-Bite 
 
 Snakeroot, Black , 
 
 Seneca 
 
 Virginia 
 
 Scotorine Aloe 
 
 Soda, as an Antacid , 
 
 Solomon's Seal , 
 
 Sore Eyes. Inflammatory 
 
 Chronic 
 
 Scrofulous.... 
 
 Mouth, Common 734, 
 
 Nursing 
 
 Throat. Inflammatory 
 
 Remedies for.. 741, 743, 
 
 - Putrid 
 
 Syphilitic 604, 
 
 Sores and Ulcers. 
 
 Southern Sorrel 
 
 Spasmodic and Cramp Tincture 747, 
 
 Spearmint 
 
 Spice Bitters 
 
 Wood 
 
 Spikenard 
 
 Spirits of Mindererus 
 
 of Wine 
 
 Spitting of Blood 748, 
 
 Spleen, Inflammation of. 
 
 Sprains and Bruises 730, 742, 
 
 Spruce 
 
 Squaw-Root — Macroty's 642, 
 
 Squills 
 
 Stammering. Cure for 
 
 Stomach, Bleeding from 
 
 Inflammation of 
 
 Chronic form 
 
 Plaster for Cough 
 
 St. Anthony's Fire — Erysipelas 
 
 St. Vitus' Dance — Chorea 
 
 PAGE, 
 
 752 
 
 724 
 
 376 
 
 821 
 
 843 J 
 
 626 I 
 
 636 i 
 
 728 
 
 834 I 
 
 639 | 
 
 177 1 
 
 506 
 
 623 | 
 
 734 
 
 847 i 
 
 617 ! 
 
 856 
 
 042 
 
 626 ! 
 
 639 | 
 
 672| 
 
 724 ! 
 
 6S6 I 
 
 820 
 
 821 ! 
 
 821 
 
 749 j 
 
 852 ! 
 
 823 j 
 
 749 
 
 824 
 
 733 
 
 867 
 
 053 
 
 873 i 
 
 628 I 
 
 873 
 
 017 
 
 638 | 
 
 715 I 
 
 715 i 
 
 802 j 
 
 819 J 
 
 864 j 
 
 618 
 
 850 
 
 715 
 
 752 
 
 804 
 
 813 
 
 815 
 
 743 
 
 K'27 
 
 71)1 
 
 St. John's Wort 
 
 Sweet Oil — Antidote for Poisons 
 
 Sweet Gum, Use of 
 
 Clover 
 
 Fern 
 
 Swooning, or Fainting 
 
 Sulphur i 
 
 Strychnine 
 
 Styptic Powder 716, 
 
 678 
 805 
 340 
 618 
 618 
 801 
 716 
 751 
 8G2 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Symptoms of Pregnancy 426 
 
 Syphilis, or Pox 587 
 
 Table of Family Medicines 871 
 
 of Doses 771 
 
 fox Grown Persons 773 
 
 for Children 781 
 
 Tansy 625 
 
 Tar, Decoction of 763 
 
 Tea 717 
 
 Coflee and Tobacco, Palpitation 
 
 of the Heart from 364 
 
 Teeth 267, 269 
 
 Teething 527 
 
 Tetter 854 
 
 Tetanus — Lock-Jaw 845 
 
 Thistle, Blessed 618 
 
 Throat, To remove Fishbone from 755 
 
 Inflammatory Sore 823 
 
 Putrid Sore..* 824 
 
 and Mouth, Sore... 734, 741, 749 
 
 Thrush 520 
 
 Tiger or Orange Lily 654 
 
 Tight Lacing, or Corseting 281 
 
 Tincture....." 717 
 
 Antispasmodic 873 
 
 Cayenne 733 
 
 Expectorant .' 873, 
 
 Hydriodate of Potash 734 
 
 Lobelia 730 
 
 Rheumatic 744 
 
 Spasmodic, or Cramp 747 
 
 of Green Walnuts, for Colic 830 
 
 Tobacco, Influence of 359 
 
 Causes Palpitation 304 
 
 Tonic 717 
 
 Mixture 759, 764 
 
 Toothache. 742, 755 
 
 To Husbands 141 
 
 - Parents 552 
 
 - Mothers 400 
 
 - Young Men 102 
 
 - Wives 133 
 
 Trance, or Catalepsy 797 
 
 Tumors 742 
 
 Turkey Oil, for Sore Eyes 821 
 
 Turnip, Indian 041, 655 
 
 Turpentine 717 
 
 Typhus Fever 218 
 
 Typhoid Pneumonia 810 
 
 Ulcers and Old Sores 718, 807 
 
 Irritable 867 
 
 Indolent 80S 
 
 Varicose 809 
 
 Unmarried. Advice tOtt-he 119 
 
 Urinary Organs, Bleeding from 805 
 
 Urine, Retention of 837 
 
 Incontinence of 838 
 
 Excessive ilow of 841 
 
 Uva Ursi 617 
 
 Uterine Astringent 761 
 
 Vaccination » 547 
 
 Valuable Family Medicine 744 
 
 Variola — Small-Pox 847 
 
882 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Varioloid 851 
 
 Varicose Ulcers 8G9 
 
 Vegetable Poison 746, 855 
 
 Venereal Disease 587 
 
 Vertigo — Giddiness 801 
 
 Vervine, in Suppressed Menses 798 
 
 Virtue 138 
 
 Vitriol, Blue 692 
 
 Elixir 699 
 
 White 719 
 
 Vomiting, to stop 831, 834 
 
 During Pregnancy 430 
 
 In Infancy 523 
 
 Walnut. Leaves 661 
 
 Walnuts, Green, Tincture of 836 
 
 Warm Bath 195 
 
 Warts 730 
 
 Wash, Black 764 
 
 for Sore Mouth 741, 748, 740 
 
 Water, Cold 753 
 
 Imprudent Use of 754 
 
 Hot and Cold 739 
 
 Plantain 615 
 
 Weak Nerves 749 
 
 Stomach 739 
 
 Weaning Children 530 
 
 Wen, Cure for 730 
 
 Wild Ivy, Poison from 855 
 
 Winter Fever 808, 811 
 
 What to Eat, Drink, a»d Avoid 269 
 
 White Oak ... 611 
 
 Pond Lily 648 
 
 Vitriol 719 
 
 Whisky— Cure for Snake Bite 857 
 
 Whites, The 452 
 
 Whitlow, or Felon 732 
 
 Whortleberry 618 
 
 Wife, The 474 
 
 Wild Cherry 627 
 
 Chamomile 642 
 
 Indigo 640 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Wild Ipecacuanha 624 
 
 Parsley 617 
 
 Turnip 655 
 
 Willow 720 
 
 Rose 636 
 
 Wine 719 
 
 of American Aloe 673 
 
 Spirits of 715 
 
 Wintergreen 720 
 
 Witch Hazel 633 
 
 Wives, To 133 
 
 Womb, Falling of. 448 
 
 Women, Diseases of. 407 
 
 Worm Elixir 746 
 
 Wormwood 621 
 
 Worms in Children 537, 748 
 
 Wort, Mother 620 
 
 Liver 632 
 
 St. John's 678 
 
 Wounds and Injuries 862 
 
 Treatment of 751, 862 
 
 To stop bleeding of 862 
 
 Healing by First Intention... 863 
 
 Contused 864 
 
 Lacerated 864 
 
 Punctured 864 
 
 Poisoned 865 
 
 Gun-shot 865 
 
 of the Head 865 
 
 of the Joints 866 
 
 Yarrow- 621 
 
 Yaw Root . 617 
 
 Yellow Dock 625 
 
 Yellow Fever 225, 753 
 
 Gum in Children 522 
 
 Parilla 617 
 
 Yeast 720 
 
 Poultice 734 
 
 Young Men, To 162 
 
 Zinc, Chloride of. 721 
 
, ( incinnati, November, 1S57. 
 ° ° ° Still more especi ly is a ■ scien ; he work of this kind, writ- 
 
 ten in familiar language, and free useful to those who maj be so 
 
 situated, that they pan not - ices of a regular physician. Such 
 
 a bo k has a legitimate office, i ; :h it rf res with the rigkets and duties of no 
 
 one. We find many things iu it i - g be preservation of health and n.anage- 
 
 ment of disease, which commend I ■ .. civ.- to th common sense of all. It is suffi- 
 cient to say of the author's treatim nt f lie s. s, and the remedies recommended, that 
 they have the testimonial of >ome of the most eminent physicians in the country. 
 
 [From the Eushville (1ml.) Republican. 
 Dr. Gunn has spent a great deal of labor and time on the work — over three years, 
 we are told — iu order to make it as near wh.it it ought to be, and as near perfect as 
 possible. It describes the various diseases iu plain language, or whenever technical 
 terms are employed they are full, explained, and then gives the treatment for each, 
 generally recommending the most a m < le and harm. ess remedies, yet such as are suffi- 
 ciently efficacious to cure the disease the work also contains a list of all the medi- 
 cines known or in use. including herbs, barks, and roots, with a full description of 
 each, and their properties and uses, together with a great number of medical receipts, 
 and a vast amouut of vaiuab'e information, not .strictly medical. In hue, it seems to 
 be a kind of family medical library, containing about all that the people need to know 
 in regard to medicine and the human system, to enable them to successfully treat all 
 the ordinary diseases common to the country. 
 
 [From the Christian Herald. Cincinnati, January 28, 185S. 
 Gunn's New Domestic Physician. — A week or two since we noticed, very favorably, 
 Dr. Gunn's " New Domestic Phvsician, or Home Buok of Health, " but omitted to state 
 that the publishers are disposing of it wholly through regularly appointed agents, in 
 each county. We are satisfied, from the excellent success that has attended the efforts 
 of those who have been at wor : <. in selling this book, for a few months past, that sub- 
 stantial men, of middle age and small capital, cau find no better business in these hard 
 times. 
 
 [From the West Libertv (0.) Banner, Nov. 13, 1S57. 
 A Noble Book — It is the greatest book of the age — without an equal. It should be 
 owned, read, studied and practiced by every family and every individual every where. 
 Who doubts that "An ounce of Prevention is worth a pound of Cure?" There is 
 not and never has been an author of a domestic or general medical work to compare 
 with Dr. Gunn. His old work was worth many times its price, and sold more exten- 
 sively than any other. This is not a new edition of his old book, but an entirely 
 new work. It is in every sense a most valuable book, and stands without a rival. Nobody 
 should be without it, whether in sickness or in health. 
 
 [From the Missouri Democrat, St. Louis, December 24, 1857. 
 
 It would be much better for both the physician and the patient, if the people 
 generally possessed a more accurate knowledge of medicine, and the human system. 
 They could then more readily distinguish the educated and skillful physician from 
 the empyric and pretender, while they could also treat many of the simple and less 
 dangerous diseases themselves, and thus often avoid, by taking them in time, a long 
 spell of sickness, or a longer doctor's bill. 
 
 There is — and we are glad to see it — a growing demand among the masses for this 
 kind of knowledge. It is a legitimate demand, and should be met by proper works on 
 the subject. Every family stands in need of a volume that will serve as a safe and 
 reliable guide, in cases of sudden illness and in all ordinary complaints, as well as 
 one that gives plain rules for the preservation of health. Such a work, we believe, 
 has at length been published. It is a new work by an old and well-known author. 
 We allude to a work recently published at Cincinnati, entitled " Gunn's New Domestic 
 Physician, or Home Book of Health." The work is written by Dr. John C. Gunn, of 
 Louisville, Ky. — the renowned author of the old work — " Gu?m's Domestic Medicine," 
 which in its day had the most extensive sale of any medical work ever published. 
 This, as may reasonably be supposed, is a much superior work to the old one. It is 
 written in a beautiful style, yet so simple and plain, that a child may understand it. 
 The work contains an appendix on anatomy and physiology, and the laws of health, 
 by Dr. J. H. Jordan, of Cincinnati, which is an important addition. It is, without 
 question, one of the most valuable books of the day, and while we recommend every 
 family to provide themselves with some good work of this kind, we would also recom- 
 mend them to examine this work before procuring any other. 
 
• t [From the Sidney (0.) Journal, Sept. 11, 1857. 
 
 As an author of a family medical, work Dr. Gunn has no equal. His style is excel- 
 lent, ami his ideas clearly expressed. His work is comprehensive and complete. 
 Indeed, to enumerate the merits of this work, is unnecessary — it speaks for itself. 
 We consider it one of the most important (or rather the most important) family work 
 ever published. No one should neglect an opportunity to procure it. 
 
 [From the Shelby County, Ohio, Democrat, Oct., 1857. 
 
 You can make uo better, handsomer or more useful addition to your library than 
 this work. While it ornaments your shelves or adorns your center table it contains 
 that which is more valuable than gold, if you will but heed its teachings. Get the 
 book, and if you follow its directions your doctor bills will be but few, and you will 
 obtain a knowledge of medicine and the human system, that will be worth to you ten 
 times the cost of the book. 
 
 [From the Herald and Era, Indianapolis. January 9, 1858. 
 
 Gunn's New Domestic Physician. — Most of our readers, we presume, know some- 
 thing of Dr. Gunn's old work, known as "Gunn's Domestic Medicine," as it has been a 
 sort of household companion in hundreds and thousands of families for the last fifteen 
 or twenty years, and is still regarded by many a most valuable book. The present book 
 purports to bean entirely new work — more elaborate, more complete, and certainly it is 
 much larger. The old book, though very popular in its day, is a work of the past genera- 
 tion, and must be greatly behind the times in many respects. If the former one was a 
 good work, the new one must be much better. There is much good reason in favor of 
 this conclusion. It is by the same author, written some twenty-five years later; has 
 the advantage of his long experience in the profession ; has been prepared, as is stated, 
 and we doubt not, with great care, and with a direct view to the wants of families, 
 and the non-professional reader, and seems, so far as we are able to judge, to come 
 fully up to the times. 
 
 [From the Olney (Ills.) Times, January 8, 1858. 
 
 There is no book (save the Bible) of more use in a house, especially where there 
 are children, than a good Medical Book — one fully adapted to the wants and compre- 
 hension of parents, and the people generally. Such a work, we are pleased to say, is 
 now being circulated, and offered for subscription in our county. 
 
 Who has not heard of Dr. Gunn? the world-renowned author of the old work — 
 44 Gunn's Domestic Medicine." Here is a new work, much larger, and, being of recent 
 date, must be much better, by the same author. Do you want to have a physician in 
 the house — one that you can rely on at all times? Then get Dr. Gunn. Do you wish 
 to escape sickness, or preserve the health of your family? — get a copy of this work. 
 Would you like to inform your mind on the subject of medicine, health, disease, and 
 the construction, laws, and operations of your own physical system ? — then get this 
 book, for we know of none so well calculated to give all this information. It contains 
 something on all subjects — especially on all connected with health and disease. 
 
 [From the Wilmington (0.) Watchman, January 22, 1858. 
 We would call the particular attention of our readers, and particularly those who are 
 heads of families, to the fact, that the justly celebrated Dr J. C. Gunn has written 
 another great and good work. Dr. Gunn's name is a household word; his reputation as 
 a popular writer is too well known and appreciated by the people of this county to need 
 any recommendation, from any source, to substantiate the merits of the work. His 
 name is a sufficient guaranty. 
 
 CERTIFICATES. 
 
 West Liberty, Ohio, Nov. 1857. 
 Having carefully examined Dr. Gunn's " New Domestic Physician, or Home Book 
 of Health," 1 unhesitatingly say that I believe it to be a valuable work, and should be 
 found in the library of every family. It is written in a plain and communicative style, 
 and is divested of all technicalities, in order that it may be a household companion. 
 
 Dr. I. C. Taylor. 
 
 I have been permitted to peruse and examine Doctor Gunn's new work on Domes- 
 tic Medicine, which, considering its adaptation to the wants of the people, in many 
 accidental emergencies, and sudden attacks of disease, at times and places when the 
 aid of a physician may not be attainable, I heartily commend it as one of the most valu- 
 able works ever published. 
 
 Aside from the practical utility of this volume, the author's style of writing can not 
 fail to improve the reader with its classic beauty. Every intelligent physician should 
 aid in its circulation among his patrons. 
 
 S. N. ECRER, M. D., Covington, Ohio. 
 
 3477 
 
LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 
 
 022 190 057 1 
 
 '■#>. nv 
 
 % 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 m 
 
 -.^w 
 
 
 i is 
 
 
 nunni 
 
 B 
 
 
 V